c4g - Control Unit Use
c4g - Control Unit Use
Instruction Handbook
C4G Software Manuals
C4G
CONTROL UNIT USE
System Software Rel. 3.2x
Access to system (power-on, shutdown, login, logout), user interfaces, use of Teach Pendant,
system controls, WinC4G, Fieldbus and I/O configuration, use of PLC software.
CR00757557_en-00/0708
The information contained in this manual is the property of COMAU S.p.A.
Reproduction of text and illustrations is not permitted without prior written approval by COMAU S.p.A.
COMAU S.p.A. reserves the right to alter product specifications at any time without notice or obligation.
Copyright 2003 by COMAU - Date of publication 07/2008
Summary
I
lb-rc-c4e-usoTOC.fm
SUMMARY
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .XV
Symbols used in the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XV
Reference documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XVI
Modification History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XVI
1. GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..1.1
Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
2. OPERATOR PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2.1
Functions of Operator Panel devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Modal selector switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Emergency stop pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
USB port (optional feature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Hour meter (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
3. USER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..3.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
TP4i/WiTP Teach Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Rear view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
View from above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Interface on Personal Computer (WinC4G). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
4. SYSTEM POWER ON AND SHUT DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..4.1
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
System power-on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
System shut down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Shutdown - system with Teach Pendant connected by cable (TP4i or WiTP wired) . . . . . . . 4.2
Shutdown - system with wireless Teach Pendant (WiTP wireless) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Summary
II
lb-rc-c4e-usoTOC.fm
5. ACCESS TO THE CONTROL (LOGIN/LOGOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
User profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Summary table of access rights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Automatic Timed Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
6. USE OF THE TEACH PENDANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Keys, Pushbuttons and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Blue keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Black keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
Other colours keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
Alphanumeric keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
Keys to switch on the WiTP wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13
Keys to restart the Teach Pendant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14
Pushbuttons and LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14
USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16
Basic information for the use of WiTP wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16
Pairing procedure between WiTP wireless Teach Pendant and C4G Control Unit . . . . . . . 6.17
Unpairing between WiTP Teach Pendant and Control Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21
Emergency Unpairing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22
Restart with WiTP wireless. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23
Practical hints for the use of the WiTP wireless Teach Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.25
Display areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.25
Status bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.25
Messages bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.28
Left Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.29
Right Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.30
Bottom Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.31
Pages Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.32
Execution of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.32
User Interface Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.35
General rules to navigate within the user interface and the field change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.36
Navigation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.36
Field Editing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.37
Dialogue and information windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.41
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.43
Select language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.43
Summary
III
lb-rc-c4e-usoTOC.fm
Login (SL) and Logout (SL/L). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.44
Login. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.44
Logout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.45
Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.45
Complete (CCRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.46
Shut-down (CCRS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.46
Motion Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.47
Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.47
Arm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.47
COORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.48
Uframe, Tool, Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.49
Current arm position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.49
Coop (optional feature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.49
AUX COOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.50
ARM COOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.51
Coop Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.52
AUX J OG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.52
J og Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.52
ARM_LINKED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.53
Advanced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.53
Incremental J og mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.53
J -Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.54
Status (DAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.54
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.56
Laser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.56
Alarm Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.59
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.59
Errors (ULE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.60
Latched . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.61
Actions (ULA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.61
Prog Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.63
Prog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.64
Open (IDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.64
Create. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.64
Save (MS +MS/C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.64
Save data (MS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.65
Save code (MS/C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.65
Save variable as (MS/A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.65
Erase from execution memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.65
Execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.65
Activate (PA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.66
Deactivate (PD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.66
Pause (PSP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.66
Unpause (PSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.66
Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.66
Load... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.67
with another .VAR (As) (ML/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.68
VAR only (Var) (ML/V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.68
Another Var only (Var As) (ML/AV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.68
Convert conflicts (Conv) (ML/C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.68
Activate (PG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.68
Dependencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.68
Summary
IV
lb-rc-c4e-usoTOC.fm
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.68
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.69
Variables (MVV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.69
Callchain (PV/C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.70
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.71
POS SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.71
IDE Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.75
Opening the IDE page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.75
Description of the video screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.76
IDE status lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.76
Editor area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.77
Description of the available functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.80
Prog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.80
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.82
PDL2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.84
Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.91
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95
MOD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95
REC key setting, nodal with $PAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95
Numeric keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.99
I/O Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.101
Set (SI and SO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.102
On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.103
Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.103
Forcing (SIF... SOF...) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.103
On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.103
Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.104
Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.104
Unforce (SIU... SOU...). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.104
Simulate (SIS... SOS...) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.104
On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.105
Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.105
Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.105
Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.105
Not simulated (SIN... SON...) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.105
View (SIV... SOV...) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.105
Zoom in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.106
Zoom out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.106
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.107
Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.107
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.108
Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.108
Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.109
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.109
Maximize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.109
Restore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.109
Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.109
Appl Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.111
Files Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.113
File (F1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.113
Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.114
Summary
V
lb-rc-c4e-usoTOC.fm
Extract (FUCE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.115
Send to (FC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.115
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.115
Delete (FD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.115
Delete permanent (FD/P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.116
Rename (FR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.116
Attribute (FUA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.116
Recycle bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.116
Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.116
Select (F2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.117
Undo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.117
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.118
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.118
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.118
Select all. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.118
Deselect all. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.118
Invert sel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.118
Sel prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.118
View (F3) (FV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.118
Small icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.119
Big icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.119
Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.119
Refresh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.119
Sort by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.119
Utility (F4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.119
Translate (FT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.120
Backup (FUB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.120
Restore (FUR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.120
Device Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.120
Data Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.121
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.121
Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.121
Modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.123
Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.124
AutoApply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.125
System tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.125
Application tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.127
Tables created by the user. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.128
Setup page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.129
Config. Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.130
Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.133
Calib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.134
Ieak. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.137
Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.141
Presse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142
Sik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142
StrokeEnd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.148
AUX_AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.148
Positioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.149
SLIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.152
iPortal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.152
ReloadSw. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.154
Summary
VI
lb-rc-c4e-usoTOC.fm
C4G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.155
TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.156
Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.159
Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.159
Restore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.160
Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.161
Controller (CCS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.161
FB_TOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.162
Install (FUI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.162
IO_TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.162
Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.163
User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.163
Startup (CCLS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.163
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.164
ToolFrame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.166
Service Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.169
Execute (E). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.169
Sysinfo (SCV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.170
Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.171
Multiarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.172
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.172
TP-INT Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.175
Navigation among commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.175
Virtual Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.176
Additional User Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.179
7. SYSTEM COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Commands sent from menu on TP (TPINT page) or from WinC4G (Terminal window) . . . . . . 7.2
Command selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
Typing-in the characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Call-up of recently used parameters (History) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Program commands sent via SYS_CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Option /4 to view in the 40 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Wildcard use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Command options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Viewing and NOPAGE option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Access to the control (login). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Description of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
CONFIGURE branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
Arm menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
Cntrler Login menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
Cntrler Restart menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16
CONFIGURE CONTROLLER STARTUP (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
CONFIGURE CONTROLLER TIME (CCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
Summary
VII
lb-rc-c4e-usoTOC.fm
CONFIGURE CONTROLLER VIEW (CCV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
Load menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18
Save menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20
DISPLAY branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22
Arm menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
Close menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.24
Fieldbus menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.25
Input menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.25
Output menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.27
DISPLAY PROGRAM (DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.28
DISPLAY RESPLC (DR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.28
Vars menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.29
EXECUTE command (E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.29
FILER branch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.30
FILER COPY (FC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31
FILER DELETE (FD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.32
FILER EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.32
FILER PRINT (FP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.32
FILER RENAME (FR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.33
FILER TRANSLATE (FT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.34
UTILITY ATTRIBUTE menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.34
Backup and Restore commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.35
Compressed files management commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.40
Directory management commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.41
FILER UTILITY INSTALL (FUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.41
FILER UTILITY SEARCH (FUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.42
FILER VIEW (FV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.42
MEMORY branch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43
MEMORY DEBUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43
ERASE menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43
MEMORY LOAD (ML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44
MEMORY SAVE(MS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45
MEMORY TEACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.46
VIEW menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.46
PROGRAM branch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.48
PROGRAM ACTIVATE (PA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.48
PROGRAM DEACTIVATE (PD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.49
PROGRAM EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.49
PROGRAM GO (PG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.50
ResPLC menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.51
UTILITY menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.51
STATE menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.52
TEST branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.52
PROGRAM VIEW (PV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.56
SET branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.57
SET ARM menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.57
SET CNTRLR menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.59
SET INPUT menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.60
SET LOGIN (SL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.64
SET OUTPUT menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.64
UTILITY branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.68
UTILITY APPLICATION (UA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.68
UTILITY COMMUNICN menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.68
Summary
VIII
lb-rc-c4e-usoTOC.fm
UTILITY LOG branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.71
HELPIO program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.71
Types of files available in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.74
8. WINC4G PROGRAM - INTERFACE TO C4G ON PERSONAL COMPUTER . . . . . . .8.1
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
WinC4G Activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Connection to the Robot Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Ethernet point to point connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Ethernet connection to the local network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
Remote connection via Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
Network configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
VPN configuration in Windows XP environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7
Connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.13
FTP Server mode connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.14
Remote connection by Proxy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15
Chat Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.16
WinC4G configuration in Proxy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.16
WinC4G configuration in Remote mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.17
Using the Chat Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.18
Disabling the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.19
User interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.19
Tools panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.20
The Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.20
File Translation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21
Cause/Remedy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.23
Errors Display and Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.24
Files Manipulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.25
Viewing and editing of.UDB file (optional service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.33
Directories Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.34
Files Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.35
Output Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.36
WinC4G operating parameters set-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.37
Commands Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.38
Files Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.39
Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.40
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.41
Manipulation Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.41
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.42
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.42
CompactFlash Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.42
How to obtain a new licence for WinC4G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.47
Most common problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.48
9. BASIC PROCEDURES FOR PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1
Summary
IX
lb-rc-c4e-usoTOC.fm
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Diagram of steps to develop a program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Programming in IDE (on TP) for a motion program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4
Access to programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4
Program Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4
Selecting one or more text lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
Deleting/restoring one or more lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
Move the Edit cursor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
Inserting a new instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
Commenting/Uncommenting a program line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
Changing an existing instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
Inserting/viewing /deleting variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
Importing from other programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
Viewing a program in pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
Teaching positions (insertion of a move instruction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
Setup the REC key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
Teaching new positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
Changing existing positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
Program execution test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9
Activating/deactivating a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9
Aborting the execution of an instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9
Setting step mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10
Move the execution cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10
Inserting/removing a break point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10
Bypassing an instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11
Execute a temporary instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11
Saving the program and closing IDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11
Executing the program in automatic mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
Programming in WinC4G (on PC) of NON motion programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
Program Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.13
Data Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.14
Code Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.14
How to write Program Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.14
Memory Debug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.15
Screen page structure and function keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.16
Screen page structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.16
Function Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.17
Teaching the positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.20
Execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22
Programs Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.23
Commands Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.23
Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.23
Debug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.26
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.29
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.29
Quit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.29
Save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.30
Save_as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.30
Suspend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.30
Memory Teach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.31
Memory Teach screen layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.31
Summary
X
lb-rc-c4e-usoTOC.fm
Accessing Teach Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.32
Teaching Positional Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.33
Teaching a PATH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.33
Adding and Removing PATH nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.34
Modifying PATH node fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.35
Special Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.36
Exiting Memory Teach Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.38
Memory management from TP4i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.38
Display/Removal of variables in memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.38
Saving the variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.39
File management from TP4i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.39
Viewing the list of files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.39
Saving files on XD: unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.39
Restoring backup files of a program variables or code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.40
10. FILE MANAGEMENT BETWEEN PC AND CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.1
View files on PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Delete files on PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
File transfer from PC to Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
File transfer from Controller to PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
Automatic file transfer from Controller to PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
Automatic file transfer from PC to Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
11. SYSTEM OPERATING MODES AND STATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.1
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
System operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
System states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
HOLD status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4
AUTO status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4
PROGR status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5
AUTO-T status (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5
ALARM status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5
Stand-by function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6
12. FB_TOOL PROGRAM FOR CONFIGURATION OF FIELDBUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.1
FB_TOOL activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Fieldbus (F1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Activate the Fieldbus function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Select the required Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3
Select Type of Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3
Select the Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4
Action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4
Viewing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5
Summary
XI
lb-rc-c4e-usoTOC.fm
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9
Completion of the operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.28
Save (F5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.28
Close (F6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29
13. I/O CONFIGURATION PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..13.1
IO_TOOL Program - I/O Configuration in VP2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3
IO_TOOL activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3
I/O ports(F2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4
Activate I/O Ports function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5
Type of port selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5
Selection of the range of ports for operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6
Execute the Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7
Operation completion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.15
Digital or Remote I/O Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.16
System I/O ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.18
DSA (F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.22
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.23
HDIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.24
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.25
Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.26
Stroke-end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.26
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.27
HAND (F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.28
VIEW (F2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.29
Configure (F5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.30
Save (F5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.33
Close (F6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.34
IO_INST Program - I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.35
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.35
Program installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.35
Used Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.35
Port_io . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.36
Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.64
Dsa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.96
Hand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.105
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.108
Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.109
Configuration example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.109
Complete configuration example of SIK device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.109
Complete configuration example of IEAK device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.117
14. HINTS FOR THE I/O SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..14.1
Basic principles for the I/O configuration and use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Software configuration of DNP, PFP, IBC/O boards (Field bus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2
Internal Slave Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3
Summary
XII
lb-rc-c4e-usoTOC.fm
Master Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6
External Slaves Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7
$FB_INIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.10
$FB_CNFG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.10
I/O points configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.11
Physical / logical mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.11
Configuration of Command Word from remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.14
I/O point status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.17
Copying I/O points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.17
Dynamic connection and disconnection method for a Field Bus network node. . . . . . . . . . . 14.21
Command Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.21
Status Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.22
Node connection procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.23
Node disconnection procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.24
15. PLC SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION AND USE
(OPTIONAL FEATURE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.1
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Workbench configuration to map the C4G Controller I/Os. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2
Import of C4G Robot Control Unit information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2
Symbols set-up to be included in a resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3
Setting the information required for a project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4
TCP/IP network configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4
Setting the symbols to include in a resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6
Setting a configuration cycle time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7
I/O Wiring with C4G Control Unit I/O points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7
Wiring a variable with read access to a C4G port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9
Wiring a variable with write access to a C4G port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10
PLC resource creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.12
Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.12
Commands available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.13
Debug mode activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.13
Resource control from Workbench. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.15
Inhibited commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.15
PLC software modifications on-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.16
On-line change command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.16
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.17
Operation successful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.18
Operation unsuccessful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.18
Modification On-line and Debug mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.20
PLC resource download and upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.20
Download. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.21
Conditions required for the success of the operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.21
Available options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.21
Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.22
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.22
Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.24
Summary
XIII
lb-rc-c4e-usoTOC.fm
Management of PLC software on the C4G Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.24
Management of binary ISaGRAF files in the C4G Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.24
The Resplc folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.25
Binary files management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.25
ISaGRAF binary files export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.25
System shutdown and restart with PLC program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.26
Resplc program menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.26
Display Resplc command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.29
Summary
XIV
lb-rc-c4e-usoTOC.fm
Preface
XV
HS-RC-C4E-0_01.fm
00/0708
PREFACE
Symbols used in the manual
Reference documents
Modification History
Symbols used in the manual
The symbols for WARNING, CAUTION and NOTES are indicated below together with
their significance.
This symbol indicates operating procedures, technical information and
precautions that if ignored and/or are not performed correctly could cause
injuries.
This symbol indicates operating procedures, technical information and
precautions that if ignored and/or are not performed correctly could cause
damage to the equipment.
This symbol indicates operating procedures, technical information and
precautions that it are important to highlight.
Preface
XVI
HS-RC-C4E-0_01.fm
00/0708
Reference documents
This document refers to the C4G Control Unit.
The complete set of manuals for the C4G consists of:
These manuals are to be integrated with the following documents:
Modification History
In version 3.0 a new section has been added, entitled IO_TOOL Program - I/O
Configuration in VP2 to describe the use of the I/O configuration software,
implemented in Visual PDL2 language.
In version 3.1x, the contents of section IO_TOOL Program - I/O Configuration in
VP2 have been separated into the following two sections:
FB_TOOL program for configuration of Fieldbus (program to manage fieldbus
configuration)
IO_TOOL Program - I/O Configuration in VP2 (program to manage I/O ports
configuration)
The following paragraphs have been added in version 3.2x:
par. 5.3.1 Automatic Timed Logout on page 5-5
Tab. 6.2 - Restart events with WiTP wireless
Connection between PC and Control Unit: par. 8.4.3 Remote connection via
Internet on page 8-5 added
Comau C4G Control Unit Technical Specifications
Transport and installation
Guide to integration, safeties, I/O and
communications
Use of Control Unit.
Comau Robot Technical Specifications
Transport and installation
Maintenance
Programming PDL2 Programming Language Manual
VP2 - Visual PDL2
Motion programming
Applications According to the required type of
application.
Altersys PLC programming ISaGRAF Workbench
General Safety Precautions
1-1
ge-0-0-0_01.FM
07/1007
1. GENERAL SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS
1.1 Responsibilities
The system integrator is responsible for ensuring that the Robot and Control
System are installed and handled in accordance with the Safety Standards in force
in the country where the installation takes place. The application and use of the
protection and safety devices necessary, the issuing of declarations of conformity
and any CE markings of the system are the responsibility of the Integrator.
COMAU Robotics & Service shall in no way be held liable for any accidents caused
by incorrect or improper use of the Robot and Control System, by tampering with
circuits, components or software, or the use of spare parts that are not originals or
that have not been defined as equivalent by COMAU Robotics & Service
The application of these Safety Precautions is the responsibility of the
persons assigned to direct / supervise the activities indicated in the Applicability
section,They are to make sure that the Authorised Personnel is aware of and
scrupulously follow the precautions contained in this document as well as the
Safety Standards in addition to the Safety Standards in force in the country in which
it is installed.
The non-observance of the Safety Standards could cause injuries to the operators
and damage the Robot and Control System.
The installation shall be made by qualified installation Personnel and should
conform to all national and local codes.
General Safety Precautions
1-2
ge-0-0-0_01.FM
07/1007
1.2 Safety Precautions
1.2.1 Purpose
These safety precautions are aimed to define the behaviour and rules to be observed
when performing the activities listed in the Applicability section.
1.2.2 Definitions
Robot and Control System
The Robot and Control System consists of all the functions that cover: Control Unit,
robot, hand held programming unit and any options.
Protected Area
The protected area is the zone confined by the safety barriers and to be used for the
installation and operation of the robot
Authorised Personnel
Authorised personnel defines the group of persons who have been trained and assigned
to carry out the activities listed in the Applicability section.
Assigned Personnel
The persons assigned to direct or supervise the activities of the workers referred to in
the paragraph above.
Installation and Putting into Service
The installation is intended as the mechanical, electrical and software integration of the
Robot and Control System in any environment that requires controlled movement of
robot axes, in compliance with the safety requirements of the country where the system
is installed.
Programming Mode
Operating mode under the control of the operator, that excludes automatic operation
and allows the following activities: manual handling of robot axes and programming of
work cycles at low speed, programmed cycle testing at low speed and, when allowed,
at the working speed.
Auto / Remote Automatic Mode
Operating mode in which the robot autonomously executes the programmed cycle at the
work speed, with the operators outside the protected area, with the safety barriers
closed and the safety circuit activated, with local (located outside the protected area) or
remote start/stop.
Maintenance and Repairs
Maintenance and repairs are activities that involve periodical checking and / or
replacement (mechanical, electrical, software) of Robot and Control System parts or
components, and trouble shooting, that terminates when the Robot and Control System
has been reset to its original project functional condition.
General Safety Precautions
1-3
ge-0-0-0_01.FM
07/1007
Putting Out of Service and Dismantling
Putting out of service defines the activities involved in the mechanical and electrical
removal of the Robot and Control System from a production unit or from an environment
in which it was under study.
Dismantling consists of the demolition and dismantling of the components that make up
the Robot and Control System.
Integrator
The integrator is the professional expert responsible for the installation and putting into
service of the Robot and Control System.
Incorrect Use
Incorrect use is when the system is used in a manner other than that specified in the
Technical Documentation.
Range of Action
The robot range of action is the enveloping volume of the area occupied by the robot
and its fixtures during movement in space.
1.2.3 Applicability
These Specifications are to be applied when executing the following activities:
Installation and Putting into Service;
Programming Mode;
Auto / Remote Automatic Mode;
Robot axes release;
Stop distances (threshold values)
Maintenance and Repairs;
Putting Out of Service and Dismantling
General Safety Precautions
1-4
ge-0-0-0_01.FM
07/1007
1.2.4 Operating Modes
Installation and Putting into Service
Putting into service is only possible when the Robot and Control System has been
correctly and completely installed.
The system installation and putting into service is exclusively the task of the
authorised personnel.
The system installation and putting into service is only permitted inside a protected
area of an adequate size to house the robot and the fixtures it is outfitted with,
without passing beyond the safety barriers. It is also necessary to check that under
normal robot movement conditions there is no collision with parts inside the
protected area (structural columns, power supply lines, etc.) or with the barriers. If
necessary, limit the robot working areas with mechanical hard stop (see optional
assemblies).
Any fixed robot control protections are to be located outside the protected area and
in a point where there is a full view of the robot movements.
The robot installation area is to be as free as possible from materials that could
impede or limit visibility.
During installation the robot and the Control Unit are to be handled as described in
the product Technical Documentation; if lifting is necessary, check that the eye-
bolts are fixed securely and use only adequate slings and equipment.
Secure the robot to the support, with all the bolts and pins foreseen, tightened to
the torque indicated in the product Technical Documentation.
If present, remove the fastening brackets from the axes and check that the fixing
of the robot fixture is secured correctly.
Check that the robot guards are correctly secured and that there are no moving or
loose parts. Check that the Control Unit components are intact.
If applicable, connect the robot pneumatic system to the air distribution line paying
attention to set the system to the specified pressure value: a wrong setting of the
pressure system influences correct robot movement.
Install filters on the pneumatic system to collect any condensation.
Install the Control Unit outside the protected area: the Control Unit is not to be used
to form part of the fencing.
Check that the voltage value of the mains is consistent with that indicated on the
plate of the Control Unit.
Before electrically connecting the Control Unit, check that the circuit breaker on the
mains is locked in open position.
Connection between the Control Unit and the three-phase supply mains at the
works, is to be with a four-pole (3 phases +earth) armoured cable dimensioned
appropriately for the power installed on the Control Unit. See the product
Technical Documentation.
The power supply cable is to enter the Control Unit through the specific fairlead and
be properly clamped.
Connect the earth conductor (PE) then connect the power conductors to the main
switch.
General Safety Precautions
1-5
ge-0-0-0_01.FM
07/1007
Connect the power supply cable, first connecting the earth conductor to the circuit
breaker on the mains line, after checking with a tester that the circuit breaker
terminals are not powered. Connect the cable armouring to the earth.
Connect the signals and power cables between the Control Unit and the robot.
Connect the robot to earth or to the Control Unit or to a nearby earth socket.
Check that the Control Unit door (or doors) is/are locked with the key.
A wrong connection of the connectors could cause permanent damage to the
Control Unit components.
The C4G Control Unit manages internally the main safety interlocks (gates,
enabling pushbuttons, etc.). Connect the C4G Control Unit safety interlocks to the
line safety circuits, taking care to connect them as required by the Safety
standards. The safety of the interlock signals coming from the transfer line
(emrgency stop, gates safey devices etc) i.e. the realisation of correct and safe
circuits, is the responsibility of the Robot and Control System integrator.
The safety of the system cannot be guaranteed if these interlocks are wrongly
executed, incomplete or missing.
The safety circuit executes a controlled stop (IEC 60204-1 , class 1 stop) for the
safety inputs Auto Stop/ General Stop and Emergency Stop. The controlled stop is
only active in Automatic states; in Programming the power is cut out (power
contactors open) immediately. The procedure for the selection of the controlled
stop time (that can be set on ESK board) is contained in the Installation manual .
When preparing protection barriers, especially light barriers and access doors,
bear in mind that the robot stop times and distances are according to the stop
category (0 or 1) and the weight of the robot..
Check that the environment and working conditions are within the range specified
in the specific product Technical Documentation.
The calibration operations are to be carried out with great care, as indicated in the
Technical Documentation of the specific product, and are to be concluded
checking the correct position of the machine.
To load or update the system software (for example after replacing boards), use
only the original software handed over by COMAU Robotics & Service.
Scrupulously follow the system software uploading procedure described in the
Technical Documentation supplied with the specific product. After uploading,
always make some tests moving the robot at slow speed and remaining outside the
protected area.
Check that the barriers of the protected area are correctly positioned.
In the cell/line emergency stop circuit the contacts must be included of the control
unit emergency stop buttons, which are on X30. The push buttons are not
interlocked in the emergency stop circuit of the Control Unit.
Check that the controlled stop time is consistent with the type of Robot connected
to the Control Unit. The stop time is selected using selector switches SW1 and
SW2 on the ESK board.
General Safety Precautions
1-6
ge-0-0-0_01.FM
07/1007
Programming Mode
The robot is only to be programmed by the authorised personnel.
Before starting to program, the operator must check the Robot and Control System
to make sure that there are no potentially hazardous irregular conditions, and that
there is nobody inside the protected area.
When possible the programming should be controlled from outside the protected
area.
Before operating inside the Protected Area, the operator must make sure from
outside that all the necessary protections and safety devices are present and in
working order, and especially that the hand-held programming unit functions
correctly (slow speed, emergency stop, enabling device, etc.).
During the programming session, only the operator with the hand-held terminal is
allowed inside the Protected Area.
If the presence of a second operator in the working area is necessary when
checking the program, this person must have an enabling device interlocked with
the safety devices.
Activation of the motors (Drive On) is always to be controlled from a position
outside the range of the robot, after checking that there is nobody in the area
involved. The Drive On operation is concluded when the relevant machine status
indication is shown.
When programming, the operator is to keep at a distance from the robot to be able
to avoid any irregular machine movements, and in any case in a position to avoid
the risk of being trapped between the robot and structural parts (columns, barriers,
etc.), or between movable parts of the actual robot.
When programming, the operator is to avoid remaining in a position where parts of
the robot, pulled by gravity, could execute downward movements, or move
upwards or sideways (when installed on a sloped plane).
Testing a programmed cycle at working speed with the operator inside the
protected area, in some situations where a close visual check is necessary, is only
to be carried out after a complete test cycle at slow speed has been executed. The
test is to be controlled from a safe distance.
Special attention is to be paid when programming using the hand-held terminal: in
this situation, although all the hardware and software safety devices are active, the
robot movement depends on the operator.
During the first running of a new program, the robot may move along a path that is
not the one expected.
The modification of program steps (such as moving by a step from one point to
another of the flow, wrong recording of a step, modification of the robot position out
of the path that links two steps of the program), could give rise to movements not
envisaged by the operator when testing the program.
In both cases operate cautiously, always remaining out of the robots range of
action and test the cycle at slow speed.
General Safety Precautions
1-7
ge-0-0-0_01.FM
07/1007
Auto / Remote Automatic Mode
The activation of the automatic operation (AUTO and REMOTE states) is only to
be executed with the Robot and Control System integrated inside an area with
safety barriers properly interlocked, as specified by Safety Standards currently in
force in the Country where the installation takes place.
Before starting the automatic mode the operator is to check the Robot and Control
System and the protected area to make sure there are no potentially hazardous
irregular conditions.
The operator can only activate automatic operation after having checked:
that the Robot and Control System is not in maintenance or being repaired;
the safety barriers are correctly positioned;
that there is nobody inside the protected area;
that the Control Unit doors are closed and locked;
that the safety devices (emergency stop, safety barrier devices) are
functioning;
Special attention is to be paid when selecting the automatic-remote mode, where
the line PLC can perform automatic operations to switch on motors and start the
program.
Robot axes release
In the absence of motive power, the robot axes movement is possible by means of
optional release devices and suitable lifting devices. Such devices only enable the
brake deactivation of each axis. In this case, all the system safety devices
(including the emergency stop and the enable button) are cut out; also the robot
axes can move upwards or downwards because of the force generated by the
balancing system, or the force of gravity.
Stop distances (threshold values)
As for the stop distance threshold values for each robot type, please turn to the
COMAU Robotics & Service Dept.
Example: Considering the robot in automatic mode, in conditions of maximum
extension, maximum load and maximum speed, when the stop pushbutton is
pressed (red mushroom head pushbutton on WiTP) an NJ 370-2.7 Robot will stop
completely in approx. 85 of motion, equivalent to approx. 3000 mm displacement
measured on the TCP flange. Under these conditions indicated, the stoppage time
of the NJ 370-2.7 Robot is 1.5 seconds.
Considering the robot in programming mode (T1), when the stop pushbutton is
pressed (red mushroom head pushbutton on WiTP) an NJ 370-2.7 Robot will stop
completely in approx. 0.5 seconds.
Maintenance and Repairs
When assembled in COMAU Robotics & Service, the robot is supplied with
lubricant that does not contain substances harmful to health, however, in some
cases, repeated and prolonged exposure to the product could cause skin irritation,
or if swallowed, indisposition.
First Aid. Contact with the eyes or the skin: wash the contaminated zones with
abundant water; if the irritation persists, consult a doctor.
Before using the manual release devices, it is strongly recommended to sling the
robot, or hook to an overhead travelling crane.
General Safety Precautions
1-8
ge-0-0-0_01.FM
07/1007
If swallowed, do not provoke vomiting or take anything by mouth, see a doctor as
soon as possible.
Maintenance, trouble-shooting and repairs are only to be carried out by authorised
personnel.
When carrying out maintenance and repairs, the specific warning sign is to be
placed on the control panel of the Control Unit, stating that maintenance is in
progress and it is only to be removed after the operation has been completely
finished - even if it should be temporarily suspended.
Maintenance operations and replacement of components or the Control Unit are to
be carried out with the main switch in open position and locked with a padlock.
Even if the Control Unit is not powered (main switch open), there may be
interconnected voltages coming from connections to peripheral units or external
power sources (e.g. 24 Vdc inputs/outputs). Cut out external sources when
operating on parts of the system that are involved.
Removal of panels, protection shields, grids, etc. is only allowed with the main
switch open and padlocked.
Faulty components are to be replaced with others having the same code, or
equivalent components defined by COMAU Robotics & Service.
Trouble-shooting and maintenance activities are to be executed, when possible,
outside the protected area.
Trouble-shooting executed on the control is to be carried out, when possible
without power supply.
Should it be necessary, during trouble-shooting, to intervene with the Control Unit
powered, all the precautions specified by Safety Standards are to be observed
when operating with hazardous voltages present.
Trouble-shooting on the robot is to be carried out with the power supply cut out
(Drive off).
At the end of the maintenance and trouble-shooting operations, all deactivated
safety devices are to be reset (panels, protection shields, interlocks, etc.).
Maintenance, repairs and trouble-shooting operations are to be concluded
checking the correct operation of the Robot and Control System and all the safety
devices, executed from outside the protected area.
When loading the software (for example after replacing electronic boards) the
original software handed over by COMAU Robotics & Service is to be used.
Scrupulously follow the system software loading procedure described in the
specific product Technical Documentation; after loading always run a test cycle to
make sure, remaining outside the protected area
Disassembly of robot components (motors, balancing cylinders, etc.) may cause
uncontrolled movements of the axes in any direction: before starting a disassembly
procedure, consult the warning plates applied to the robot and the Technical
Documentation supplied.
It is strictly forbidden to remove the protective covering of the robot springs.
After replacement of the ESK module, check on the new module that the setting
of the stop time on selector switches SW1 and SW2 is consistent with the type of
Robot connected to the Control Unit.
General Safety Precautions
1-9
ge-0-0-0_01.FM
07/1007
Putting Out of Service and Dismantling
Putting out of service and dismantling the Robot and Control System is only to be
carried out by Authorised Personnel.
Bring the robot to transport position and fit the axis clamping brackets (where
applicable) consulting the plate applied on the robot and the robot Technical
Documentation.
Before stating to put out of service, the mains voltage to the Control Unit must be
cut out (switch off the circuit breaker on the mains distribution line and lock it in
open position).
After using the specific instrument to check there is no voltage on the terminals,
disconnect the power supply cable from the circuit breaker on the distribution line,
first disconnecting the power conductors, then the earth. Disconnect the power
supply cable from the Control Unit and remove it.
First disconnect the connection cables between the robot and the Control Unit,
then the earth cable.
If present, disconnect the robot pneumatic system from the air distribution line.
Check that the robot is properly balanced and if necessary sling it correctly, then
remove the robot securing bolts from the support.
Remove the robot and the Control Unit from the work area, applying the rules
indicated in the products Technical Documentation; if lifting is necessary, check the
correct fastening of the eye-bolts and use appropriate slings and equipment only.
Before starting dismantling operations (disassembly, demolition and disposal) of
the Robot and Control System components, contact COMAU Robotics & Service,
or one of its branches, who will indicate, according to the type of robot and Control
Unit, the operating methods in accordance with safety principles and safeguarding
the environment.
The waste disposal operations are to be carried out complying with the legislation
of the country where the Robot and Control System is installed.
General Safety Precautions
1-10
ge-0-0-0_01.FM
07/1007
Operator Panel
2-1
HS-RC-C4E-USO_01.fm
00/0708
2. OPERATOR PANEL
The push buttons, selector switches and communication interfaces used in normal use
of the Control Unit are located on the OPM panel. Moreover, as an option, there is a
service socket inside the electric cabinet.
illustrates the layout of the devices.
The function is described in detail in the following section Functions of Operator Panel
devices.
Fig. 2.1 - Operator Panel - devices layout
2.1 Functions of Operator Panel devices
This section gives a detailed description of the functions of the Operator Panel devices.
In particular:
Main switch
Modal selector switch
Emergency stop pushbutton
C4G Control Unit Operator panel detail
Operator Panel
2-2
HS-RC-C4E-USO_01.fm
00/0708
Emergency stop pushbutton
Hour meter (optional)
2.1.1 Main switch
Cuts out the power supply voltage to the Control Unit.
See Fig. 2.2 - Main switch.
If the control panel door is opened and closed again, make sure that the control lever
and/or the extension shaft of the main switch Q100 are in the same position (ON /OFF)
to avoid causing damage to the control lever.
2.1.2 Modal selector switch
To select the Control Unit control mode (see Tab. 2.1 - Modal selector switch):
T1 - The programming operator can carry out the editing points self-teaching, and
check the programming functions. The robot moves at low speed, not more than
250 mm/s to flange centre, to tool centre point (TCP) and to any extreme tool. The
operator can work inside the cell.
Wait at least 30 seconds before powering on again.
Fig. 2.2 - Main switch
Main switch,
European version
Main switch,
American version (ON position)
Main switch,
American version (OFF position)
Operator Panel
2-3
HS-RC-C4E-USO_01.fm
00/0708
T2 (optional) - The programmer can check the program and robot functioning at
working speed. The 250 mm/s limit is not enabled. The operator can work inside
the cell.
AUTO - The operator can check the program functioning at working speed,
activating the start command from the teach pendant. The operator cannot work
inside the cell.
REMOTE - The program running is controlled by external equipment (for example,
line PLC or local control panels). The operator cannot work inside the cell.
The selector switch key can be removed in all positions.
2.1.3 Emergency stop pushbutton
To stop the machine immediately. When pressed it cuts out the power to the robot
motors and activates the brakes.
See Fig. 2.3 - Emergency stop pushbutton.
It has forced opening contacts with mechanical latching. It has to be pulled to reset.
According to the selection on the J P15 jumpers of the RSM board, the AUTO or
REMOTE mode stop takes place:
in controlled mode (class 1 as per standard EN 60204-1)
immediately (class 0 as per standard EN 60204-1).
Warning! The program ALWAYS starts at low speed, and the user, if wished, CAN
increase it to the working speed. If jogkeys are used, the system will
AUTOMATICALLY reduce the speed to below the limit of 250 mm/s at flange
centre.
When using with the status selector switch in position T2 programming control
mode the operator is to be very careful, since the risks due to the faster speed of
the robot cannot be solved with the normal procedures and precautions.
Tab. 2.1 - Modal selector switch
Modal selector switch with position T2 (optional) Modal selector switch, standard
Operator Panel
2-4
HS-RC-C4E-USO_01.fm
00/0708
In T2 or T1 mode, the stop is always immediate (class 0 as per standard EN 60204-1).
Fig. 2.3 - Emergency stop pushbutton
2.1.4 USB port (optional feature)
The USB port is used to connect an external storage device, to load and save the
programs from Control Unit to PC and vice-versa.
The Teach Pendant has specific controls to activate the file transfer.
The device is automatically acknowledged a few seconds after insertion and can be
extracted without any specific operations.
To ensure correct file transfer it is not to be extracted during the transfer.
2.1.5 Hour meter (optional)
Where present, it displays the number of operating hours (in DRIVE ON) of the
Controller and the Robot.
Fig. 2.4 - Hour meter (optional)
User Interface
3-1
HS-0-C4E-USO_31bis.fm
00/0708
3. USER INTERFACE
3.1 Introduction
The C4G Robot Control Unit, for robot manual handling, to create, modify and run
programs, to modify step-by-step moves, to supply system control and monitoring
functions, requires the use of the following user interfaces:
TP4i/WiTP Teach Pendant
Interface on Personal Computer (WinC4G)
3.2 TP4i/WiTP Teach Pendant
The C4G Robot Control Unit Teach Pendant is used to manually control the robot
movements, to program it and execute and modify step by step movements, it supplies
system control and monitoring functions, as well as including the safety devices
(enabling device and emergency stop pushbuttons). It is user-friendly and is suitable for
right-hand or left -hand use.
It is able to support any system software version starting from 2.0, and includes the
following components:
Display graphic 6.4" TFT colour; resolution 640x480 pixel
Keys
Pushbuttons and LEDs
USB port.
The following Fig. 3.1, Fig. 3.2 Fig. 3.5, Fig. 3.6 and Fig. 3.7 illustrate the components
of TP4i Teach Pendant and, by means of user-friendly hypertext connections, give
access to detailed descriptions of keys, pushbuttons, LEDs, display and communication
port, available in the following Chap.6. - Use of the Teach Pendant.
The Teach Pendant can be chosen from the following two versions:
TP4i - connected by cable to the C4G Control Unit
WiTP
wired - connected by cable to the C4G Control Unit
wireless - connection without wires (wireless) to C4G Control Unit, with
WindowsCE operating system.
For more detailed information regarding the Teach Pendant (TP4i and/or WiTP),
see the following manuals:
C4G Control Unit- Technical Specifications - par.4.7.2 Teach Pendant;
C4G Control Unit - Transport and Installation - chap.6 Start-up procedure;
C4G Control Unit - Maintenance - par.3.9 WiTP emergency unpairing procedure;
Chap.6. - Use of the Teach Pendant.
User Interface
3-2
HS-0-C4E-USO_31bis.fm
00/0708
3.3 Front view
Fig. 3.1 - TP4i front view
User Interface
3-3
HS-0-C4E-USO_31bis.fm
00/0708
Fig. 3.2 - WiTP front view
3.4 Rear view
Fig. 3.3 - Rear view of TP4i and WiTP wired
User Interface
3-4
HS-0-C4E-USO_31bis.fm
00/0708
Fig. 3.4 - Rear view of WiTP wireless (Reset pushbutton)
Fig. 3.5 - Rear view of TP4i and WiTP wired
User Interface
3-5
HS-0-C4E-USO_31bis.fm
00/0708
3.5 View from above
Fig. 3.6 - View from above A
Fig. 3.7 - View from above B
3.6 Interface on Personal Computer (WinC4G)
The Winc4g program is the interface on Personal Computer to the Robot C4G Control
Unit.
Groups inside a set of functions, which are:
display of files in the Control Unit,
the possibility to edit them, translate them into executable format (.COD) and run
them,
search and display of errors,
possibility to issue commands to the Control Unit,
conversion of existing programs as a function to new reference points.
For further details, see the Chap. WinC4G Program - interface to C4G on Personal
Computer.
For the use of the TP see the Chap. Use of the Teach Pendant
User Interface
3-6
HS-0-C4E-USO_31bis.fm
00/0708
System power on and shut down
4-1
HS-0-C4E-USO_43.fm
00/0708
4. SYSTEM POWER ON AND SHUT
DOWN
4.1 Foreword
This chapter describes the most frequently used procedures:
System power-on
System shut down
4.2 System power-on
To power on the C4G Robot Control Unit, proceed as follows:
a. close the door (or doors) of the Robot Controller Cabinet.
b. Check that these cables are connected:
power supply cable
cables X10 and X60 to the robot
safety devices cable X30
c. Turn on the electric power supply by turning the main switch to ON (see Main
switch in Chap. Operator Panel)
Upon Control Unit activation, power is supplied to all the modules
d. If it is wished to use the Teach Pendant, the steps to be followed depend on the
type of Teach Pendant installed on the system:
d.1 if it is TP4i (connected by cable), no further operations are necessary: the system
activates the display, runs the initialising procedure, displays the Home Page and
makes the pendant ready for use. Step e. is then carried out immediately.
d.2 If the Teach Pendant is the WiTP wireless, these steps have to be followed:
d.2.1 power-on the Teach Pendant (if it is off), pressing keys AUX B- and AUX B+
simultaneously (see Keys to switch on the WiTP wireless)
d.2.2 place the WiTP on the docking station (if not already there) and wait for the
information "system ready for pairing"
d.2.3 carry out the pairing with the Control Unit (see par. 6.4.1 Pairing procedure
between WiTP wireless Teach Pendant and C4G Control Unit on page 6-17).
Wait at least 20 seconds after a power-off before re-powering the control unit.
System power on and shut down
4-2
HS-0-C4E-USO_43.fm
00/0708
Lastly, the system shows the Home Page and the pendant is ready for use.
e. Regardless of the type of installed Teach Pendant, if robot movements are
foreseen (motion program activated by the STARTUP program), it is necessary to
power on the drives (see description of the DRIVE ON function in par. 6.5.1.4 Right
Menu on page 6-30) and press the START key (see description of START (green)
key, in par. 6.2.1.3 Other colours keys on page 6-10).
4.3 System shut down
The system can be shut down by just moving the main switch to OFF. In this case, the
shut-down procedure is:
a. set the system in DRIVE OFF (see DRIVE OFF function description in par. 6.5.1.4
Right Menu on page 6-30)
b. Move the main switch to OFF (see par. 2.1.1 Main switch on page 2-2 in
Chap. Operator Panel).
The software shutdown is requested when the user wishes to carry out the shutdown of
the Control Unit and the Teach Pendant.
Before introducing the relevant command, set the DRIVEs OFF (see description of the
DRIVE OFF function in par. 6.5.1.4 Right Menu on page 6-30).
The command to activate the software shutdown is
ConfigureControllerRestartShutdown (CCRS) and can be requested from either :
Teach Pendant (TP4i or WiTP), or
Personal Computer (through WinC4G program), or
PDL2 program (through SYS_CALL).
According to whether the system is provided with TP wired or wireless, the shutdown
procedure is the one described in the following paragraphs:
Shutdown - system with Teach Pendant connected by cable (TP4i or WiTP wired)
Shutdown - system with wireless Teach Pendant (WiTP wireless).
4.3.1 Shutdown - system with Teach Pendant connected by
cable (TP4i or WiTP wired)
In this case (TP4i or WiTP wired), the procedure requires also the following steps:
a. after approx 5 seconds the Teach Pendant display is cleared. Wait at least 10
seconds
b. move the main switch to OFF (see par. 2.1.1 Main switch on page 2-2 in
Chap. Operator Panel).
It is in any case strongly recommended to follow the software shutdown
procedure, to avoid unnecessary waste of RPU buffer battery cycles that would
reduce the life of the battery.
Furthermore, in the case of a system with wireless Teach Pendant, it is
NECESSARY to use the software shutdown to close in consistent situations.
System power on and shut down
4-3
HS-0-C4E-USO_43.fm
00/0708
4.3.2 Shutdown - system with wireless Teach Pendant (WiTP
wireless)
Following the software shutdown request, if the WiTP is paired, before authorising the
Control Unit shutdown, the system asks the user to run the unpairing.
The user should proceed as follows:
a. place the WiTP on the docking station
b. press the pairing/unpairing pushbutton (see D key in Fig. 4.1).
Fig. 4.1 - Pairing/unpairing pushbutton
The following situations may arise:
b.1 if all proceeds correctly, the system shuts down the WiTP; therefore the user can
use the main switch to shut down the C4G Control Unit;
b.2 the system detects a fault BEFORE the pairing/unpairing pushbutton has been
pressed - the C4G Control Unit does NOT prepare for shutdown and the WiTP is
WARNING - With WiTP wireless installed, it is strongly recommended to apply the
following general criterion : DO NOT SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM IF THE TEACH
PENDANT IS PAIRED!
This is most important to avoid misalignments between the C4G Control Unit and
the WiTP wireless Teach Pendant. At the next system power-on it would be
necessary to carry out an emergency unpairing, to recover the situation which
has become inconsistent.
System power on and shut down
4-4
HS-0-C4E-USO_43.fm
00/0708
NOT shutdown. The shutdown command is aborted and the user is notified by a
specific message. The situation is the same as it was before the shutdown request;
b.3 the system detects a fault AFTER the pairing/unpairing pushbutton has been
pressed - the C4G Control Unit shutdown is suspended, but the WiTP is unpaired
and off. It is, in any case a consistent situation. The user can act on the main switch
to shut down the C4G Control Unit.
During the software shutdown procedure the system waits for the unpairing request and
for its completion, for a pre-set timeout. If this timeout expires, it means that one of the
following situations may have occurred:
WiTP does not communicate (not on docking station, too far away, there are
interposed obstacles, battery low, off, etc.) - in this case, the user has to remove
the cause: the pendant resumes normal communication
after requesting the shutdown procedure, the user has not pressed the
pairing/unpairing key; in this case, the user has to ask for the shutdown again
and PRESS the pairing/unpairing pushbutton when requested by the system
the unpairing procedure has not terminated correctly; the user has to find the
cause and remove it.
To manage these situations, see also the C4G Control Unit Maintenance Manual,
chap.4 - Help to solve problems.
Note that if the unpairing is NOT performed correctly, the shutdown command is
ALWAYS aborted.
WARNING!
If the command comes from the program (via SYS_CALL), it is a good rule to
always test the final status of the SYS_CALL to manage any anomalous situations.
The system asks for unpairing ONLY if the WiTP wireless is paired!
Access to the Control (LOGIN/LOGOUT)
5-1
HS-0-C4E-USO_49.fm
00/0708
5. ACCESS TO THE CONTROL
(LOGIN/LOGOUT)
5.1 Introduction
To access the Control Unit, regardless of the device from which dialogue with the
controller is desired (Teach Pendant or WinC4G program from PC), a Login is
necessary, otherwise the only commands available are for viewing.
To terminate access to the Control Unit, so that unauthorised personnel cannot enter, it
is necessary to execute a Logout.
If working with the Teach Pendant, the Login can be performed in one of these ways:
like Login command (Softkey (F2) of the Central Menu on the TP4i Home Page, or
from TP-INT Page as SetLogin command.
If working through WinC4G, the operator is asked to Login to the connection toward the
Controller; the SetLogin command is in the commands menu.
5.2 User profile
Regardless of the method used, a Username and a Password must always be specified,
to be acknowledged by the Controller to be interfaced; these must be defined and saved
beforehand in the Controller database.
There are five types of user predefined and recognised by the control unit:
Administrator
Default
Maintenance
Programmer
Service
Technology
They are described in the following sections.
The access rights are associated to each of these categories, and enable or disable the
use of a certain command, also according to the system status. On TPINT, the
commands that are disabled are shown in low case and the cursor positioning with the
cursor keys is disabled.
The definition of these profiles is assigned to an administrator user who can declare
them, after Login on the control, in the data base of the controller sending:
the ConfigureControllerLoginAdd command and the associated option from
TP-INT Page, or
Access to the Control (LOGIN/LOGOUT)
5-2
HS-0-C4E-USO_49.fm
00/0708
the Add command, using the Users softkey (F1) from Setup page, Login sub-page,
on the TP4i.
Next, it is necessary to execute
the ConfigureSaveAll command, from TP-INT Page, or
the Save command, by means of the Config. softkey (F1) in the Setup page, on
TP4i
The C4G Control Unit is delivered to the customer with the following predefined users:
programmer user
Username: pu
Password: pu
maintenance engineer user
Username: mu
Password: mu
administrator user
Username: admin
Password: admin
The programmer login is the default login that is held after a Restart Cold, since it is
saved as Startup Login (SetControllerLoginStartup command).
If the predefined users (programmer or maintenance engineer) are not those required
by the end customer, others can be defined.
To do so, from the administrator user, send the ConfigureControllerLoginAdd
command from TP-INT or use the Login section on the Teach Pendant Setup page.
5.2.1 Administrator
The only task of this user is to enter and/or delete the users in the data base (file .UDB)
that gives access to the system; therefore many other commands are not enabled for
the Administrator.
Each time it is wished to add (or remove) a user level, it is necessary to perform the
following steps:
Enter the system as administrator user (SetLogin from TP-INT Page, or Login
softkey (F2) from the Teach Pendant Home Page). If a new profile for the
administrator has not been already defined, the Username admin and the
Password admin are predefined in the system;
to add the new user, proceed in one of these ways:
from TP-INT Page, enter ConfigureControllerLoginAdd with the user profile,
the Username and the Password;
from the Teach Pendant, using the Add command, through the Users softkey
(F1), in the Login sub-page of the Setup page, enter the user profile, the
Username and the Password.
to check that the insertion has taken place, proceed with one of these methods:
from TP-INT Page, enter ConfigureControllerLoginView;
from the Teach Pendant, select the Login sub-page on the Setup page
perform the Logout to exit from the system as administrator:
from TP-INT Page enter the SetLogin/Logout command, or
from the Teach Pendant Home Page, with a long pressure on the Login
softkey (F2) select the Logout option
Access to the Control (LOGIN/LOGOUT)
5-3
HS-0-C4E-USO_49.fm
00/0708
Login again entering the newly defined Username and Password, to check it has
been entered correctly;
Save the settings using one of these methods:
from TP-INT Page, enter ConfigureSave;
from the Teach Pendant, enter the Save command through the Config.
softkey (F1) on the Setup page.
5.2.2 Default
The type of user to be identified is the operator running a production line. The main
operations that he/she requires are to start and stop the programs, to delete alarms,
manual movements, override modification, restart and shut down of the Controller.
5.2.3 Programmer
The programmer user is enabled, mainly, to execute the operations associated to the
development, the verification and the setting up of the programs.
5.2.4 Maintenance
The type of user to be identified is the integrator. This user has more potential than the
programmer.
5.2.5 Service
He/she also performs servicing and is a user enabled to execute operations connected
to system updating, using commands for software loading and machine calibration.
Access to the Control Unit with this profile, is exclusive: if a user connects to the system
as Service, it will be possible to connect to the Control Unit, from other devices, only
specifying the same Username and the same Password.
5.2.6 Technology
With the technology user access is allowed to some functions of the installed
application, typical of that application. See the specific application manual for further
information.
5.2.7 Summary table of access rights
The following table indicates the current settings regarding access rights of the
above-listed predefined users. The codes in the table regarding the users are: D for
Default, A for Administrator, M for Maintenance, P for Programmer and S for Service.
The corresponding command from SYS_CALL is indicated in brackets.
Access to the Control (LOGIN/LOGOUT)
5-4
HS-0-C4E-USO_49.fm
00/0708
COMMAND PROGR AUTO-T LOCAL REMOTE
Add a login to the database (CCLA) A A A A
Delete a login from the database A A A A
Assign the Startup Login (CCLS) P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S
Assign the Startup program (CCS) P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S
Assign the time (CCT) M,S M,S M,S M,S
J og on an arm D,P,M,S D,P,M,S
Modify the override (SAG). Set the active arm for the
teach pendant (SAT)
D,P,M,S D,P,M,S D,P,M,S D,P,M,S
Disable limit switch errors (SAN) P,M,S
Turn Set operation on the axes (CAT) D,P,M,S
Load axis data from retentive memory (CARL) M,S M,S
Save data in retentive memory (CARS) M,S M,S M,S M,S
Arm: enable (SAE), disable (SAD), simulation (SAS),
simulated state removal (SAU).
S S S S
Calibration of an arm (CAC) S
Control restart (CCRC) A,D,P,M,S A,D,P,M,S A,D,P,M,S A,P,M,S
Control shut-down (CCRS) D,P,M,S D,P,M,S D,P,M,S D,P,M,S
Load control system software (CCRR) M,S M,S
Lock keyboard (SCK) M,S M,S M,S M,S
Load configuration file .C4G (CLA,CLC) M,S M,S
Save configuration file .C4G (CSA, CSC) A,P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S
Execution of an instruction (E) P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S S
Delete(FD), rename (FR), translate (FT) a file A,P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S
Creation (FUDM), deletion (FUDD) of a directory A,P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S
Compressed files management (FUC.) A,P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S
Applications installation (FUI) P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S
Copy file from external device (FUR) P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S
Change attributes of a file (FUA) M,S M,S M,S M,S
Access to Memory Debug environment (MD) P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S
Program Edit and IDE environment P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S
Load programs in memory (ML). Save in UD: (MS) A,P,M,S A,P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S
Delete programs (MEP), variables (MEV), both (MEA)
from memory
A,P,M,S A,P,M,S P,M,S M,S
Program activation (PA), deactivation (PD), loading and
activation (PG)
A,D,P,M,S D,P,M,S D,P,M,S M,S
Access to the Control (LOGIN/LOGOUT)
5-5
HS-0-C4E-USO_49.fm
00/0708
D: default, the user who is defined by ConfigureControllerLoginAdd without options.
A: Administrator, defined with ConfigureControllerLoginAdd/Admin
M: Maintenance, defined with ConfigureControllerLoginAdd/Maintenance
P: Programmer, defined with ConfigureControllerLoginAdd / Programmer
S: Service, defined with ConfigureControllerLoginAdd / Service
It is also possible to store a startup login used by the Controller at each restart
(ConfigureControllerLoginStartup command or Setup page on the Teach Pendant).
5.3 Logout
If working with the Teach Pendant, apply prolonged pressure to softkey F2 of the Central
Menu on Home Page (see par. 6.7.2.2 Logout on page 6-45).
If working with WinC4G, press the disconnection key, or use SetLogin/L from the
control menu.
5.3.1 Automatic Timed Logout
This function has been implemented to prevent unauthorized persons executing
potentially hazardous operations during the system processing cycle.
The main purpose is that the system generates a Logout after the Teach Pendant user
has remained inactive for a certain period of time.
This time is linked to the keyboard activity: there is a timeout to shut down the Teach
Programs debug: temporary interruption of execution
(PSP), resume execution (PSU), bypass on suspensive
instruction (PSB), breakpoint insertion/deletion (PTB)
P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S
Change program step (PTS) P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S
Access to Memory Teach environment (MT) P,M,S P,M,S
Operations on Inputs (except access to privileged
inputs) (Set Input )
P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S
Operations on Outputs (SetOutput) P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S
Forcing of privileged inputs (SIFP) / outputs (SOFP.) S S S S
Start / interrupt a protocol (UCM., UCD), set
properties of a port (UCP), or the default port (UCS
P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S M,S
Connection via modem (UCR) P,M,S P,M,S P,M,S M,S
Access to all devices S S S S
Deactivate all programs through Cntrl Y M,S M,S
Display contents of all log files S S S S
As from system software version 3.20, there is also a special Automatic Timed
Logout function, described in the next paragraph.
COMMAND PROGR AUTO-T LOCAL REMOTE
Access to the Control (LOGIN/LOGOUT)
5-6
HS-0-C4E-USO_49.fm
00/0708
Pendant screen after a period of keyboard inactivity (see par. 6.5 Display on page 6-25).
From that instant the time count starts, after which the system executes the automatic
Logout.
When a user wishes to use the Teach Pendant after an automatic Logout, it is
necessary to first access again (Login).
When an automatic Logout takes place, some environments carry out special
operations. In particular:
Files Page - the system resets the current directory to UD:
Data Page - any open tables are "frozen": any modifications remain where they are
at that moment (in TP memory or in Controller memory). The system informs the
user with an "Insufficient Rights" message. At the next Login the message is no
longer present and the table is displayed again
IDE Page - the system closes the current editing session. If this operation requires
viewing of the dialogue with user window (for example relating to the cursor
position and modifications that have not been saved), the automatic Logout
procedure is suspended until the user answers these questions.
For information on this operating configuration by the user, see Startup (CCLS)
in Setup page.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-1
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
6. USE OF THE TEACH PENDANT
6.1 Introduction
This chapter gives detailed information on how to use the Teach Pendant, both for the
TP4i model (connected by cable to the C4G Control Unit) and for the WiTP model (both
cable connection and wireless type).
1 - Pushbuttons 2 - Display
3 - Blue keys 4 - Other colours keys
5 - J PAD for TP4i and J PAD for WiTP 6 - J OG keys for TP4i and J OG keys for WiTP
7 - Alphanumeric keypad 8 - LEDs
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-2
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
The following subjects are dealt with:
Keys, Pushbuttons and LEDs
Basic information for the use of WiTP wireless
Display
USB port
User Interface Pages
6.2 Keys, Pushbuttons and LEDs
Keys
Pushbuttons and LEDs
6.2.1 Keys
The Teach Pendant keyboard (see Fig. 3.1 and Fig. 3.2 in par. 3.2 TP4i/WiTP Teach
Pendant on page 3-1) is basically arranged in the following manner:
Blue keys
Black keys
Other colours keys
Alphanumeric keypad
Keys to switch on the WiTP wireless
Keys to restart the Teach Pendant
NOTE -Unless specified otherwise, the descriptions that follow are valid for both
Teach Pendant models (TP4i and WiTP wired, WiTP wireless).
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-3
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
6.2.1.1 Blue keys
Fig. 6.1 - Layout of blue keys for TP4i
Fig. 6.2 - Layout of blue keys for WiTP
They are divided into:
Function keys
The function keys are used to activate the associated softkeys belonging to the
different Menus.
It is possible to distinguish:
Left Menu keys (L1..L6)
Right Menu keys (R1..R6)
Bottom Menu keys (F1..F6)
General use keys
They are the following keys:
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-4
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
SHIFT
still in combination with other keys; the use changes according to the
environment and the function of the key it is associated to
Fig. 6.3 - SHIFT keys
MORE
when the softkeys of the Left Menu and/or Right Menu are more than 6, the
associated MORE key allows the scrolling of them all
HELP
while using TP-INT Page, when this key is pressed the corresponding help
screen pages are activated; in any case, for future versions the use of the
HELP key will be available for other User Pages too. In some situations the
simultaneous pressing of the SHIFT + HELP keys will display a pop-up
window with suggestions.
Navigation keys
NOTE
Note that, according to the type of Teach Pendant (TP4i/WiTP), the position of the
SHIFT keys changes (see Fig. 6.3 keys highlighted in red).
TP4i WiTP
Page Up and Page Down keys
They move the cursor respectively to the beginning and to the end of the screen
page depending on the context in which they are used.
Cursor keys (up arrow, down arrow, right arrow, left arrow): to move inside the
screen page fields.
ESC key: returns back, cancelling the current action
ENTER key: confirms the current action
TP4i
SHIFT keys (left and right): can be used in combination with other navigation
keys.
See NOTE about WiTP.
WiTP
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-5
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
6.2.1.2 Black keys
These keys are for robot motion.
According to whether the Teach Pendant is TP4i or WiTP, the black keys may differ.
Therefore the two situations are described separately:
TP4i
WiTP
6.2.1.2.1 TP4i
Fig. 6.4 - Black keys layout for TP4i
They are divided into:
Motion keys
For the correct use of these keys, read carefully the Navigation Mode in par. 6.6
User Interface Pages on page 6-35
For the DRIVE ON and DRIVE OFF functions, see Enabling Device and Right Menu
STEP key- Sets continuous running mode (STEP DISABLED) on the active current
arm move program.
BACK key - Causes the movement backward, to the start position of the current
movement, during step-by-step checking of a program.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-6
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
REC key - in editing environment, it inserts a move instruction, the declaration of
the corresponding position variable to which the current arm position is assigned
COORD key - selects the reference system:
JOINT - joint mode. The keys are associated to each of the axes of the selected
arm; any auxiliary axes, if present, follow those of the arm. Pressing one of such
keys determines the movement of the corresponding axis in positive or negative
direction, according to the direction indicated by the plate on the arm.
BASE - linear movement mode according to the world reference frame x, y, z (the
workshop reference frame). The first keys allow linear movement in the direction of
the three axes of the world reference system, the next three keys allow the tool
rotation around the same axes keeping the TCP position unchanged.Note that the
world frame is not directly defined by any system variable; in fact, it is the robot base
that is represented as to the world, through the $BASE variable
TOOL - linear movement mode according to the tool reference frame x, y, z (or TCP
frame).The first three keys allow linear movement in the direction of the three axes
of the tool reference frame (defined by
$TOOL predefined variable); the next three keys allow tool rotation around the
same axes keeping the TCP position unchanged (tool work point).
UFRAME - linear movement mode according to the user reference frame x, y, z (for
example the set of three that describes the workpiece being machined).The first
three keys allow linear movements in the direction of the three axes of the user
reference frame (defined by $UFRAME predefined variable); the next three keys
allow tool rotations around the same axes keeping the TCP position unchanged
WR-BASE, WR-TOOL, WR-UFRAME: if pressed together with the SHIFT key, the
COORD key allows passing between Cartesian movement modes (BASE, TOOL,
USER) and Wrist J NT (X,Y,Z and joints of axes 4,5,6). For further information see
the chapter ROBOT MOTION IN PROGRAMMING MODE of the Motion
Programming Manual.
+% and -%: key
to change the OVERRIDE. Combined with SHIFT key the following values can be
obtained
SHIFT-% -->25%
SHIFT +% -->100%
JOG keys
Such keys can be used to move the robot axes. AUX keys can be
configured for axes 7, 8, 9, 10, two at a time
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-7
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
J PAD
The position of the user can be configured in the Advanced sub-page of the Motion
Page.
6.2.1.2.2 WiTP
Fig. 6.5 - Black keys layout for WiTP
The J PAD group allows jogging referred to the USER position.
Furthermore:
The two cursor keys on the left refer to moves along axis z: upward and
downward movements
the four keys on the right are respectively for movements along x axis
(upward arrow and downward arrow) and along y axis (left arrow and
right arrow). The movements along x axis are for moving away, and for
approaching the user; the movements along y axis are for moving left
and right, always referred to the user
WARNING - For configuration with integrated Gantry with 3 linear axes, the JPAD
is managed differently to normal operation.
The two arrow keys on the left refer to movements of the gantry auxiliary
axis configured as Z
The four keys on the right refer respectively to movements of gantry
auxiliary axis configured as X (up arrow and down arrow) and to
movements of auxiliary axis configured as Y (LH arrow and RH arrow).
The position of the user does NOT have influence on the JPAD functioning, and
therefore the controls in Advanced sub-page of Motion Page DO NOT effect
handling with JPAD.
Gantry movement with JPAD is the same as with JOG keys AUX A - AUX B.
It is to be borne in mind that any move executed using JPAD is always according
to user reference ($UFRAME), except for movement of Gantry with 3 linear axes,
which is always a joint move.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-8
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
They are divided into:
Motion keys
For the DRIVE ON and DRIVE OFF functions, see Enabling Device and Right
Menu.
The functions previously activated by the STEP and REC keys, on the Teach
Pendant connected via cable (TP4i), are available in IDE environment (see
par. 6.11 IDE Page on page 6-75). To access the related descriptions, see:
STEP function - par. Step on page 6-82
REC function - it is softkey F5 on IDE Page and the first softkey at the top left
on the Virtual Keyboard of TP-INT Page.
BACK key - for the backward movement, to the starting position of the current
movement, during the step-by-step verification of program.
See par. Step on page 6-82, in IDE Page.
COORD key - reference system selection :
JOINT - joints mode. The keys are associated to each of the selected arm axes;
any auxiliary axes present follow this arm. Pressing one of the keys moves the
corresponding axis in the plus or minus direction according to the directions
indicated by the plates on the arm.
UFRAME - linear move mode according to the user x, y, z reference frame (for
example the frame that describes the part under process). The first three keys are
for linear movement in the direction of the three axes of the user reference system
(defined by the $UFRAME variable); the next three keys are for rotation of the
fixture around the same axes keeping the TCP position unchanged.
BASE - linear displacement mode according to the x, y, z reference frame (the
workshop reference frame). The first three keys are for linear moves in the direction
of the three axes of the contour reference system; the next three keys are to rotate
the fixture around the same axes keeping the TCP position unchanged. It is to be
remembered that the contour frame is not defined directly by system variables, in
fact it is the robot base that is represented in relation to the frame through the
$BASE variable.
TOOL - linear movement mode according to the tool x, y, z reference frame (or TCP
frame). The first three keys are for linear moves in the direction of the three tool
reference system axes (defined by the $TOOL variable); the next three keys are for
fixture rotation around the same axes keeping the TCP position unchanged (tool
work point).
WR-BASE, WR-TOOL, WR-UFRAME: if pressed together with the SHIFT key, the
COORD key allows passage between Cartesian move modes (BASE, TOOL,
USER) and Wrist J NT (X,Y,Z and joints axes 4,5,6). For further information see the
chapter ROBOT MOTION IN PROGRAMMING MODE of the Motion
Programming Manual.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-9
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
AUX key - pressing this key increases (in circular mode) the AUX-A index, the key
that moves auxiliary axis A. When pressed together with the SHIFT key
(SHIFT+AUX) it increases (in circular mode) index AUX-B, the key that moves
auxiliary axis B. The values of AUX-A and AUX-B are displayed on the Motion
page, sub-page Coop.
See par. 6.8.2 Coop (optional feature) on page 6-49.
The same information is displayed in the Status bar, in the Arm field (fourth field).
ARM key - corresponds to the Arm softkey of the TP4i Right Menu (see ARM (R1)).
In Multiarm systems, it is used to manage the index of the main Arm and the
synchronised Arm, displaying in the Status bar, in exactly the same way as by
entering in the Motion Page, sub-page Basic and modifying the Arm field.
The functioning is as follows:
In DRIVE-OFF - pressing ARM increases in circular mode the index of the main
Arm, but never altering the Arm quantity in the Status bar (if there is only one Arm,
it remains one, if there are two Arms, two remain). The new value is the first valid
Arm index after an increment.
Pressing SHIFT+ARM increases in circular mode the index of the synchronised
Arm.
It is the only combination of keys able to change the quantity of Arms in the Status
bar. It always passes to two Arms when there is only one Arm in the Status bar. It
returns to one Arm when the index of the second Arm becomes equal to the first
Arm.
In DRIVE-ON - pressing ARM has two effects:
- if DRIVE-ON has taken place with only 1 Arm selected ($TP_SYNC_ARM[2]=0),
the Arm index is incremented, as for DRIVE-OFF;
- if DRIVE-ON has taken place with 2 Arms selected, the selection is inverted for
the Arm that will be moved with jog keys.
For example, if there are 3 Arms and the current situation is Arm: 2<1, where Arm
2 is that moved by jog keys, pressing ARM, the index is NOT incremented (it does
NOT change to 3), but the situation becomes Arm: 1<2 , i.e., the Arm moved by
jog keys is now number 1. The first number displayed is always the Arm moved
by jog keys. SHIFT+ARM cannot be pressed.
A LONG PRESSING of the ARM key cyclically displays the
possible indexes of the main Arm: when the required index is reached,
releasing the key makes this choice definite. While the key is pressed, the index is
displayed in brackets. When the final choice is made, the brackets disappear.
Keys +% and -%
to change the OVERRIDE. Combined with the SHIFT key, the following values can
be obtained:
SHIFT -% -->25%
SHIFT +% -->100%
JOG keys
These keys can be used to move the robot axes. The AUX keys
can be configured for axes 7, 8, 9, 10, two at a time.
WiTP wireless power-on keys
These are keys AUX B- and AUX B+(highlighted in red in the
figure on the side) that, if pressed simultaneously, power-on the
WiTP.
For further information see paragraph Keys to switch on the WiTP
wireless.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-10
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
J PAD
The position of the user can be configured on sub-page Advanced of the Motion Page.
6.2.1.3 Other colours keys
According to whether the Teach Pendant is TP4i or WiTP, the layout of these keys
differs:
RESET (white)
press to reset the ALARM state; if the cause that generated the alarm concerns
safety devices (e.g.: TP mushroom button, external mushroom button, automatic
line barrier, etc.), the alarm is not deleted until the cause has been removed.
START (green)
in PROGR mode it is used to execute movements (from editing/debug environment
or Execute command) for all the time it is kept pressed. In LOCAL status it starts
the motion program that is in READY state, waiting for this key.
The J PAD group enables jog referred to the USER POSITION. More precisely:
The two cursor keys on the left are for moves along axis z - upward and
downward moves.
The four keys on the right are for moves along axis x (up arrow and down
arrow) and along axis y (LH arrow and RH arrow) respectively.
Movements along axis x move away and approach in relation to the
user; moves along axis y are moves to the left and to the right, always
in relation to the user.
WARNING - For configuration with integrated Gantry with 3 linear axes, the JPAD
is managed differently to normal operation.
The two arrow keys on the left refer to movements of the gantry auxiliary
axis configured as Z
The four keys on the right refer respectively to movements of gantry
auxiliary axis configured as X (up arrow and down arrow) and to
movements of auxiliary axis configured as Y (LH arrow and RH arrow).
The position of the user does NOT have influence on the JPAD functioning, and
therefore the controls in Advanced sub-page of Motion Page DO NOT effect
handling with JPAD.
Gantry movement with JPAD is the same as with JOG keys AUX A - AUX B.
It is to be borne in mind that any move executed using JPAD is always according
to user reference ($UFRAME), except for movement of Gantry with 3 linear axes,
which is always a joint move.
TP4i WiTP
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-11
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
HOLD (yellow)
pressing this key stops all HOLDable programs and the motion for all Arms. The
next time it is pressed the HOLD status is removed.
6.2.1.4 Alphanumeric keypad
The alphanumeric keypad operates in the same way as the most widely used standard
keypads for mobile phones. Furthermore:
The bottom right key (on the right of '0' key) is used to set the keypad mode. Each
time this key is pressed the mode changes, in sequence, between
alphabetic low case (abc)
alphabetic high case (ABC)
numerical (123)
fixed number ('123*'); contextual information: if the context requires it, the
alphanumeric keypad is set in numeric mode and it is not possible to pass
over to the another mode.
The current mode is displayed on the Status bar.
Special characters are activated by pressing '1' key; the only special characters
that can be directly entered are '-' symbol (bottom left key) and '.' symbol (bottom
right key). When in high case alphabet or low case alphabet mode, pressing
key 1 activates a virtual keyboard for facilitated entry of characters and symbols.
Fig. 6.6 is an example of a screen page for the use of the special characters in the
IDE Page environment.
TP4i WiTP
For WiTP, key '1' (see key highlighted in red in the figure) shows a serigraph that
informs the user that the special characters table can be activated.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-12
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.6 - Special characters - example
Three groups of characters are available:
special characters
high case alphabet +numbers
low case alphabet +numbers
shown in Tab. 6.1.
To choose the symbol to be entered, move inside the group with the cursor keys
(see Navigation keys) and confirm the choice by pressing ENTER.
Tab. 6.1 - Groups of special characters
Window 1
Window 2
Window 3
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-13
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
To pass from one window to the next or to the previous one, use the Page Up and
Page Down keys (see Navigation keys).
To exit, act in one of the following ways:
press ESC
press key 1 again.
6.2.1.5 Keys to switch on the WiTP wireless
If the Teach Pendant is the WiTP wireless type, to switch on, press the AUX B+ and
AUX B- keys simultaneously, for at least 2 seconds.
See Fig. 6.7.
However, these keys can be released once all the Teach Pendant LEDs are alight.
See par. 6.2.2 Pushbuttons and LEDs on page 6-14.
It is recommended, even if not compulsory, to switch the Teach Pendant on, while it is
in the docking station.
Fig. 6.7 - WiTP wireless power-on keys
To enter the space character, select any empty soft key (i.e. that does not
correspond to a symbol): the last 6 in Window 1, the last 4 in both Window 2 and
in Window 3.
It is also possible to enter a string of characters in mixed mode , either through
the virtual keyboard of characters and symbols from the alphanumeric keypad, or
using the Template activated by the Central Menu.
However, if the WiTP wireless is switched on out of the docking station, after
switching on, it is necessary to
place it in its housing (docking station)
run the Pairing procedure between WiTP wireless Teach Pendant and C4G
Control Unit procedure.
For any other information see the following manuals:
C4G Control Unit - Technical Specifications;
C4G Control Unit - Transport and Installation;
C4G Control Unit - Maintenance.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-14
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
6.2.1.6 Keys to restart the Teach Pendant
If the Teach Pendant becomes locked in a condition from which autonomous
re-enabling is not possible, or in any case a restart is necessary for other reasons, press
simultaneously the four pushbuttons AUX A+, AUX A-, AUX B+ and AUX B-.
See par. J OG keys on page 6-6 and par. J OG keys on page 6-9.
6.2.2 Pushbuttons and LEDs
Pushbuttons
LEDs
Fig. 6.8 - Stop pushbutton and LED
Pushbuttons
The pushbuttons are divided into:
Front pushbuttons
See Fig. 6.8 that shows both versions: TP4i and WiTP.
On the front face of the Teach Pendant, at the top, there is the Stop pushbutton;
the operating modes are as follows:
activate by pressing
release by screwing (clockwise)
Enabling Device
On the rear of the Teach Pendant there are two pushbuttons for the Enabling
Device.
See Fig. 6.9.
WARNING - For TP wireless, see par. 6.4.4 Restart with WiTP wireless on
page 6-23. In this case, at restart the user has to carry out the emergency
unpairing procedure (see par. 6.4.3 Emergency Unpairing on page 6-22), followed
by the pairing procedure of the teach pendant with the Control Unit (see par. 6.4.1
Pairing procedure between WiTP wireless Teach Pendant and C4G Control Unit
on page 6-17).
TP4i WiTP
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-15
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.9 - Enabling Device
The right pushbutton and the left pushbutton operate in exactly the same way. The
purpose is to have an Enabling Device pushbutton for both right-hand and
left-hand operators.
Each of these is a three-position safety device that is to be kept pressed in the
intermediate position, to allow movement in automatic or in manual mode, when
the system is in Programming mode. When this pushbutton is pressed the motors
are activated automatically (DRIVE ON)
The type of operation for each of them is as follows:
released - Drive OFF
intermediate pressure - Drive ON
fully pressed - Drive OFF (anti-panic)
pressing both these pushbuttons at the same time is interpreted as an error
by the system, therefore only one at a time is to be used.
A schematic diagram of the functioning is shown in Fig. 6.10.
Fig. 6.10 - Enabling Device operating mode
1. intermediate pressure
2. pressed fully down
3. pressure
4. pressure
5. release
6. release
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-16
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
LEDs
There are 4 LEDs on the Teach Pendant, located on the upper part of the device.
See Fig. 6.8.
Their meaning (from left to right) is the following:
Yellow LED - reserved
Yellow LED - lit means that no NON-HOLDABLE program is active
Green LED - when on it means Drive ON. During the DRIVES ON procedure, this
LED flashes. The light becomes fixed when the procedure has finished
Flashing Red LED - Any type of alarm (except Warning type indications).
6.3 USB port
In the upper part of the Teach Pendant there is a USB port:
see Fig. 3.6 (with protection cover) and Fig. 3.7 - View from above B Fig. 3.7 (without
protection cover).
It is recommended to use the USB port to connect a storage device such as a
Disk-on-Key one.
6.4 Basic information for the use of WiTP
wireless
This paragraph describes the main characteristics of the WiTP wireless Teach Pendant,
and the procedures needed to manage it.
This type of pendant, as already mentioned, has a wireless connection to the Control
Unit, with a docking station installed on the C4G Controller cabinet door.
Without a cable it is much easier to handle with freedom of movement, The range of
action is guaranteed up to 40 m (130 ft).
It is powered by battery, with autonomy of 6 hours and the recharging time is 2 hours
(typical values).
To be used, the WiTP wireless pendant must be ON (see par. 6.2.1.5 Keys to switch on
the WiTP wireless on page 6-13) and PAIRED with the Control Unit.
The Control Unit can be changed by means of a procedure for Unpairing between WiTP
Teach Pendant and Control Unit from the current Control Unit , followed by a further
procedure for Pairing procedure between WiTP wireless Teach Pendant and C4G
Control Unit to the new Control Unit.
When the charge drops below 8%, the system asks the user to place the WiTP in
the docking station, otherwise it is no longer possible to use it.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-17
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
A detailed description follows of the procedures to be applied to manage the WiTP
wireless teach pendant, as well as some further hints for use:
Pairing procedure between WiTP wireless Teach Pendant and C4G Control Unit
Unpairing between WiTP Teach Pendant and Control Unit
Emergency Unpairing
Restart with WiTP wireless
Practical hints for the use of the WiTP wireless Teach Pendant
for a correct interpretation of the diagnostics displayed on the WiTP wireless, when
problems have occurred, see also the chapter Help to solve problems, in the C4G
Control Unit-Maintenance manual.
6.4.1 Pairing procedure between WiTP wireless Teach Pendant
and C4G Control Unit
This procedure, called pairing, is always necessary in situations where the user
wishes to access the C4G Control Unit using a WiTP wireless Teach Pendant (see, for
example par. 4.2 System power-on on page 4-1).
a. Check that the antenna (indicated with letter A in Fig. 6.11) of the docking station
is correctly screwed in its seat
For safety reasons, the WiTP wireless software carries out severe checks on the
pairing and requires certain rules to be followed by the user when using it:
the WiTP teach pendant can be paired to ONLY ONE Control Unit at a time;
if there are several Control Units with only one WiTP wireless, it is necessary
to first unpair the C4G Controller in use, then pair the pendant to another;
when the WiTP wireless is paired to a Controller, it is not possible to place it
in a housing (docking station) that is not the docking station of that
Controller: if this happens, the pendant is automatically unpaired and the
C4G to which it was paired goes into emergency state. This situation can be
reset by a procedure of Emergency Unpairing, of the Control Unit to which
the WiTP wireless was paired.
However, when the system is working in AUTO mode, the Teach Pendant can
be unpaired, if, for example, it is wished to use it on another Controller.
Use the WiTP wireless supplied with the Control Un it, or in any case
a teach pendant that is not paired with another C4G Control Unit.
The Pairing procedure can also be carried out with the system in
automatic mode.
Always carry out the complete procedure. Do not leave a WiTP
wireless without completing the pairing procedure.
For further information regarding this procedure, see also the C4G
Control Unit - Transport and Installation manual- par.6.2.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-18
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.11 - Antenna
b. Place the WiTP wireless in its housing (docking station) on the Control Unit
c. Make sure that the STOP pushbutton (B) is released, rotating it clockwise
d. Switch on the WiTP wireless pressing pushbuttons AUX B+ and AUX B-
simultaneously for a few seconds (see par. 6.2.1.5 Keys to switch on the WiTP
wireless on page 6-13)
e. Wait for the teach pendant functioning tests to finish
f. The teach pendant will show the screen page of Fig. 6.12
Fig. 6.12 - Pairing procedure
g. Press the Pairing Request pushbutton (indicated with letter D in Fig. 6.13) pin the
lower section of the housing
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-19
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.13 - Pairing request pushbutton
h. Wait for the messages and instructions on the WiTP wireless display and make the
tests indicated; the message Pairing in progress appears and the LEDs are
updated at the end of each connection (WiFi, System, etc.) that has been executed
successfully (see Fig. 6.14).
Fig. 6.14 - Pairing in progress
i. The procedure asks the user to press the Teach Pendant STOP pushbutton, then
to reset it by rotating it clockwise (see Fig. 6.15)
If the user has allowed the timeout to expire before pressing the STOP
pushbutton, or releasing it, the pairing procedure is interrupted.
To execute it again, start from step a.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-20
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.15 - STOP pushbutton
j. If the result is correct, a message is shown informing that the connection has taken
place. At the end of the data acquisition by the Controller, the pairing page closes
automatically. The pairing has been completed.
Fig. 6.16 - End of pairing procedure
k. The green LED alight on the docking station (indicated with the letter E in Fig. 6.17)
indicates that pairing has taken place.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-21
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.17 - Pairing OK
6.4.2 Unpairing between WiTP Teach Pendant and Control Unit
This procedure, called unpairing, is necessary when the user wishes to terminate the
pairing between the C4G Control Unit and the WiTP wireless Teach Pendant. This may
be, for example, when it is wished to shut down the system (see par. 4.3 System shut
down on page 4-2), and pair the WiTP wireless with another Control Unit, replace it, etc.
a. Place the WiTP wireless in its housing (docking station)
b. Press the Unpairing request pushbutton (indicated with the letter D in Fig. 6.13),
in the lower section of the docking station
c. A screen page is shown that updates the user on the current state of the unpairing
procedure (see Fig. 6.18). Wait until the procedure is completed
For further details regarding the ID, see C4G Control Unit - Transport and installation
manual, chap. Activation procedure, par. Control Unit, Robot and teach pendant
pairing check.
NOTE
Use the WiTP wireless currently paired with the Control Unit.
The UnPairing procedure can also be carried out with the system in
automatic mode.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-22
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.18 - Unpairing in progress
d. The LEDs are updated at the end of every disconnection (WiFi, System, etc.) that
has been executed successfully (see Fig. 6.18)
e. When the pairing procedure page is shown again (Fig. 6.12), the unpairing has
been completed
f. Remove the teach pendant from the support.
g. If it is NOT wished to use the teach pendant on another Control Unit, it should be
shut down using softkey Shutdown TP (F3) (Fig. 6.12).
6.4.3 Emergency Unpairing
This procedure is necessary in any situation where the WiTP wireless is no longer
sensed by the C4G Control Unit (the teach pendant may be off, too far away to b
recovered, lost, damaged, etc.). When the Control Unit is unable to "find" the Teach
Pendant paired to it, the green LED shown in Fig. 6.17 flashes.
a. DO NOT insert the WiTP wireless in the docking station
WARNING! Do not leave the WiTP wireless near any other Control Unit: the STOP
pushbutton is not active, but could confuse an operator who does not know about
this limitation.
This procedure is not necessary if the distance of the WiTP wireless is only
temporary: when it returns into the range of action, the connection with the
Control Unit reactivates automatically.
Obviously it is not necessary to run the emergency unpairing procedure when the
green LED is OFF: this means there is no pairing.
The Control Unit has to remain on, during the entire procedure.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-23
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
b. Set the system in programming mode (status selector switch set on T1)
c. Open the C4G cabinet door
d. Momentarily remove connector X111 (indicated with the letter A in Fig. 6.19) from
board FIA3 (located on the left wall inside the cabinet).
Fig. 6.19 - Connector X111
e. Press the pairing pushbutton (indicated with the letter D in Fig. 6.13)
f. Wait for the procedure to finish, indicated by the green LED switching off (indicated
with the letter E in Fig. 6.17) on the docking station
g. Refit connector X111 (indicated with the letter A in Fig. 6.19) on board FIA3.
h. The Teach Pendant is ready to execute the pairing procedure.
6.4.4 Restart with WiTP wireless
The WiTP wireless teach pendant, due to its configuration, has a management that is
slightly different in some events linked to the System restart.
To better understand the functioning of the WiTP wireless in the occasion of these
events see the following Tab. 6.2.
Tab. 6.2 - Restart events with WiTP wireless
The following information is valid as from version 3.12 of the System Software
and version 2.12 of the Teach Pendant Software.
Restart events with WiTP wireless
Event Behaviour Errors generation Maintains pairing status
Restart with the 4
keys (see
par. 6.2.1.6 Keys to
restart the Teach
Pendant on
page 6-14)
TP restarts, but C4G no
If the WiTP wireless is
paired to a Controller, a
connection with TP error
is generated
Yes: after the restart, the teach
pendant reconnects to the
C4G it was paired to
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-24
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
6.4.5 Practical hints for the use of the WiTP wireless Teach
Pendant
To use the WiTP teach pendant paired to the C4G Control Unit, check the Control
Unit ID. displayed on the teach pendant Home Page.
Do not move with the WiTP out of the range of action, to avoid interrupting the
communication and the consequent emergency stop of the cell, or system error. In
any case, communication is automatically resumed when the teach pendant
returns inside the range of action.
When in use, check the battery charge that remains (eighth field of the Status bar);
if the indicator is red, recharge, placing the teach pendant in its docking station. To
have 6 hours operation autonomy, it has to be left to recharge in its housing for at
least 2 hours, with the Control Unit on.
when not in use, it is strongly recommended to leave the Teach Pendant in the
docking station of the Controller it is paired with.
If it is necessary to replace it or use it for a different Control Unit, FIRST OF ALL
carry out the Unpairing between WiTP Teach Pendant and Control Unit.
If the WiTP is placed on the docking station of another C4G Control Unit, or the
battery is allowed to run down completely, the pairing is automatically removed. To
recover it, after removing the cause, it is necessary to run the procedure for
Emergency Unpairing
Restart cold
command TP or
WinC4G user
interface
C4G and TP restart
No connection error is
generated
Yes: after the restart, the teach
pendant reconnects to the
C4G it was paired to
Restart with rear
reset pushbutton
(see Fig. 3.4)
TP restarts, but C4G no
If the WiTP wireless is
paired to a Controller, a
connection with TP error
is generated
NO: THE TEACH PENDANT
DOES NOT RECONNECT. IF
BEFORE THE RESET IT WAS
PAIRED, AN Emergency
Unpairing OF THE C4G IS
NECESSARY
Shutdown from
softkey (Shutdown
pushbutton in
Fig. 6.12) and power
on again
The TP shuts down and
switches on again as
required
[Since this command is
only available if the teach
pendant is not paired,
there is no connection
error]
[Since this command is only
available if the teach pendant
is not paired, there is no impact
on the pairing status]
Shutdown due to
discharged battery
(*)
The TP informs the user
with sufficient notification.
If not returned onto the
docking station in useful
time, it switches off
If the WiTP wireless is
paired to a Controller, a
connection with TP error
is generated
NO: THE TEACH PENDANT
DOES NOT RECONNECT. IF
BEFORE THE RESET IT WAS
PAIRED, AN Emergency
Unpairing OF THE C4G IS
NECESSARY
(*) When the charge drops below 8%, the system asks the user to place the WiTP
in the docking station, otherwise it is no longer possible to use it.
Restart events with WiTP wireless
Event Behaviour Errors generation Maintains pairing status
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-25
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
If communication between Control Unit and WiTP fails, and the robot has the
motors running, the system generates an alarm
28936 10 Emergency stop: WiTP disconnected
and the motors shut down.
6.5 Display
Fig. 6.20 - TP4i Teach Pendant Display
The display of TP4i Teach Pendant is a graphic 6.4" TFT colour display; resolution
640x480 pixel.
After a few minutes that it is not used, the display switches off; to switch it on again just
press any key.
6.5.1 Display areas
On TP4i, the display can be considered as divided into 6 areas:
Status bar
Messages bar
Left Menu
Right Menu
Bottom Menu
Pages Area
Execution of commands
6.5.1.1 Status bar
Fig. 6.21 - Status bar
For further details see the following manuals:
C4G Control Unit - Technical Specifications;
C4G Control Unit C4G - Transport and Installation;
C4G Control Unit C4G - Maintenance.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-26
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
The status bar gives information about the system state; there are 7 alphanumeric fields
on a single line that have the following meanings:
The First Field indicates the system state:
The Second Field gives further information about the system state, Holdable
programs and movement while programming.
With the state selector switch in AUTO, REMOTE and T2 (optional) positions,
that is, in the Automatic positions, its meaning is as follows:
With the state selector on T1, that is in programming state, the meaning is as
follows:
The meaning of HOLD and ALARM does not depend on the state of the
selector switch:
The Third Field indicates the current value of the override percentage; if this field
displays the character 'I' (e.g.: '80%(I)'), it means that the system is in incremental
movement mode.
The Fourth Field displays the number of the current Arm. In a Multiarm system
with synchronised motion enabled, this field contains first the number of the main
Arm, and then that of the SyncArm; example:
A:2<1 means that Arm 2 is the main Arm and Arm 1 is the synchronised Arm).
For information regarding modification of the Arm indexes (main and synchronised)
see par. Motion keys on page 6-8 (ARM key for WiTP) and par. ARM (R1) on
page 6-31 (for TP4i).
Auto-T
automatic controlled by the operator through the TP (position T2
of the state selector switch - optional), to test programs at
normal speed
Progr programming
Local local automatic
Remote remote automatic
**** indicates that no holdable programs are running
RUN indicates there is at least one holdable program running
**** indicates that no movements are in progress
JOG indicates that a manual movement is in progress
FORW indicates that a FORWARD movement is being executed
BACK indicates that a BACKWARD movement is being executed
HOLD
indicates that the HOLD pushbutton is pressed and therefore the
execution of holdable programs and all arm movements are stopped;
it is shown on a YELLOW background
ALARM
indicates that the system is in alarm state (N.B.: warning messages
do not change the system state) and it is shown on a RED
background
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-27
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
If there are Auxiliary axes, these refer to the first (or only) Arm indicated in the
field; the sub-field marked with J indicates which auxiliary axis is assigned for jog
movement, to key Aux-A and to key Aux-B respectively. If no axis is associated, a
dash ('-') is displayed.
In the example of the following figure (field highlighted in red) the main Arm is Arm
1 ('A:1'); keys Aux-A and Aux-B are not associated to any axis.
The Fifth Field displays the current management mode of the coordinates
TPM J og mode:
Base
Tool
J oint
Uframe
WRIST mode:
Wr-Base
Wr-Tool
Wr-Uframe
The Sixth Field contains three sub-fields with the following information:
arm status:
- arm correctly configured and ready for moving
turn arm requires the turn-set operation
no cal arm not calibrated
simu simulated arm
dis arm disabled
coop arm-arm cooperation (An, Am) or axis-arm (J i, An)
state of both Enabling Device and Drives
'E-' Enabling device not pressed
'ED' with green background - Enabling Device pressed
'ED' with red background - Error (e.g. both Enabling Devices pressed)
ON - indicates the state of the drives (Drive ON)
presence of Latched alarms:
'A' indicates that a latched alarm is present
The background of this field may be:
green - arm properly configured and ready to move, and Enabling Device ok
yellow - Enabling Device ok and arm simulated or disabled
red - error on Enabling device or arm not calibrated or requires turn set
operation
The Seventh Field contains two sub-fields:
Alphanumeric keypad operating mode:
abc -->low case alphabetical
ABC -->high case alphabetical
123 -->numerical
123* -->fixed number; this is a contextual information: if the context
requires it, the alphanumeric keypad is set in numeric mode and it is not
possible to change to other modes.
State of SHIFT key:
With a prolonged pressing of the ARM key (for WiTP) or softkey ARM-R1 (for
TP4i), the index is shown in brackets. When the final choice is made, the brackets
disappear.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-28
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
'S' indicates that the SHIFT key is pressed.
If the Teach Pendant is WiTP wireless, the status bar contains an Eighth Field to
display the current state of the Teach Pendant battery (see eighth field in the next
figure):
6.5.1.2 Messages bar
Fig. 6.22 - Messages bar
The displayed text includes the following information:
signal code of 5 digits, which identifies each message in an unique way
error/alarm severity level
error/alarm message description string
Displays the last occurred alarm/error message.
The background may be:
green: if there is no message, this means there is no alarm/error in progress; if
instead there is a message with an orange text, this means that an
INFORMATIONAL message is active. The system is not in ALARM condition.
blue: WARNING message.
orange: this error is generated by the application process. The system is not in
ALARM condition; the message only disappears when it is reset. From the Alarm
Page, use the "down arrow" key to select the message then press Confirm (F1) in
the Central Menu.
Fig. 6.23 - Error message reset by application
yellow: this is a PROC message
When the charge drops below 8%, the system asks the user to place the WiTP in
the docking station, otherwise it is no longer possible to use it.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-29
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
grey: the wording is black. This is a Latched message and requires an explicit
consent from the user. To do so, use the "down arrow" from Alarm Page, sub-page
Latched, to select the message, if necessary, remove the cause of the alarm, then
press Confirm (F1).
Fig. 6.24 - LATCHED alarm reset
red: this is an ERROR/FATAL message. The system is in ALARM state
(see example in Fig. 6.23).
6.5.1.3 Left Menu
For any further details regarding the messages management, see the related
par. 6.9 Alarm Page on page 6-59
It is a group of softkeys that allows access to the User Interface Pages (the figures on the left
show the pre-defined softkey icons).The corresponding keys are indicated with the names
L1..L6, in sequence.
General criteria for use of the Left Menu:
if the corresponding User Page is not yet active, when the key is pressed it will be
immediately displayed;
if the corresponding User page is already active, when the key is pressed it will close, and
the Home page will be shown on the display.
The softkey corresponding to the active page is highlighted by a blue background. If there is no
softkey highlighted, this means that the page currently displayed is the Home Page.
If the softkey background is yellow, this means that a command associated to this softkey is
being run. It will remain yellow until the operation has been completed.
For information regarding navigation in the User pages, see par. 6.6 User Interface Pages on
page 6-35.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-30
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
6.5.1.4 Right Menu
If the system is Multiarm and the Teach Pendant is TP4i, one of the possible
configurations of the Right Menu (accessible by pressing the right MORE key) is shown
in the next figure:
Local Remote Progr Auto-T Description
This menu is dedicated to the technological commands such as the opening
or closing of the grippers and the welding parameter hardware settings
The corresponding keys are called R1..R6, that correspond to softkeys
U1..U4 which are keys that can be programmed by the user, plus another
two keys that depend on the state of the system:
When the system is in Local or Remote mode, key R5 is always for the
Drives on/off, as described below:
Local - R5 key allows Drive ON and Drive OFF commands
(toggle key); the corresponding softkey is displayed with a green
background if the drives are on, otherwise with a grey
background.
Remote - R5 is for Drive OFF command only (Drive ON comes
from the PLC); the background of the corresponding softkey is
grey for Drive OFF and green for Drive ON.
Progr - R5 and R6 are for T1 and T2 keys (that control tools 1 and 2,
to execute switching between OPEN and CLOSE).
Auto-T (optional) - R5 and R6 are not associated to any function.
When one of such keys is pressed, it activates the execution of the
associated command and displays the state (if the softkey is highlighted,
the corresponding command is active; otherwise the command is not
active). If the softkey background is yellow, this means that the associated
command is in progress. It remains yellow until the execution has been
completed.
If the user wishes to create a customised Right Menu, it is necessary to write a
PDL2 program as described in chapter APPENDIX B - Customizations on TP4i/WiTP
- par. Handling TP4i/WiTP right menu, in PDL2 Programming Language manual.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-31
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
6.5.1.5 Bottom Menu
This menu is a group of 6 function keys, F1..F6, contextual to the selected item (current
state and page, selected field, etc.). The shown functions correspond to the possible
actions on the selected item.
Usually when one of the keys F1..F6 is pressed the associated function is activated
directly. If the softkey background is yellow, this means that the associated command is
in progress. It remains yellow until the execution has been completed.
However there are some softkeys that are associated to a pop-up sub-menu: this is
indicated by a small triangle on the top left corner of the icon. For example, this is the
ARM (R1)
to change the current Arm.
It is equivalent to entering in the Basic sub-page of the Motion Page and modify the Arm field.
In the same way as occurs for the ARM key of the WiTP (see par. Motion keys on page 6-5), the
functioning of this softkey foresees:
In DRIVE-OFF - pressing ARM (R1) increments in circular mode the index of the main Arm without
changing the quantity of Arms in the Status bar (if there is only one Arm, one remains; if there are
two Arms, two remain). The new value is the first valid Arm index after an increment.
Pressing SHIFT+ARM (R1) increases in circular mode the index of the synchronised Arm. It is the
only combination of keys that can alter the quantity of Arms in the Status bar. It always passes to
two Arms when there is only one Arm in the Status bar. It returns to only one Arm when the index
of the second Arm becomes equal to the first Arm.
In DRIVE-ON - Pressing ARM (R1) has two effects:
- if the DRIVE-ON has taken place with only 1 Arm selected ($TP_SYNC_ARM[2]=0), the Arm
index is incremented, as in DRIVE-OFF;
- if the DRIVE-ON has taken place with 2 Arms selected, it inverts the selection of which Arm will
be moved by the jog keys. For example: if there are 3 Arms and the current situation is Arm: 2<1,
where Arm 2 is that which is moved by the jog keys, pressing ARM, the index is NOT increased (it
does NOT become 3), but the situation becomes Arm: 1<2, that is to say, the Arm that is moved
by the jog keys is now number 1. The first number displayed is always that of the Arm moved by
the jog keys.
SHIFT+ARM (R1) cannot be pressed.
A LONG PRESS on ARM key (R1) cyclically displays the possible indexes of the
main Arm: when the required index is reached, releasing the key makes this choice definite. While
the key is pressed, the index is displayed in brackets. When the final choice is made, the brackets disappear.
For the use of this key for SYNCMOVE, see the NOTES TO RECORD POINTS IN MOVE..SYNCMOVE on the
IDE Page.
To view all the soft keys available in the Left or the Right Menu it is necessary to
use:
SHIFT+MORE (left keys for the Left Menu, right keys for the Right Menu), to
view the PREVIOUS soft keys
MORE (left key for the Left Menu, right key for the Right Menu) to view the
NEXT soft keys.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-32
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
case of the softkey to choose the language, F1 on the Home Page.
When pop-up sub-menus are opened, the first item is always pre-set. The choice of an
item can be made as follows:
by pressing the associated digit of the required item on the Alphanumeric keypad,
or
by moving in the sub-menu using cursor keys and confirming the choice with
ENTER key.
It is also possible that a softkey corresponds to a function that foresees optional settings:
items of this type are identified by a small icon representing a clock, in the top right
corner of the softkey (e.g. key Login (F2) on Home Page).
A short pressure on the key associated to one of these commands causes the function
to be executed according to a default; a longer pressure causes the opening of a pop-up
sub-menu for the choice of the options
The pop-up window closes at any time, either because a choice has been confirmed or
the ESC key has been pressed (exit that cancels any action).
The meaning of the function keys is described in the corresponding User Interface
Pages.
6.5.1.6 Pages Area
This is the part of the display for User Interface Pages.
The active Page has a narrow blue frame that graphically links to its name shown in the
top right corner; the corresponding softkey, in the Left Menu, is highlighted.
Each Page refers to specific functions in a precise ENVIRONMENT (for example Motion
environment, I/O environment, etc.).
Fig. 6.25 - Page Example
6.5.1.7 Execution of commands
When the user asks for the execution of a certain command, the system opens a window
that contains the message Operation in progress. and this remains until the execution
For a detailed description of the available pages and for any information related
to their use, as well as the general internal navigation rules, see User Interface
Pages section.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-33
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
is finished.
While running, the Abort Softkey is available to be able to permanently interrupt the
command.
Fig. 6.26 - Abort Softkey
In most cases the execution is so fast that the blue window isn't even seen by the user.
According to the execution status of the command, the following situations may occur:
the command has been run successfully.
the system does not display any message of correct completion because this
status is already obvious;
the system displays a message (blue background) indicating that the
command has been completed; the Close Softkey (F6) is available to exit
from the command;
Fig. 6.27 - Close Softkey
the system displays a message (yellow background - see Fig. 6.28) indicating
the completion of the command and the number of operations that have been
skipped (with the Continue Softkey (F3)); the Close softkey (F6) is available
to exit from the command.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-34
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.28 - Skipped operations
It has not been possible to execute the command - the system displays a message
with a yellow background, to explain to the user the problems found. The following
softkeys are available:
Login (F1) - if the error message is Insufficient Rights, this means that the
Login has not yet been performed. The user has to press the 'Login' Softkey
(F1) to do so. After the login the system will re-execute the command that was
previously requested.
Fig. 6.29 - 'Login' Softkey
'Continue' - if the command consists of a sequence of several operations, it
may happen that one or more cannot be executed. In this case the system
stops the execution of the command and informs the user: if the user wishes
to skip the current operation but to continue running those that follow, it is
necessary to press the Continue Softkey (F3).
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-35
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.30 - Continue Softkey
Retry (F4) - if the system stops the execution of the command for any reason,
the user can remove the problem then press this softkey (see Fig. 6.30): the
command will be run again.
Close (F6) - exits from the current command (see Fig. 6.30). In the case of a
sequence of operations, it does not run the commands that follow and quits.
6.6 User Interface Pages
The purpose of this section is to give a detailed description of the pre-defined Pages
available for the user, and how to use them in the User Interface. In particular
information is given that regards:
General rules to navigate within the user interface and the field change
Dialogue and information windows
Home Page
Motion Page
Alarm Page
Prog Page
IDE Page
I/O Page
Appl Page
Files Page
Data Page
Setup page
Service Page
TP-INT Page
Additional User Pages
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-36
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
6.6.1 General rules to navigate within the user interface and the
field change
The navigation within the user interface is made easier by the following keys:
Cursor keys
Page keys
ENTER key
ESC key
On the Teach Pendant, the following keys are so arranged as to be operated with the
thumb of both hands: the cursor keys are controlled with the left hand, while ENTER and
ESC are operated with the right hand. For further details, see par. Navigation keys on
page 6-4.
Within the Pages, two operating modes are available:
Navigation Mode
Field Editing Mode
Changing over from one mode to another is very simple (with the ENTER or ESC key).
When windows have one field only available for activation by the user, the automatically
activated mode is Editing.
For further details about both Modes, carefully read the paragraphs Navigation Mode
and Field Editing Mode.
6.6.1.1 Navigation Mode
Using the keys while surfing
Navigation within the tables
Note that during the description of the User pages, the codes that are shown in
brackets in the titles of the commands that can be activated from the Central
Menu correspond to the first parameter of the SYS_CALL that runs this command,
or to a similar command that can be activated from TP-INT.
Examples:
CCRC, shown in the title of the Complete (CCRC) command.
or CAC/L shown in the title of the Learn (CAC/L) command.
To select any item in the pop-up menus, please refer to the Bottom Menu
paragraph.
Note that ENTER is always operated to give a CONFIRMATION. On the contrary,
ESC always causes the requested action to be CANCELLED.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-37
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
6.6.1.1.1 Using the keys while surfing
In the Navigation mode, the keys take the following meaning:
Cursor keys
used to focus:
in any one of the four directions, within the field to be modified (in this case,
the focus is pointed out by a blue frame surrounding the field and light green
background):
on the labels of the sub-pages:
left arrow - moves to the label of the previous sub-page
right arrow - moves to the label of the next sub-page
arrow down - to enter to the wanted sub-page
on the icon to be selected (in case of User Pages with icons). The focus is
displayed as a blue frame with light green background.
Page keys
for paging or to scroll the pages. The keys are page up and page down and usually
they act as a cursor key in an amplified up or down (line-page, units-tens
movement, etc.)
ENTER
once the focus has been positioned, the pressure on this key causes the switching
to the Field Editing Mode, which allows to modify the field contents. When the
ENTER key is pressed, the white background of the field turns blue and the blue
frame turns orange.
ESC
closes the current action and returns to the prior condition.
6.6.1.1.2 Navigation within the tables
The appearance of the tables in the user interface of TP4i is similar to the one of a
calculation spreadsheet.
The cell where the cursor is located is blue framed. To move from a cell to another, use
the cursor keys (cursor keys and page keys).
To edit the selected cell, acknowledge it with ENTER: this lets you change over to the
Field Editing Mode.
6.6.1.2 Field Editing Mode
In editing mode of a field, the focus is always indicated by a blue frame that surrounds
the field, and the field background is orange.
The editing of a field changes according to the field type.
Note that:
SHIFT+ left arrow (moves the cursor to the first cell on the left)
SHIFT+ right arrow (moves the cursor to the last cell on the right)
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-38
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
The available field types are:
Spindial
The value may be directly entered through the Alphanumeric keypad. The field
value may be optionally incremented or decrements by means of the following
keys:
Up arrow (increments the value by one step, depending on the type of value
to be modified
Down arrow (decrements the value by one step, depending on the type of
value to be modified)
Page Up (increments by one step - not that the incrementing step depends on
the context)
Page Down (decrements by one step - not that the incrementing step
depends on the context)
SHIFT+Page Up (enters the maximum permissible value)
SHIFT+Page Down (enters the minimum permissible value)
The management of this field is circular: if the maximum value is exceeded it
returns to minimum, and vice-versa.
Textbox
It is possible to type in a string through the Alphanumeric keypad; the input mode
is automatically set to TEXT, therefore the Alphanumeric keypad may be used as
when an SMS message is written on a normal mobile phone.
Combobox
There are two possible types:
pre-defined list - an item has to be chosen from the list. To open it, press the down
arrow;
pre-defined list +the choice can be edited directly - it is not necessary to choose
from the list. First press ENTER to enter into the field editing mode; type in the
Note that:
SHIFT+ left arrow (moves the cursor before the first character on the left)
SHIFT+ right arrow (moves the cursor after the last character on the right)
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-39
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
choice and confirm with ENTER; if it is preferred not to enter the choice by typing
it, press the down arrow, the list will be opened and the item can be chosen from
it.
When a list opens, it can be scrolled using the cursor keys (next item or previous item),
or the Page keys (for quicker scrolling), or SHIFT+Page (first and last item of the list).
After choosing, confirm the choice by pressing ENTER
Checkbox
This type of field is not associated with a specific editing mode (in fact, the mode
has not to be changed and the navigation mode is kept on); to change over its
value, simply move with the cursor keys and acknowledge by pressing the ENTER
key. Of course, in a set of checkbox, it is possible to select more than one box at a
time.
Checkgroup
This type of field is equal to the previous one (Checkbox); the only difference is that
here only one push-button at a time is activated: when the selection of a
push-button is acknowledged, the push-button which was previously active is
automatically de-selected. The cursor up and down keys and the subsequent
confirmation through the ENTER key move the selection dot to the wanted item.
Button
Even if, as a rule, the softkeys of the Bottom Menu, are used, in some cases
Push-buttons are entered to the Page. To activate the corresponding function,
simply press the ENTER key when the focus rectangle results to be placed on that
Push-button.
Label
It may be modified only through the softkeys of the Bottom Menu, when the focus
is on that field. The background is WHITE when at least one command is
associated with it in the Bottom Menu; if the background is GREY, it means that no
command is associated with it in the Bottom Menu. When the background is GREY
the field cannot be changed.
List
There are 3 different ways to view the lists (as illustrated in the examples that
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-40
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
follow):
small icons - displays the information with a small icon
large icons - displays the information with a large icon
details - besides the name and the icon of each item in the list, further
information is given (for example the size of the files and the date of the last
change are listed).
To select the required element, move with the cursor keys. For a multiple selection
(where allowed) use SHIFT+ENTER.
Cell of a table
When allowed, the contents can be changed by pressing ENTER then using the
editing function of the box (see Fig. 6.31).
Fig. 6.31 - Editing a box
small icons large icons details
Note that, if the cell can be edited in text mode, after pressing ENTER it is possible
to use:
SHIFT+ left arrow (moves the cursor before the first character on the left, in
the cell)
SHIFT+ right arrow (moves the cursor after the last character on the right, in
the cell).
The following description of the User Pages concerns the various types of field:
hypertext connections allow returning to this paragraph for further details about
how to edit the field in question.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-41
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
6.6.2 Dialogue and information windows
When it is necessary, the system asks the user for confirmation of an operation or to
enter a password, or to give information regarding the result of the required command.
Therefore, some suitable windows are available, having different background colour
according to the message enclosed in the window:
blue - request for confirmation or information by the system
yellow - system warning message
red - command not run due to serious error.
In the Bottom Menu there are always the 'OK' and 'Annul' softkeys, but in some special
situations, when only one of them is available
In other situations pop-up windows may appear that contain suggestions/information
(tips) for the user concerning the current context. Pressing any blue key will close the
window.
If the user does not wish to respond to the system request, press the ESC key.
Use of the Teach Pendant
6-42
HS-0-C4E-USO_52.fm
00/0708
TP4i - Home page
6-43
HS-0-C4E-USO_53.fm
00/0708
6.7 Home Page
Fig. 6.32 - Home Page
When no User Page is active, a default screen is displayed by the Teach Pendant; this
screen is called Home Page. It is associated with no key of the Left Menu, however it
turns visible whenever a User Page is closed.
This Page displays some information of general nature as:
model of the robot corresponding to the current arm
address of the Control Unit in the local network
Control Unit ID
current date and time
Teach Pendant software version
Control Unit software version
The available functions in the Bottom Menu are:
Select language
Login (SL) and Logout (SL/L)
Restart
A detailed description of each function is given below.
6.7.1 Select language
A pop-up sub-menu opens; the languages available are:
German
English (UK)
English (US)
Spanish
French
Italian
Portuguese
Turkish
TP4i - Home page
6-44
HS-0-C4E-USO_53.fm
00/0708
The green background indicates the language that is about to be chosen. Once the
choice has been made using the up and down arrows, confirm with ENTER, or type ESC
to exit, cancelling the operation.
Fig. 6.33 - Language choice commands
6.7.2 Login (SL) and Logout (SL/L)
With this softkey the following can be executed:
Login,
Logout.
6.7.2.1 Login
Brief pressure on softkey F2, allows access of authorised persons to the system; the
system asks the user name and password, necessary for the login (see Fig. 6.34
- Login).
Fig. 6.34 - Login
The difference between British English and American English is in the format
used for the date and the time.
TP4i - Home page
6-45
HS-0-C4E-USO_53.fm
00/0708
6.7.2.2 Logout
Prolonged pressure on softkey F2, activates the Logout procedure.
Fig. 6.35 - Logout
6.7.3 Restart
A pop-up submenu opens, as shown in Fig. 6.36 - Restart.
Fig. 6.36 - Restart
The choices that can be made are:
Complete (CCRC)
Shut-down (CCRS)
For further details concerning the LOGIN function, please refer to the
Chap. Access to the Control (LOGIN/LOGOUT).
For settings by the user, see Login on Setup page.
As from system software version 3.20, there is also a special Automatic Logout
function available (see par. 5.3.1 Automatic Timed Logout on page 5-5).
TP4i - Home page
6-46
HS-0-C4E-USO_53.fm
00/0708
6.7.3.1 Complete (CCRC)
For a complete restart of the Control Unit.
After the operator has made his selection (by pressing ENTER or through the
alphanumeric keypad), the operator is prompted by the system to confirm (Fig. 6.37
- Restart - prompt):
Fig. 6.37 - Restart - prompt
Confirm with 'Ok' or exit with 'Cancel'. The acknowledgement of the command starts a
count down which (see Fig. 6.38 - Restart - count down) in case of Restart, ends when
both Controller and Teach Pendant restart. In case of Shutdown, once the reverse
counting is complete, a message is displayed which informs the user of the possibility
to power down the system.
Fig. 6.38 - Restart - count down
For further information concerning the Restart function, please refer to the
Chap. System Commands.
6.7.3.2 Shut-down (CCRS)
To shut down the Control Unit.
The system asks for confirmation from the user before starting the shut-down operations.
TP4i - Motion Page
6-47
HS-0-C4E-USO_54.fm
01/0208
6.8 Motion Page
This User Page manages information regarding the robot motion environment and
allows the user to display and change it.
It is divided into sub-pages, that can be selected through the corresponding labels
Basic
Coop (optional feature)
Advanced
Status (DAS)
Override
Laser
6.8.1 Basic
Fig. 6.39 - Basic sub-page
The Basic sub-page contains the following fields:
Current arm (red): Arm
Current coordinates system (yellow): COORD
Current reference systems (green): Uframe, Tool, Base
Current arm position (blue)
A detailed description of all fields follows.
6.8.1.1 Arm
Indicates which is the current arm and allows it to be changed (in the case of multiarm
system).
If the system is NOT multiarm, this field is read only.
If the system includes the option related to synchronised moves among several arms,
the page displayed is that shown in Fig. 6.40. Therefore the user can specify which is
the arm synchronised (that is displayed in the SyncArm field) with the current arm
(displayed in the Arm field).
If the symbol - is specified in the SyncArm field, this means that there is no
synchronised arm.
TP4i - Motion Page
6-48
HS-0-C4E-USO_54.fm
01/0208
Fig. 6.40 - Synchronised Arm
6.8.1.2 COORD
This field indicates the current coordinates system according to which the arm moves
will be made, in manual movement and in programming. The user can choose a
coordinates system that is different to the current one, selecting from the following (as
shown in Fig. 6.41):
for TPM JOG mode:
J OINT
BASE
TOOL
UFRAME
for the WRIST mode (movement carried out to the robot wrist):
WR-BASE
WR-TOOL
WR-UFRAME
Fig. 6.41 - Choice of coordinates system
To make the choice, the user has to open the pop-up menu, select the required item and
press ENTER.
TP4i - Motion Page
6-49
HS-0-C4E-USO_54.fm
01/0208
6.8.1.3 Uframe, Tool, Base
These three fields allow the selection of the reference systems to be currently used in
manual movement and in programming, choosing from those stored in the Data Page
tables (UFRAME, TOOL, BASE).
For each of these three user fields, after opening the corresponding pop-up menu, the
user has to select the required item and confirm the choice with ENTER. As an example,
in Fig. 6.42, the screen page is shown that relates to the choice of the Base reference
system.
Fig. 6.42 - Choice of Base - example
6.8.1.4 Current arm position
This section of the Basic sub-page (light blue in Fig. 6.39) gives the current values of:
ARM_POS - Cartesian position of the specified arm (expressed in millimetres for
X, Y and Z, and in degrees for the orienting angles A, E and R)
ARM_JNTP - joint position (expressed in degrees or in millimetres, according to
the axis configuration)
config - configuration string (attitude flag and multirev flag).
6.8.2 Coop (optional feature)
This sub-page is to manage cooperative motion (for further information, see chap.7
Cooperative Motion (optional feature) in the Motion Programming manual).
When choosing Uframe, or Tool or Base, for each of these reference systems the
following information is displayed (in read only fields):
Cartesian coordinates X, Y and Z, expressed in millimetres
orienting angles A, E and R, expressed in degrees
If the axis is NOT calibrated, or has lost the number of revolutions, these values
are NOT available (and the '--' string is displayed).
TP4i - Motion Page
6-50
HS-0-C4E-USO_54.fm
01/0208
Fig. 6.43 - Coop Sub-page
The Coop sub-page has six different sections:
AUX COOP
ARM COOP
Coop Status
AUX J OG
J og Arm
ARM_LINKED
A detailed description follows for each one.
6.8.2.1 AUX COOP
In this section (highlighted by the red frame) the user can handle the cooperative motion
between a worker (called Arm) and a positioner (called Auxiliary Axes Unit).
In detail it is possible to:
The four function keys of the central menu are just short-cuts to enter cooperative
motion enable/disable commands (between Arm and Auxiliary Axes, or between
two Arms respectively), without the need to enter into one of the two sections and
select the buttons (highlighted in green in Fig. 6.45).
TP4i - Motion Page
6-51
HS-0-C4E-USO_54.fm
01/0208
enable or disable the cooperative motion (ON and OFF buttons or function keys
Aux ON (F1) and Aux OFF (F2) highlighted in blue),
specify which is the auxiliary axis (Aux Axis field),
indicate the robot the positioner cooperates with (Arm field),
6.8.2.2 ARM COOP
In this section (highlighted by the red frame) the user can manage combined motion
between two Arms.
enable or disable the cooperative motion (ON and OFF buttons or function keys
Arm ON (F1) and Arm OFF (F2) highlighted in blue),
specify which are the two cooperative Arms (Arm fields),
For positioners with several axes, it is necessary to specify one of the axes of the
group (for example, if the positioner axes are 7 and 8, in the Aux Axes field either
7 or 8 must be specified).
See also the description of the built-in procedure AUX_COOP, in chap.BUILT-IN
Routines list in the PDL2 - Programming Language manual.
See also the description of the built-in procedure ARM_COOP, in chap.BUILT-IN
Routines list of the PDL2 - Programming Language manual.
TP4i - Motion Page
6-52
HS-0-C4E-USO_54.fm
01/0208
6.8.2.3 Coop Status
This section is read only and displays information about the state of active cooperations,
for each existing Arm.
For example, if the information is
AUX_COOP J7,A1
it means that Arm 1 cooperates with auxiliary axis J 7;
if instead it is
ARM_COOP A1,A2
it means that Arm 1 cooperates with Arm 2;
6.8.2.4 AUX JOG
Fig. 6.44 - AUX JOG
In this section the user can set the J og keys for the Axes that have an index higher than
6, regardless of whether they are Auxiliary Axes or are part of an Arm.
6.8.2.5 Jog Arm
Fig. 6.45 - Jog Arm
In this section the user can change the settings of the Arm and any SyncArm, in the
same way as on sub-page Basic (see par. 6.8.1.1 Arm on page 6-47).
For further information see par. 5.12 Integrated Motion in the Motion Programming
Manual.
TP4i - Motion Page
6-53
HS-0-C4E-USO_54.fm
01/0208
6.8.2.6 ARM_LINKED
Fig. 6.46 - ARM_LINKED
In this section the user can activate or deactivate the pairs of Arms mechanically linked
(Integrated Arms). To activate a certain chain of Arms, it is necessary to select the
corresponding Checkbox. Conversely, it is necessary to de-select it if it is wished to
deactivate the chain.
To do so, move the focus on the checkbox field and confirm with ENTER. Softkey F5 is
simply a "short cut" to select/deselect the said checkbox more quickly.
6.8.3 Advanced
Fig. 6.47 - Advanced sub-page
In the sub-page Advanced, may be modified the data concerning
Incremental J og mode
use of J -Pad
A detailed list of each one of them is given below.
6.8.3.1 Incremental Jog mode
In this section it is possible to modify, in millimetres or degrees, the distance that is
covered each time an axis move key is pressed (+or -) - see J OG keys for TP4i and
J OG keys for WiTP. To enable this mode, move the focusing to the Enable field and then
confirm with ENTER.
In this way the Linear and Angular fields can be accessed to make the opportune
settings.
By moving the focusing to each one of them, and confirming with ENTER, some softkeys
(small, med and large) appear in the Bottom Menu which allow to enter values in this
fields much quickly (Fig. 6.47).
TP4i - Motion Page
6-54
HS-0-C4E-USO_54.fm
01/0208
6.8.3.2 J-Pad
This section is divided into two parts, as can be seen in the yellow section of Fig. 6.47:
Linear/Angular
These fields indicate whether, using J PAD for TP4i or J PAD for WiTP, the robot
makes a linear move (Linear) or a rotation (Angular).
Angle
For further information see also the description of the keypad of J PAD for TP4i or
J PAD for WiTP.
This field indicates the user position in relation to the robot; such position is pointed
out by an icon on the Teach Pendant, which moves to the requested angular
position, around the tale robot. When focusing on Angle, confirmed by ENTER, the
Bottom Menu displays some softkeys, which help specifying the new User's
position. However, the value may be modified in the Angle field directly.
Fig. 6.48 - Use of the Angle field
6.8.4 Status (DAS)
Fig. 6.49 - Status sub-page
The Status sub-page relates to the state of the arm (red) and the axes (yellow).
For the state of the arm (red) the foreseen values are:
Need for Unlock, Not in LOCK, Need to Resume
TP4i - Motion Page
6-55
HS-0-C4E-USO_54.fm
01/0208
Simulated, Unsimulated
Mov. enabled, Mov. disabled
DRIVE ON, DRIVE OFF - state of drives
Stroke end enabled, Stroke end disabled.
NOT in cooperative - Working or Positioner (plus the indication of the arm with
which there is to be the cooperation). This is only present if the system contains
cooperative arms
On trajectory, NOT on trajectory
Absolute Accuracy enabled/disabled - the machine is/is NOT kinetically offset
When navigating on these fields, in the Bottom Menu there are softkeys available, that
correspond to the state selected, and allow it to be changed. For example:
Fig. 6.50 - Unlocked
For the status of the axes (yellow in Fig. 6.49), the values provided are:
axis calibrated
axis NOT calibrated
axis NOT in Turn-set
axis NOT connected, for example in the case of electric gripper change
axis NOT Present
Also for the state of the axes, moving the focus on the different fields, in the Bottom
Menu softkeys are shown that correspond to the state selected, and that allow changes
to be made.
For both the state of the arm and of the axes, under normal operating conditions, all the
strings of the different fields are BLACK; otherwise in the case of an anomalous arm
condition or if the calibration or Turn-set data is missing, the colour is RED.
TP4i - Motion Page
6-56
HS-0-C4E-USO_54.fm
01/0208
6.8.5 Override
Fig. 6.51 - Override sub-page
The Override sub-page contains the overall pre-defined values (red) and single joints
(yellow) relating to the current arm. All the information can be changed by the user.
For further details concerning the above mentioned preset variables, please look at the
Manual PDL2 Programming Language, chapter PREDEFINED VARIABLES.
6.8.6 Laser
Fig. 6.52 - Laser
The Laser sub-page (see Fig. 6.52) shows a graphic and numeric display of the
following data:
SMART LASER optical bank axes position in relation to their stroke-end (joint 3
(highlighted in red), joints 4 and 5 (highlighted in yellow) )
position of arm 1
active focal ( Power / Pointer ),
This sub-page is only present in SmartLaser systems.
TP4i - Motion Page
6-57
HS-0-C4E-USO_54.fm
01/0208
nominal position that joint 3 should have to reach the current point, with focal
currently inactive
indication of 'cam not enabled' (see Fig. 6.54) or 'system not calibrated' states.
Moreover, in the central Menu, the following commands are available:
focal change-over (commands Power (F1) and Pointer (F2)) (see example
modified from Pointer to Power, using the Power key (F1), Fig. 6.53 )
Fig. 6.53 - Change of focal
arm 1 calibration (Calibrate (F3) command)
E-Cam enabling (En. E-Cam (F4) command)
management of linked arm (Link A2,A1 (F5) command).
Fig. 6.54 - System with E-cam not enabled
If the system is not calibrated or the cam is not enabled (see Fig. 6.54) the displays and
commands for joint 3 and the active focal are inhibited (values, graph displays, focus
change pushbuttons); this informs the user that the SmartLaser current status is NOT
adjusted for operation.
If the system is in AUTO or REMOTE mode, the only possible focal is the Power: In this
case the active focal change pushbuttons are inhibited. Also the Calibration commands
(F3) and Linked arm modification commands (F5) are not available, as they are
potentially hazardous.
TP4i - Motion Page
6-58
HS-0-C4E-USO_54.fm
01/0208
Tp4i - Alarm Page
6-59
HS-0-C4E-USO_55.fm
00/0708
6.9 Alarm Page
This User Page allows management of information linked to alarms/errors that have
occurred in the system.
It consists of 4 sub-pages, which may be selected through their corresponding labels:
Alarms
Errors (ULE)
Latched
Actions (ULA)
6.9.1 Alarms
Fig. 6.55 - Alarms sub-page
This sub-page displays the active alarms, i.e. that require confirmation from the user,
and gives the following information:
number of the arm order
error code and severity
message text
date and time
The alarm code, severity and message text are displayed on the Messages bar, as long
as the alarm is active. In case the message text is too long, it runs lengthwise in the
Messages bar.
To confirm an alarm (ULLA) it has to be selected (see Fig. 6.56): press the down arrow
to move the focus on the list of alarms, then choose the alarm with the cursor keys. At
this point softkeys are available in the Bottom Menu to be able to perform some
operations (e.g.: Confirm, Skip, etc.). The presence of one or several softkeys, or not,
depends on the selected alarm type.
In particular, when the EXCL softkey is enabled, the pressure on this key enables the
exclusion, for a limited time interval, of the effect of alarms such as those connected to
an electrical limit switch. For further details, look ad the description of the softkey Excl,
belonging to the Virtual Keyboard.
Tp4i - Alarm Page
6-60
HS-0-C4E-USO_55.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.56 - Confirmation of an alarm
6.9.2 Errors (ULE)
This is the history of alarms that have occurred (errors log) and the following information
is displayed:
alarm order number
error code and severity
message text
date and time
Press on the arrow down key and confirm with ENTER to scroll throughout the entire list
of errors (see Fig. 6.57).
Fig. 6.57 - List of Errors
The errors that are stored in the errors LOG file are only those that change the
system state
Tp4i - Alarm Page
6-61
HS-0-C4E-USO_55.fm
00/0708
6.9.3 Latched
The alarms that enter into this category are described in the PDL2 Programming
Language manual, in the predefined variable $LATCH_CNFG.
The user shall use this sub-page to confirm the alarms set as latched, and to clear them
from such status.
The following information are given:
alarm order number
error code and severity
message text
date and time
To act on a specific alarm, move the focus on the list, using the down arrow, confirm with
ENTER and select the required alarm, as shown in Fig. 6.58.
Fig. 6.58 - LATCHED alarm reset
In the Bottom Menu is now available the softkey 'Reset' that, once the cause for the
alarm is removed, can reset it.
6.9.4 Actions (ULA)
Shows the last actions performed on the Control Unit.
In order to display all of the listed actions, use the arrow down key, confirm with ENTER
and scroll through the list with the arrow up or arrow down key (see Fig. 6.59).
Tp4i - Alarm Page
6-62
HS-0-C4E-USO_55.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.59 - List of actions
Tp4i - Prog Page
6-63
HS-0-C4E-USO_56.fm
00/0708
6.10 Prog Page
Purpose of this User Page is to handle the programs.
This displays the programs loaded in the execution memory.
The user can specify which programs to display using the Filter function.
The following information is shown for each item displayed:
Program name (32 characters of max. length)
Program attribute (holdable program (HOLD), not holdable program (NO HOLD))
Program file status (already saved (SAVED), not yet saved (NOT SAVED))
Program execution state (program interrupted (HELD), program running
(RUNNING), etc.)
Number of the execution line
Name of Owner program of the line running (the line belongs to the code of this
program)
program $CYCLE value
program $ERROR value
Program main arm
Program step mode (Disabled, Statement, etc.)
Directory path where the program .COD code is located
Date of creation or last change of .COD
Size of the program in kB
Directory path where the program variables .VAR file is located
Date .VAR was created or of last change
In the Bottom Menu of the Prog Page there are the following soft keys that allow the user
to act on the displayed programs:
Prog
Execution
Load...
View
Details
POS SHIFT
Tp4i - Prog Page
6-64
HS-0-C4E-USO_56.fm
00/0708
6.10.1 Prog
Fig. 6.60 - Prog commands
The available options are:
Open (IDE)
Create
Save (MS +MS/C)
Save data (MS)
Save code (MS/C)
Save variable as (MS/A)
Erase from execution memory
A detailed list of each one of them is given below.
6.10.1.1 Open (IDE)
Opens the selected program in development and editing environment (IDE).
6.10.1.2 Create
Allows to create a new program to be edited in IDE environment. The following situations
might occur:
the requested program already exists in execution memory
the requested program only exists as a file in UD:. The command loads it in the
execution memory (ML).
the requested program does not exist. The command creates a .COD file and loads
it in the memory.
To open the created program, use the previously described command Open (IDE) or
select the wanted program and press ENTER.
6.10.1.3 Save (MS + MS/C)
Save in UD: the code and variables of a program, from the execution memory in a file
on the default device.
Tp4i - Prog Page
6-65
HS-0-C4E-USO_56.fm
00/0708
6.10.1.4 Save data (MS)
Saves the variables of the selected program
6.10.1.5 Save code (MS/C)
Saves the code of the selected program
6.10.1.6 Save variable as (MS/A)
To save the program variables of the program in a file with a name that is different to
that of the program. This option does not allow to use the asterisk.
6.10.1.7 Erase from execution memory
Contains the commands to delete a program and its variables from the execution
memory. If other programs are associated to a routine or to variables of the program that
is being deleted, the operation will generate an error.
The functions provided are the following:
Erase code and variables (MEA) - Cancels both code and variables of the selected
program.
Erase code only (MEP) - Cancels the code of the selected program.
Erase variables only (MEV) - Cancels all variables of the selected program
6.10.2 Execution
Contains the commands to change a program status.
Fig. 6.61 - Execution Command
The available options are:
See NOTE regarding the entry number in the UD: root directory.
Tp4i - Prog Page
6-66
HS-0-C4E-USO_56.fm
00/0708
Activate (PA)
Deactivate (PD)
Pause (PSP)
Unpause (PSU)
Step
A detailed list of each one of them is given below.
6.10.2.1 Activate (PA)
To start the execution of a program. If it is a holdable program, the command sets it in
READY state; press START (see Other colours keys) to start the execution.
On a non-holdable program, the command has immediate effect and sets it directly into
RUNNING state.
Only one holdable program at a time is allowed, unless the DETACH attribute is
specified in the header of the holdable programs you want to run simultaneously.
Before the program may be activated, it has to be loaded in the memory (Load... ).
6.10.2.2 Deactivate (PD)
Deactivates the selected programs, which any way keep stored in the memory.
6.10.2.3 Pause (PSP)
Suspends the execution of the selected programs, setting them in PAUSED state.
To continue the execution it is necessary to send the Unpause (PSU)
6.10.2.4 Unpause (PSU)
Resumes the execution of the selected programs, removing them from the PAUSED
state. The program is set to the running status provided that no other program
suspension condition subsists. To restart the execution of holdable programs, START
has to be pressed (see Other colours keys).
6.10.2.5 Step
This menu allows to define the program execution step. It is mainly used upon the
program debug. Normally, the program execution is continuous, i.e. without breaks. The
execution step allows to define the moment when the program execution shall be
interrupted. A new execution step is started each time the START key is pressed for
holdable programs, or the RUN softkey (F1 in the central menus of the TP-INT Page)
with non-holdable programs. The available commands are:
Statement (PTSS) - The execution is interrupted in connection with each
instruction. The protected Routines (whose body is not displayed) are run as they
are a single statement; the execution of non protected Routines (whose body may
be displayed) is interrupted in connection with each instruction.
Disable (PTSD) - Stops the step-by step execution and from thereon the program
is run in continuous mode.
Tp4i - Prog Page
6-67
HS-0-C4E-USO_56.fm
00/0708
Move (PTSM) - The execution is interrupted in connection with each individual
movement. This is not allowed on non-holdable programs.
Fly (PTSF) - For fly moves before holding the program execution. Similar to the
Move option, however here the program execution does not stop after the
MOVEFLY instruction. This is not allowed on non-holdable programs.
Cycle (PTSC) - Defines a single cycle of the program as a step, therefore it must
contain the CYCLE or BEGIN CYCLE instruction.
Routine (PTSR) - Similar to the Statement step, however here the routines are run
as they were single instructions.
6.10.3 Load...
Fig. 6.62 - Load command
The following options are available:
with another .VAR (As) (ML/A)
VAR only (Var) (ML/V)
Another Var only (Var As) (ML/AV)
Convert conflicts (Conv) (ML/C)
Activate (PG)
Dependencies
A detailed list of each one of them is given below.
According to whether the pressure is long or short, different commands can be
activated:
short pressure - loads into the execution memory the programs or variables
files selecting them from the default device (UD:) and from the directory
where they belong (corresponds to command MemoryLoad). To choose the
file (program or variables file ) to load.
long pressure - to specify different loading options , execute the loading and
if required, activate it. A detailed description of possible options is given
here below.
Tp4i - Prog Page
6-68
HS-0-C4E-USO_56.fm
00/0708
6.10.3.1 with another .VAR (As) (ML/A)
Allows to load a program with a different file of variables (.VAR). For instance, Load/As
of PALLET.COD with PALLET_12.VAR
6.10.3.2 VAR only (Var) (ML/V)
Loads only the selected file of variables
6.10.3.3 Another Var only (Var As) (ML/AV)
Allows only a variables file (.VAR) to be loaded, associating it to a program entry with a
different name. The program entry is to be selected from the list of the existing .COD.
The name of the variables file is to be chosen from the .VAR list.
6.10.3.4 Convert conflicts (Conv) (ML/C)
This option is useful in case of conflicts detected during a loading operation, when they
may be solved (as a conflict of array or string size).
6.10.3.5 Activate (PG)
Loads and activates the specified program.
6.10.3.6 Dependencies
As well as the requested program, it automatically loads the code and the variables of
any programs that are called up by it. If these files are in different directories to the one
of the loaded program, it is necessary to set the pre-defined variable $DEPEND_DIRS
that contains the path for the Load command during the search.
6.10.4 View
For a full view of very long file names, using Expanded, as opposed to Compact.
This command DOES NOT load the .COD.
Tp4i - Prog Page
6-69
HS-0-C4E-USO_56.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.63 - View command
6.10.5 Details
Allows the user to display some data related the selected program.
Fig. 6.64 - Details command
The available options are:
Variables (MVV)
Callchain (PV/C)
Filter
A detailed list of each one of them is given below.
6.10.5.1 Variables (MVV)
Displays the variables of the selected program, with the following information (Fig. 6.65
- Remove command):
name
type
value
In the Bottom Menu, beside the 'Close' softkey (F6), there is also the 'Remove' softkey
(F1) that the user can use to remove a variable from the memory (see Fig. 6.65)
Tp4i - Prog Page
6-70
HS-0-C4E-USO_56.fm
00/0708
providing this is not used by other programs.
Fig. 6.65 - Remove command
6.10.5.2 Callchain (PV/C)
Displays the nesting of calls to routines for the selected program (see Fig. 6.66). The
following information is given:
routine name
number of line where the call is made
status
program the routine belongs to
program context (main, interrupt routine, routine).
Fig. 6.66 - Callchain command
This command can be used ONLY for active programs.
Tp4i - Prog Page
6-71
HS-0-C4E-USO_56.fm
00/0708
6.10.5.3 Filter
The following options are available (see Fig. 6.64):
View all (DP/F) - to view all the programs
View not protected - to view only programs that are not protected
View EZ - to view only programs with EZ attribute
6.10.6 POS SHIFT
With this function it is possible to move in space positions that belong to the selected
program, modifying the coordinates.
It is used to transfer the execution of an already stored path, acting on the positions that
belong to such a path.
To activate the POS SHIFT function, proceed as follows:
a. select the required program
Fig. 6.67 - Program Selection
b. press POS SHIFT (F5) - the list of the position variables is displayed (type POS
and XTNDPOS) that belong to the selected program.
Fig. 6.68 - Positions selection
Tp4i - Prog Page
6-72
HS-0-C4E-USO_56.fm
00/0708
c. select the positions that are to be shifted (to select more than one position variable,
activate the marking with SHIFT+ENTER and move with the cursor). If no position
is to be shifted, press Close (F6) to exit (see Fig. 6.71).
d. press SHIFT (F1)
e. a window is shown in which the user has to specify the offsets on X, Y and Z (the
entered values indicate how much to shift (in millimetres) along the three directions
of the Cartesian coordinates system), as well as the required reference system; if
only one variable has been selected, the system displays its name and the
modifications are related only to such a variable (see area highlighted in red, in
Fig. 6.69). Otherwise the system displays the text multiple selection and the
transfer refers to all the selected position variables.
Fig. 6.69 - Positions modification
f. press Apply (F5) to save the modifications
g. The system displays the final status of the operation: if the command has correctly
terminated, the message Command executed is displayed; otherwise an error
message is shown.
Fig. 6.70 - Command executed
h. when terminated, press Close (F6) to return to the positions modification window
(step e.) and carry out other modifications
Tp4i - Prog Page
6-73
HS-0-C4E-USO_56.fm
00/0708
i. if no other positions are to be shifted, press the Close key (F6) twice: If necessary,
save the program (see NOTE and Fig. 6.71).
Fig. 6.71 - Program modified but not saved
See NOTE regarding the entry number in the UD: root directory.
NOTE
The program is modified ONLY in the execution memory (Fig. 6.71, area
highlighted in red)! If it is wished to make the modification permanent, the
variables have to be saved (Save data (MS) command).
Tp4i - Prog Page
6-74
HS-0-C4E-USO_56.fm
00/0708
TP4i - IDE Page
6-75
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
6.11 IDE Page
IDE environment (Integrated Development Environment) is used to develop motion
programs (programs with HOLDABLE and EZ attributes).
The following paragraphs give some information concerning:
Opening the IDE page
Description of the video screen
Description of the available functions
Numeric keypad
6.11.1 Opening the IDE page
The IDE environment is used to edit a program that already exists, that is Holdable
and has EZ attribute.
When the IDE page activates. Through the Left Menu key, the currently active
program is opened. If there is no program active, an error message is displayed.
If the program to be opened in IDE is not the one that is active, or if there is no program
active, use this procedure:
a. activate the Prog Page with the Left Menu key
b. select the program to be opened. If the program is not in the loadable memory,
upload it with the Load...function (F3)
c. press ENTER to confirm (or use the Open (IDE) function). The selected program
is automatically activated. If another program is active, this will be deactivated and
the program asked for will be activated.
At the end of this procedure the system is in IDE environment.
GLOSSARY
It is recommended to read the following glossary carefully, since in this
paragraph the terms MODAL and NODAL are often referred to.
These terms are to be understood as follows:
modal - move and destination instructions (for example: MOVE TO pos1)
nodal with clause ITH - settings that are only valid for the instruction where
they are specified.
nodal with $PAR - a type of syntax where the technological routines(relating
to the applications) are on the same line as the MOVE, defining, besides the
technological parameters, also those linked to tool, frame, orientation, etc.
customised nodal - very compact syntax, containing in a single line all the
customising required by the customer. The description of this type of
instruction is not contained in the standard manual, but only in the Nodal
Moves manual, handed over to the customer for whom it has been
developed. Therefore it is not dealt with herein.
To create a new program, use Create on the Prog Page.
TP4i - IDE Page
6-76
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
6.11.2 Description of the video screen
When the IDE environment is active, the display screen of the Teach Pendant TP4i
shows the following sections, which are peculiar to IDE (see Fig. 6.72):
IDE status lines
Editor area
Dialogue window - which is only activated in certain occasions (for example in the
guided insertion of new instructions).
Fig. 6.72 - IDE environment
6.11.2.1 IDE status lines
These are two areas of the display (see Fig. 6.72 in which the first is highlighted n red
and the second in blue), where the following information is shown:
high status window, containing
name of active program (program running)
name of current program (program displayed, for example it may be different
to the program running if routines are called from other programs)
step mode:
statement - stmt (on single instruction)
disable - dsbl (disabled step mode)
move - move (on move instruction)
fly - fly (on move in fly)
cycle - cycle (on program cycle)
name of active tool
name of active frame
if the system is executing a move instruction in an external program, the
MOTION CURSOR symbol is shown, together with the name of the external
When an environment different from IDE is activated, as e.g. the Prog
environment, IDE enters the so-called " ghost" status: this means that the
situation is frozen, to be afterwards restored when IDE is selected again.
Obviously, meanwhile the program execution can go on.
TP4i - IDE Page
6-77
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
program and the number of the line that contains the move instruction in
progress;
low status window, containing the current settings of the REC key (F5 or hardkey
for TP4i).
6.11.2.2 Editor area
This is the window where the program instructions are displayed. In this window, the
user can edit and debug of the active program, as well as follow its execution (see note
about Displaying the currently being executed instruction).
For an easy and efficient use of the editor area, the colours in which the program lines
are displayed and the cursors that point them have special meanings.
A detailed description follows of:
Colours
The different components of the program lines are displayed with different colours,
as follows:
comment - green, bold
key word - black, bold
reserved word - blue
variable name - black
number - blue
Fig. 6.73 shows an example.
Fig. 6.73 - Editor colours area
1. comment
2. number
3. key word
4. reserved word
5. name of variable
Cursors
Three types of cursor may be displayed:
EDIT CURSOR
corresponds to the instruction that may be modified by the user. The complete
instruction line is highlighted with background
light green - editable line. Press ENTER to enter in editing mode on the
selected line
yellow - line in editing mode (for further information see PDL2 function)
TP4i - IDE Page
6-78
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
During the editing session, the user can carry out one of these operations:
change an existing program line - just position the edit cursor on the line
involved and press ENTER. In this way the editing mode is deceased
and it is then possible to use the Alphanumeric keypad and the Bottom
Menu, commands, as described for the completion of the Statement
command.
Fig. 6.74 - Change command
insert a new program line or a line with complex instructions - use the
PDL2 command. This function makes available the templates regarding
the selected instruction, and considerably facilitates the insertion into the
program.
delete an existing program line or instructions - use the Delete command
that is part of the Selection function.
EXECUTION CURSOR
it is represented by an arrow and the instruction background that is a different
colour according to the status of the actual instruction:
if the line background is dark green, the pointed instruction is the one
running;
if the background is light green, the pointed instruction is the next
instruction to be executed;
if the background is yellow, the system is in AUTO mode and the
program is in HOLD;
if the system is running a protected routine, instead of the arrow that
points to the instruction there will be an icon with EXT written.
Changing a MOVE instruction
A particular case is to change a MOVE instruction. In this case there is the Change
function, associated to key F3, which can be used to change the MOVE
parameters.
See Fig. 6.74.
For further information on how to modify a MOVE with $PAR, see par. 6.11.3.7.3
Changing a MOVE with $PAR on page 6-99.
TP4i - IDE Page
6-79
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.75 - Execution cursor
MOTION CURSOR
the move instruction that the Arm is executing; if there is no move in progress,
it points to the last move instruction executed. The associated icon is that of
a robot, plus integrating symbols that indicate the move status:
the robot is on the trajectory but the move has not terminated
the robot has reached the final position
the robot is out of trajectory
the current move has been aborted.
Displaying the currently being executed instruction
If the opened program is running, IDE displays the instructions which are
currently being executed, by focusing them with the EXECUTION CURSOR. The
execution may be followed by the user by looking at the cursors moving through
the program instructions.
TP4i - IDE Page
6-80
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
When a program is opened under IDE, if the program is not running, the
EXECUTION CURSOR is placed on the BEGIN statement of the 'ROUTINE
call_...'.
6.11.3 Description of the available functions
The available functions in the Bottom Menu are:
Prog
Execution
PDL2
Selection
REC
MOD
6.11.3.1 Prog
Allows to act on the actually open program.
Fig. 6.76 - Prog command
As can be seen in the previous Fig. 6.76, the following functions are available:
Close
Save (cod,var)
Save all mod progs(cod,var)
Save as (cod,var)
Variables
Import
A detailed description of each one follows.
Close
Close IDE: the program remains in the state it was in before the closure. If there
has been a misalignment between the EDIT CURSOR and the EXECUTION
CURSOR, the user is asked if the execution is to be continued from the edit cursor.
It is only possible to exit from the environment if the reply is affirmative. Otherwise
it is necessary to realign the cursors by hand before closing.
TP4i - IDE Page
6-81
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
If the program has been changed, the user is asked if it is to be saved.
Save (cod,var)
Saves both the .COD and the .VAR for the program that is currently open, in the
directory from which it was downloaded; the program remains open.
Save all mod progs(cod,var)
Saves all the changed programs in IDE environment.
Save as (cod,var)
Saves the currently open program in the specified directory (that can also be
different to that where the program was loaded), changing the name; the program
remains open.
Variables
To manage the insertion/viewing of the variables. There are three sub-functions
(see Fig. 6.77):
View line - Displays all the variables that are on the line indicated by the EDIT
CURSOR.
Delete unused - Deletes the declaration of variables not used by the program,
after asking for confirmation from the user.
Insert - Adds the declaration of a new variable. A dialogue window is opened,
in the lower part of the screen page, where the user is asked to send the name
and type of variable required, choosing from those in the list displayed.
Fig. 6.77 - Variables management commands
Import
To import the declarations from another program that have the EXPORTED FROM
clause and to insert them in the declarable part of the variables of the program
currently open in IDE.
The classes of importable declarations area:
Routine
Type
Variable
See NOTE regarding the entry number in the UD: root directory.
TP4i - IDE Page
6-82
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
6.11.3.2 Execution
As already mentioned, IDE is an integrated program editing and development
environment. It is most important that all the programs are carefully checked before
being run in automatic mode.
The Execution menu, in fact, contains commands that influence the execution of the
program currently open in IDE, so as to be able to debug the program, identify any errors
and make the improvements.
Fig. 6.78 - Execution commands
The following commands are available:
Reset
De-actuates and re-actuates the program.
Deactivate
De-actuates the program.
Step
Sets the program step execution mode. For further information see par. 6.10.2.5
Step on page 6-66 of the Prog Page.
The current type of step is indicated by a tick (see example in Fig. 6.79, where the
current type of step is Statement).
Fig. 6.79 - Step command
The commands available are:
Statement (Single step)
TP4i - IDE Page
6-83
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
The execution stops after each instruction. The protected Routines (the
content of which is not displayed) are executed as a single statement; the
execution of non-protected Routines (where the content is visible) stops at the
end of each instruction.
Disable
Stops the program execution in steps.
Move
The execution stops after each single move. It cannot be executed on
non-holdable programs.
Fly
To execute two or more motions in fly before suspending the program
execution. It is similar to the Move, but the execution does not stop after the
MOVEFLY instruction. It cannot be executed on non-holdable programs.
Cycle
Defines a single program cycle, that has to include the CYCLE or BEGIN
CYCLE instruction, as a step.
Set execution cursor
Allows to move the program execution to a line different from the one actually
pointed by the EXECUTION CURSOR. Move the EDIT CURSOR and send this
command.
Abort
Aborts the execution of the current instruction.
Break point
Enters or removes a break point within the program (see Fig. 6.80).
Fig. 6.80 - Break Point command
The break point is positioned in connection with the EDIT CURSOR. The program
execution will be broken before the line identified by the same break point.
To remove a break point, simply go to the line where such point is, and use this
same command.
Bypass
Allows the program execution to go on, in case it is waiting for the completion of a
suspending instruction as WAIT FOR <condition>, DELAY <time>, etc.
Immediate
To run an instruction that will not be included in the body of the current program
(but will have effect on the execution: for example if an assignment to a program
variable is executed, the value of that variable will be actually changed).
TP4i - IDE Page
6-84
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.81 - Immediate execution command
In the Bottom Menu there is the Statement function that opens a Dialogue window
that contains the groups of instructions for the user to choose from. After the type
of instruction has been selected, it has to be confirmed ('OK' or ENTER) so that it
becomes effective.
After the instruction to be executed has been chosen, press 'OK' to start the
execution.
With the IDE environment, as already mentioned, it is possible to see, in the Editor
area, the execution of the program that is currently open (see Displaying the
currently being executed instruction).
6.11.3.3 PDL2
To insert a new line of PDL2 instructions in the open program.
Fig. 6.82 - PDL2 menu
When this soft key is pressed a pop-up menu is shown (see Fig. 6.82) that enables the
following functions:
Empty line (1)
for the rapid insertion of an empty program line.
Bookmarks (2)
this command inserts an empty line and opens the _PREF_ (bookmark) folder
that contains the frequently used instructions, previously inserted by the user (see
TP4i - IDE Page
6-85
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
Add). In the _PREF_ (bookmark) folder the user can select the required
instruction.
The commands that allow action on the Bookmark folder are the following:
Add
when the user is choosing an instruction in the Groups of instructions, the
Add function (F1) is enabled in the Central Menu (see Fig. 6.83).
Fig. 6.83 - Bookmarks - Add
Selecting the required instruction and pressing Add (F1), the instruction is
added to the _PREF_ (bookmark) folder.
Remove
to cancel an instruction from the _PREF_ folder: entering into the folder and
selecting the instruction to be cancelled, the Remove function (F1) is
enabled in the Central Menu (see Fig. 6.84).
Fig. 6.84 - Bookmarks - Remove
When Remove (F1) is pressed, the instruction is removed from the _PREF_
folder.
List of last instructions (from 3 to 10)
the list of the last eight instructions used.
When the user chooses an instruction (from the Bookmarks or from the last used)
it is inserted in the position following that where the EDIT CURSOR is currently
positioned.
TP4i - IDE Page
6-86
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
When this softkey is pressed the last nine instructions used are displayed, plus 'empty
line', for quicker insertion. When the user chooses the instruction, it is inserted in the
position following that pointed by the EDIT CURSOR.
If, among the instructions listed the one required is not there, choose 'empty line'. A new
program line will be opened in the position following that pointed by the EDIT CURSOR.
Note that the IDE environment allows to enter instructions in either modes:
guided insertion using a Template
input by means of the Alphanumeric keypad
Before describing in detail the functions available, it is necessary to introduce the
concept of TEMPLATE, as well as all the information concerning its use.
Template
A template is a sort of mask to help the user when inserting and/or changing an
instruction.
It is composed of key words (inserted by the system) and variable fields (that have to
be completed by the user). The key words are written in bold high case characters on a
light blue background. A variable field is confined by the characters '<' and '>'; when on
it, the background becomes blue.
See example in Fig. 6.85.
Fig. 6.85 - Templates
To move inside the Template it is possible to use:
The cursor keys (right and left)) to move one character at a time (note that the
variable field is considered a single character)
The Next function key (F5) to move to the next variable field (if the previous field
was the last field of the template, when Next is pressed the focus is moved to the
first field)
To move among the different variable fields it is highly recommended to use the
Next function.
TP4i - IDE Page
6-87
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
The functions shown in the Bottom Menu of the PDL2 function are the following
Statement
Variables
Next
In certain situations also the following function may appear
<value>
6.11.3.3.1 Statement
This instruction allows the insertion of PDL2 language instructions.
A short pressure on the key corresponding to this soft key (F1), opens a dialogue
window that displays the Groups of instructions from which the user can choose.
Fig. 6.86 - Statement Menu
A long pressure displays a pop-up menu (see Fig. 6.86) the same as that for the PDL2
function:
Empty line (1)
Bookmarks (2)
List of last instructions (from 3 to 10)
Before listing the Groups of instructions available in the IDE environment, the mode to
operate is described for the guided insertion of a generic instruction.
Guided insertion of a generic instruction
After the type of instruction required has been selected (through the folder Bookmarks
(2), List of last instructions (from 3 to 10) or Groups of instructions), it must be confirmed
('OK' or ENTER) to provide for the insertion.
Let us imagine we want to insert a new program line containing the FOR instruction.
The system shows the Template for the selected instruction (in our example the FOR
Moving among the variable fields with the Next, key, IDE automatically updates
the use mode of the Alphanumeric keypad (seventh field of the Status bar).
TP4i - IDE Page
6-88
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
instruction).
When all the variable fields have been completed (see the FOR template in Fig. 6.85),
pressing OK or ENTER will confirm the insertion of the instruction. The system checks
that the syntax is correct; if the inserted instruction is not correct, an error message is
displayed. After the error has been corrected, the instruction has to be confirmed again
with OK or ENTER.
If the instruction is correct and complete, the insertion is terminated.
Otherwise, when necessary, the system completes the instruction with further program
lines.
See example in Fig. 6.87, in which the system has completed the FOR instruction,
adding the line ENDFOR.
Fig. 6.87 - Guided insertion of an instruction - example
The instruction (or set of instructions) now has to be inserted between the FOR line and
the ENDFOR line
When OK or ENTER is pressed, if the instruction is correct and complete, the insertion
is terminated.
Groups of instructions
At highest level, the groups available in the dialogue window are the following:
Call
Commons
CondExpr
Flow
Hand
IOPort
SysVar
Other applications
Coop-Motion
Contains templates for
calls the enable/disable routines for cooperative motion between Arms and
between Axes and Arm
TP4i - IDE Page
6-89
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
Arm ATTACH and DETACH instructions
Call
Contains templates for
Calls to the tool, frame and base calculation routines
Call_prog (call to an external program routine)
sub_rout (to create a new subroutine inside the program; by default the new
subroutine is created exportable).
Insert the import of the corresponding routine directly: therefore it is not necessary to
declare the import.
Commons
Contains the template for Assignment instructions
CondExpr
Contains the templates of usable conditions in the MOVE instructions
elements that represent the condition value ($BIT and $DIN)
elements introduced by the WITH clause
Flow
Contains the templates of instructions needed to control the program execution flow:
FOR
GOTO
IF
LABEL
SELECT
REPEAT
WHILE
State
Contains the templates of instructions needed to control the program state:
HOLD
PAUSE
UNPAUSE
LOCK
UNLOCK
RESUME
DEACTIVATE
CYCLE
DELAY
RETURN
Hand
Contains the templates of the instructions that manage the pick-up devices (grippers):
TP4i - IDE Page
6-90
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
CloseHand
OpenHand
RelaxHand
IOPort
Contains the templates of instructions concerning I/O ports:
Waitfor
assignment of values to I/O ports (AOUT, BIT, DOUT, GOUT, TIMER, WORD)
built-in regarding I/O ports (BIT_CLEAR, BIT_SET)
SysVar
Contains groups of templates with predefined groups of variables and constants, for
motion control:
ArmOvr - for the arm Override values
Fly - for moves in Fly
OrnType - for the tool orientation
Speed - for the speed
TermType - for position accuracy in the move stop
Other applications
Contains any other templates for technological instructions of the applications installed
in the system.
Fig. 6.88 gives an example of the SmartSearch application.
Fig. 6.88 - SmartSearchTemplates
6.11.3.3.2 Variables
To select an already existing variable to insert in the currently open program line: if the
Template of an instruction is active, the selected variable is inserted into the Template,
in the currently active variable field.
6.11.3.3.3 <value>
When this key is pressed, a window is activated that contains the predefined constants
TP4i - IDE Page
6-91
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
that are available for the selected <value>field. The user has to choose the required
predefined constant and confirm with ENTER.
6.11.3.3.4 Next
Move the cursor to the next variable field of the currently active template. If the field
currently pointed is the last of the line, this function moves the cursor to the first field.
Fig. 6.89 - Insertion of predefined constants
6.11.3.4 Selection
The commands available for this function are:
REC setup
To set the move instruction characteristics that are inserted in the program, each
time the REC key is pressed.
For further details see the par. 6.2.1.3 Other colours keys on page 6-10. When this
function is activated, the system displays the screen page shown in Fig. 6.90.
Fig. 6.90 - Command to set the REC key
At the opening of IDE, the REC key is set in joints modal mode, if it has not been
set previously. To change this setting, either use the current REC Setup function,
or activate the function directly by simultaneously pressing SHIFT+REC.
TP4i - IDE Page
6-92
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
The user has to define the position variable type to be entered (position, jointpos,
xtndpos), the trajectory (linear, circular and joints), and fly enable or disable.
To do so, there are two different ways of operating:
select the field to be changed and open the corresponding pop-up menu by
pressing the ENTER key (see Fig. 6.91); or
Fig. 6.91 - REC key settings modification
use the Central Menu keys, to modify the Type of Move (F1), the Trajectory
(F2) and the type of Variable (see Fig. 6.90, keys highlighted in red). Each
time the required key is pressed, the system inserts a different setting (in
circular manner). These keys act separately from the field where the focus is
positioned.
Also the following functions can be set:
the REC key for Synchronised Motion (software option - Motion
Programming manual). To set the use of the SyncMove clause, select the
related checkbox (see Fig. 6.92 - field highlighted in red);
the possibility to write the move instruction on more than one line, i.e. included
between the key words MOVe and ENDMOVE. To enable/disable this
function, select or deselect the Multiline checkbox (see Fig. 6.92 - field
highlighted in yellow).
Fig. 6.92 - SyncMove - 1
and specify the trajectory and variable to associate to the SyncMove (opening the
corresponding pop-up menus, as shown in Fig. 6.93).
TP4i - IDE Page
6-93
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.93 - SyncMove - 2
At the end, press the key OK (F5) to confirm the changes made.
Enable Marking
Enables the marking of the lines where the EDIT CURSOR. In the central menu the
following functions are shown:
Cut - cuts the selected lines
Copy - copies the selected lines
Deselect - deactivates the marking
NOTES TO RECORD POINTS IN MOVE..SYNCMOVE
WARNING!
to be able to learn the points relating to both Arms, referred by the MOVE ...
SYNCMOVE, with the IDE session open on the current program, it is necessary to
insert in the program, and run the instruction
ATTACH Arm[n]
for both the Arms involved in the MOVE ... SYNCMOVE. The execution of this
instruction must take place BEFORE learning any point, otherwise, when the Arm
is changed, if the Arm selected by TP4i is different to the PROG_ARM, the IDE
session will be closed by the system.
Example:
If the program uses
MOVE Arm[2] ...SYNCMOVE Arm[1],
at the BEGINNING of the program it is necessary to insert the instruction
ATTACH Arm[1],Arm[2].
It is to be noted that the new settings of the REC key are NOT maintained after a
system restart. To make it permanent the configurations have to be saved (using
the system command 'ConfigureSaveCategoryController /Shared').
The 'Nodal..' function is provided, that can be activated with key F4, to modify the
nodal configuration with $PAR of the REC key. For further information see
par. 6.11.3.7 REC key setting, nodal with $PAR on page 6-95.
TP4i - IDE Page
6-94
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
Paste
To paste the lines previously cut or copied, under the line that is currently pointed
by the EDIT CURSOR.
Undelete
Enters again the program with the latest cancelled instruction, to the position where
the EDIT CURSOR is placed. This operation can also be executed by pressing
SHIFT+C on the alphanumeric keypad.
Delete
Cancels the instruction, where the l EDIT CURSOR is placed.
Goto
Allows to move the EDIT CURSOR to the specified position:
Begin - moves the cursor to the BEGINning of the current context
End - moves the cursor to the END of the current context
Line - moves the cursor to the specified program line (within the current
context). A Dialog window is opened to ask the user to enter the wanted line
number.
Comment/Uncomment
To make the current instruction line a "comment" or to make it a loadable
instruction by putting or removing the comment symbol ('--'). As already mentioned,
the commented line is displayed in green.
In the example in Fig. 6.94, line n.36 has become a comment and therefore it will
not be executed.
Several program lines can be selected using the SHIFT+cursor combination.
This operation can also be executed by pressing the C key on the alphanumeric
keypad.
If the selected statement is a structured instruction (for example IF, FOR, etc.),
this command will delete the whole structure, and NOT just the highlighted line.
(from IF to ENDIF, from FOR to ENDFOR, from WHILE to ENDWHILE).
TP4i - IDE Page
6-95
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.94 - Comment command
6.11.3.5 REC
Pressing the softkey inserts:
a move instruction and
the declaration of the corresponding positional variable that is assigned the
current arm position.
The current setting is displayed in the status line at the bottom of the IDE page, as
highlighted in red in the example of Fig. 6.94.
Only for the Teach Pendant connected by cable (TP4i), the function of this softkey is
exactly the same as for the REC key available as hardkey (see par. Motion keys on
page 6-5).
6.11.3.6 MOD
To change the coordinates value of an existing position. For this, after the softkey has
been pressed, the system displays a dialogue window where the user can confirm the
name of the selected variable.
6.11.3.7 REC key setting, nodal with $PAR
For further information regarding the setting modes of this softkey, see the
following paragraphs: par. REC setup on page 6-91 and par. 6.11.3.7 REC key
setting, nodal with $PAR on page 6-95.
If the tool and frame set for the current MOVE are not those set REC setup, the
system will refuse the change.
Read the GLOSSARY carefully regarding the terms " nodal" and " modal" .
TP4i - IDE Page
6-96
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
This paragraph gives information on the following subjects:
Technological routines
REC key setup
Changing a MOVE with $PAR
STARTUP program
Nodal management has been created to use the Moves with the nodal method with
$PAR$, by using a set of predefined routines to set the Move characteristic parameters:
speed, tool and frame, position accuracy, type of orientation.
Example of Move set in nodal mode with $PAR:
MOVE J OINT TO pnt0001p WITH $PAR=MP(TF(1,1),V(100),Z(COARSE))
Using nodal management with $PAR, the values of the variables set by the
technological routine do not have a temporary effect, but are assigned in permanent
mode.
BEGIN
$ARM_SPD_OVR :=100
-- Arm_spd_ovr is 100
MOVE J OINT TO pnt0001p WITH $PAR=MP(TF(1,1),V(50),Z(COARSE))
-- the Move is performed with Arm_spd_ovr at 50% (set by routine V)
-- Arm_spd_ovr is 50
.END
Any modal assignment of a variable is ignored because the technological routines
used with the Moves reassign them.
6.11.3.7.1 Technological routines
The nodal routines are contained in the HMOVE.COD file.
There are three types of Move with $PAR:
MOVE J OINT TO pnt0001p WITH $PAR=MP(TF(1,1),V(100),Z(COARSE))
this is the standard Move, typically used for Moves linked to Spot applications,
handling or no particular type of application.
MOVE LINEAR TO pnt0001p WITH $PAR=GP(TF(1,1), VL(0.2), Z(COARSE),
ORN(RS_TRAJ ))
used for Moves linked to sealant applications and only works on Linear Moves.
MOVE J OINT TO pnt0001p WITH $PAR=AP(TF(1,1),ORN(RS_TRAJ ))
used for Moves linked to arc welding applications.
Regarding the nodal method having a WITH clause, there are substantial
differences. It is to be remembered that, in general, through the nodal method the
variables are assigned temporary values that only have effect during the move
executed by the Move instruction.
After the move the system returns to the values assigned with the modal method.
It is a good programming rule not to use the modal method to assign values to
variables that are also set by technological routines.
TP4i - IDE Page
6-97
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
It can be noted that the technological routines Mp, Gp, Ap call up special functions:
TF (x, y): sets tool x and frame y
RTF (x, y): set the remote tool x and remote frame y
V (vel): used by the Mp routine, sets the Move speed making the following
assignments:
$ARM_SPD_OVR:=vel
$ARM_ACC_OVR:=$ARM_DEC_OVR:=vel2 DIV 100
$SPD_OPT:=SPD_CONST
VL (vel): used by the Gp routine, sets the linear Move speed making the following
assignments:
$LIN_SPD:=vel
$ARM_SPD_OVR:=$ARM_ACC_OVR:=$ARM_DEC_OVR:=100
$SPD_OPT:=SPD_LIN
Z (zone): used by the Mp and Gp routines, sets the positioning accuracy making
the following assignments:
$TERM_TYPE:=zone (where zone is equal to COARSE, FINE, NOSETTLE) in the
case of Move no Fly
$FLY_PER:=zone (where zone is an integer from 1 to 100) in the case of Move
Fly if $FLY_TYPE<>FLY_CART
$FLY_DIST:=zone (where zone is an integer from 1 to 100) in the case of Move
Fly if $FLY_TYPE=FLY_CART
ORN (type): used by the Ap and Gp routines, sets the type of orientation making
the following assignments:
$ORNT_TYPE:= type (where type is equal to RS_TRAJ , RS_WORLD,
EUL_WORLD).
6.11.3.7.2 REC key setup
By default nodal management with $PAR sets a Move of this type:
MOVE J OINT TO pnt0001p WITH $PAR=MP(TF(0,0),V(100),Z(NOSETTLE))
Therefore each time the REC key is pressed a Move of that type appears.
If no Tool or Frame is initialised ('--' '--' in the IDE status lines) the user is asked to set
them through the Motion Page, Basic sub-page.
If it is wished to modify the parameters of the Move or change the type of technological
routine, the REC key has to be set in nodal mode with $PAR. To access the nodal
setting, from the REC setup key environment, press the Nodal.. (F4) softkey.
The screen page shown asks the user to insert some values: Tool and Frame are always
requested, whereas the other values depend on the technological routine chosen (Mp,
Gp or Ap).
TP4i - IDE Page
6-98
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.95 - Mp routine
If the $PAR field contains Mp (to set the MP routine), the screen page asks for the
insertion of:
speed (from 0 to 100)
zone value (Z) (Coarse, Fine, Nosettle)
Fig. 6.96 - Gp routine
If the $PAR field contains Gp (to set the GP routine), that can only be used if the REC
key is set with Linear type Move, the screen page asks for the insertion of:
linear speed (from 0 to 100)
zone value:
if the Move is no Fly: Coarse, Fine, Nosettle
if the Move is Fly an integer from 0 to 100
value of the $Ornt_Type (Rs_traj, Rs_world, Eul_world)
TP4i - IDE Page
6-99
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.97 - Ap routine
If the $PAR field contains Ap (to set the AP routine), the screen page requires the
insertion of:
Value of the $Ornt_Type (Rs_traj, Rs_world, Eul_world
The parameters displayed in the nodal REC Setup with $PAR, regarding the TF or RTF
function, are the active tool and frame at that instant (that can be seen in the IDE status
lines: last and last-but-one field respectively). The set tool and frame are always
automatically activated.
6.11.3.7.3 Changing a MOVE with $PAR
The type of Move can be changed through Change command (F3) in the central menu,
when editing a program line that contains a MOVE instruction.
The graphic interface to modify a MOVE with $PAR, is the same as that of the REC
setup key command with the limitation that it is not possible to modify the type of
positional variable.
6.11.3.7.4 STARTUP program
The Startup program runs a 'Program Go Hmove' command to load the routines needed
to manage the Move with $PAR into the memory .
6.11.4 Numeric keypad
It is a function that considerably speeds up the insertion of the instructions, in particular
the application technological instructions and instructions defined by the user (see PDL2
Programming Language Manual - Appendix B - Customizations on the TP) in a
program opened in IDE environment.
Activating this function opens a table (called Numeric keypad) that describes the
If a Move is changed from no Fly to Fly, IDE asks that the Zone parameter (for an
MP or GP routine) passes from Coarse, Fine, Nosettle to an integer number from
0 to 100.
In the same way, if changing from a Fly to a no Fly Move, IDE asks whether the
positioning accuracy is to be Coarse, Fine, Nosettle.
If a Gp routine is set, the Linear field is disabled.
TP4i - IDE Page
6-100
HS-0-C4E-USO_57.fm
00/0708
association between the numeric keys and the technological instructions (see Fig. 6.98).
Fig. 6.98 - Numeric Keypad
Pressing any numeric key associated to an instruction inserts that instruction in the
program.
Instructions can be inserted even more quickly in IDE environment, without opening the
numeric keypad, press simultaneously SHIFT + the numeric key associated to the
required instruction, the system will insert this instruction in the program.
For example (with reference to Fig. 6.98) if, without opening the numeric keypad the
user presses simultaneously SHIFT and 2, the technological instruction Spot_init is
inserted in the program.
Summing up, the keys used to manage the numeric Keypad are the following:
SHIFT + '1' - opens the numeric Keypad
'n' - when the numeric Keypad is open, it inserts the instruction associated to key
'n'.
SHIFT + 'n' - when the numeric Keypad is NOT open, it inserts the instruction
associated to key 'n'.
PAGE UP / PAGE DOWN - to change the numeric Keypad page .
up/down/RH/LH arrows (cursor) - for circular navigation in the numeric Keypad.
ESC - closes the numeric Keypad without inserting any instruction in the program.
ENTER - inserts the current instruction selected in the numeric Keypad in the
program, and closes the numeric Keypad.
TP4i - I/O Page
6-101
HS-0-C4E-USO_58.fm
00/0708
6.12 I/O Page
This User Page allows to handle the I/O available in the Control Unit C4G:
$AIN
$AOUT
$BIT
$DIN
$DOUT
$FMI
$FMO
$GIN
$GOUT
$IN
$OUT
$SDIN
$SDOUT
$WORD
The user can select the I/O class, he is interested in, by focusing on the icons displayed
on the page and moving it by means of the cursor keys (see Fig. 6.99).
Fig. 6.99 - I/O page
By confirming with ENTER, a sub-page is opened, where the user is asked to enter the
range of the selected input or output
Enter the wanted range and acknowledge with the softkey 'OK' or the ENTER key.
A range can be specified, simultaneously, with this syntax:
<start port 1>..<end port 1>-<start port 2>..<end port 2 >etc.
Example:
1..5-9..14 select the interval from 1 to 5 and that from 9 to14
When the screen page concerning the chosen I/Os is displayed, they can be scrolled
using the cursor keys.
TP4i - I/O Page
6-102
HS-0-C4E-USO_58.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.100 - List of required I/Os
The following information are displayed for each one of the Inputs or Outputs requested
by the user:
name
value
status
description.
For further details, see the description of the function View (SIV... SOV...).
In the Bottom Menu, according to the type of I/O selected, softkeys are available to
operate on them and on the display windows (see List of required I/Os):
Set (SI and SO)
Forcing (SIF... SOF...)
Simulate (SIS... SOS...)
View (SIV... SOV...)
Other general functions are available, which may be actuated through the key F6
Window
A detailed list of all the above mentioned softkeys is given below.
6.12.1 Set (SI and SO)
Sets the specified I/O to the required value.
The available options are
For controls Set (SI and SO), Forcing (SIF... SOF...) and Simulate (SIS... SOS...), it
is possible to act either on the individual I/O or on groups, selecting the first I/O
and pressing the SHIFT+ENTER keys on the last I/O of the group.
This function is not available for $AIN/$AOUT.
TP4i - I/O Page
6-103
HS-0-C4E-USO_58.fm
00/0708
6.12.1.1 On
Sets the specified I/O to the TRUE value.
From SYS_CALL this operation corresponds to
SYS_CALL ( E , <por t _name>[ <por t _i ndex>] : = ON )
6.12.1.2 Off
Sets the specified I/O to the FALSE value.
From SYS_CALL this operation corresponds to
SYS_CALL ( E , <por t _name>[ <por t _i ndex>] : = OFF
6.12.2 Forcing (SIF... SOF...)
This command forces the value of a certain I/O. The physical port is no longer
considered and the forced value is used.
Fig. 6.101 - Forcing of an I/O port
The available options are:
On
Off
Current
Unforce (SIU... SOU...)
A detailed description of each option is given below.
6.12.2.1 On
Forces the specified I/O to the TRUE value
This function is not available for $AIN/$AOUT and $FMI/$FMO.
TP4i - I/O Page
6-104
HS-0-C4E-USO_58.fm
00/0708
6.12.2.2 Off
Forces the specified I/O to the FALSE value
6.12.2.3 Current
Forces the specified I/O to its actual value
6.12.2.4 Unforce (SIU... SOU...)
Removes the forced status for the selected I/O, and restores its original physical
configuration; by turn, it may be:
Current - Removes the forced status for the selected I/O, leaving the current value
Total - Removes the forced status of all I/O of the selected type
6.12.3 Simulate (SIS... SOS...)
Sets a logic I/O in the simulated condition. The physical I/O is no more considered, and
instead is used either the value assigned to the gateway through this command or an
instruction PDL2.
A simulated Input or Output may also be forced.
Fig. 6.102 - I/O port simulation
The available options are:
On
Off
Current
Total
Not simulated (SIN... SON...)
A detailed description of each one of them is given below.
This function is not available for $AIN/$AOUT and $FMI/$FMO.
TP4i - I/O Page
6-105
HS-0-C4E-USO_58.fm
00/0708
6.12.3.1 On
Simulates the TRUE value for the selected input
6.12.3.2 Off
Simulates the FALSE value for the selected input
6.12.3.3 Current
Simulates the current value for the selected I/O
6.12.3.4 Total
Simulates the current value for all the I/O of the selected type.
6.12.3.5 Not simulated (SIN... SON...)
Removes the selected I/O from the simulated condition; by turn, it may be:
Current - Removes the simulated status and leaves the current value
Total - Removes the simulated status for all the I/O of the selected type and leaves
the current value
6.12.4 View (SIV... SOV...)
Displays the selected I/O, according to the required notation (see Fig. 6.103).
Fig. 6.103 - Viewing of I/O ports
The commands that may be actuated through the View function (F5) allow displaying
the wanted I/O. They are:
For $AIN and $AOUT the value is shown in percentage.
TP4i - I/O Page
6-106
HS-0-C4E-USO_58.fm
00/0708
Zoom in
Zoom out
Vertical
Horizontal
Format
6.12.4.1 Zoom in
Displays the wanted I/O, one per display line (seFig. 6.103). The following information
is given:
name ($BIT, $DIN, $DOUT, $GIN, $GOUT, $SDIN, $SDOUT, $WORD)
value (ON / OFF)
description
status (physical, logical, virtual, forced, simulated, configured/not configured,
linked (connected))
6.12.4.2 Zoom out
Displays the wanted I/O, and pools 16 of them in one display line only (see Fig. 6.104).
The following information is provided for the I/O group:
Name
Value (with comment chosen through Format, if applicable)
To view status, the following information can be obtained:
P - physical I/O, configured and linked (connected); the value is displayed;
the I/O can be simulated/forced
E - physical I/O, configured and not linked (not connected); the value is not
displayed as it is not significant
V - virtual I/O, configured; the value is displayed; the I/O can be
simulated/forced
N - I/O not configured
O - I/O with index out of range.
TP4i - I/O Page
6-107
HS-0-C4E-USO_58.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.104 - Zoom out
6.12.4.3 Vertical
If there are several windows open, they are displayed alongside each other in a vertical
arrangement.
Fig. 6.105 - Vertical display of several windows
6.12.4.4 Horizontal
If there are several windows open, they are displayed next to each other in a horizontal
arrangement.
To pass from one window to another, press ESC and move with the rh arrow or
the lh arrow, according to which window is to be selected, to the right or to the left
of the current window.
To pass from one window to another, press ESC and move with the up arrow or
the down arrow according to the window to be selected, either upward or
downward from the current window.
TP4i - I/O Page
6-108
HS-0-C4E-USO_58.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.106 - Horizontal display of several windows
6.12.4.5 Format
It can only be used when the I/Os are displayed in groups of 166 (see command Zoom
out). and allows to display them in the following notations (see Fig. 6.107):
Binary
Octal
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Fig. 6.107 - I/O display format
6.12.5 Window
This softkey controls several functions that manage the I/O ports display windows (see
Fig. 6.108):
Open
Close
Maximize
Restore
TP4i - I/O Page
6-109
HS-0-C4E-USO_58.fm
00/0708
Next
6.12.5.1 Open
Opens a new display window in addition to the one or ones already active (if any). To
move the focusing from a window to another, use the cursor keys.
6.12.5.2 Close
Closes the current display window.
6.12.5.3 Maximize
Displays only the I/O in the current window, using the entire space available on the
display screen.
6.12.5.4 Restore
Restores the previously displayed windows.
6.12.5.5 Next
When a window is displayed in Expanded mode, sending this command allows the
viewing of the next window (still keeping this mode active).
Fig. 6.108 - Display windows management
Should any I/O be selected (orange background), to change over to another
window, first press ESC: the current I/O will be de-selected and then it is possible
to focus on another window (through the cursor keys).
TP4i - I/O Page
6-110
HS-0-C4E-USO_58.fm
00/0708
TP4i - Appl Page
6-111
HS-0-C4E-USO_59.fm
00/0708
6.13 Appl Page
This page is the interface of the application package installed on the C4G Controller
Unit.
For example, in Fig. 6.109 the home page of the Arc Welding application package
(SmartArc).
For further details and/or information, please refer to the Manuals of the specific
Application.
Fig. 6.109 - Main page of the Arc Welding application package
TP4i - Appl Page
6-112
HS-0-C4E-USO_59.fm
00/0708
TP4i - File Page
6-113
HS-0-C4E-USO_60.fm
00/0708
6.14 Files Page
The User page of File Manager (Files) allows to carry out all the operations concerning
the files: copy, cancel, create and remove folders, etc.
Some arrangement criteria and filters may be set through appropriate softkeys.
Fig. 6.110 - Files page
The available options are:
File (F1)
Select (F2)
View (F3) (FV)
Utility (F4)
A detailed description of each one of them is given below.
6.14.1 File (F1)
Fig. 6.111 - File command
The available options are:
Open
Extract (FUCE)
Send to (FC)
TP4i - File Page
6-114
HS-0-C4E-USO_60.fm
00/0708
New
Delete (FD)
Delete permanent (FD/P)
Rename (FR)
Attribute (FUA)
Recycle bin
Properties
A detailed description of each one of them is given below.
6.14.1.1 Open
This command opens the file in ASCII editing mode (see Fig. 6.112)
Fig. 6.112 - Opening a file in ASCII editing
Under this environment, the softkeys available in the Bottom Menu are:
File
This function activates the following operations:
Save - Saves the current file with the same name, keeping it open for editing.
Save As - Saves the current file with a different name and/or destination,
keeping it open for editing.
Exit - Exits and saves the current file
Quit - Exits without saving the current file.
Edit
Allows to move the cursor to the wanted line: select 'goto', (ENTER or 1 - see
Fig. 6.113).
To save the file, see NOTE regarding the entry number in the UD: root directory.
TP4i - File Page
6-115
HS-0-C4E-USO_60.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.113 - Edit - 1 Command
A prompt screen page is displayed (see Fig. 6.114) where the user has to
insert the required line number and confirm with 'Ok' (F5).
Fig. 6.114 - Edit - 2 Command
6.14.1.2 Extract (FUCE)
Extracts an individual file from a compressed file (.ZIP).
6.14.1.3 Send to (FC)
Copies the file towards the specified device.
6.14.1.4 New
Creates a new file, directory or compressed file (.ZIP).
6.14.1.5 Delete (FD)
Deletes the selected file. The file in question may be restored through the command
Recycle bin, Restore command.
TP4i - File Page
6-116
HS-0-C4E-USO_60.fm
00/0708
6.14.1.6 Delete permanent (FD/P)
Cancels the selected file once and for all. The file cannot be recovered any more
6.14.1.7 Rename (FR)
Allows to give a file a different name.
6.14.1.8 Attribute (FUA)
Allows to assign to the selected file or to remove from it one of the following attributes:
Read-only (FUAR)
Hidden (FUAH)
System (FUAS)
To remove an attribute, just select it again (toggle) (FUA/R).
6.14.1.9 Recycle bin
Displays the bin contents related to the selected directory. The following functions are
available in the bottom menu, as shown in Fig. 6.115:
Empty
Empties the bin.
Erase
Removes the selected file from the bin and removes it irrevocably.
Restore
Restores the selected file and put it again in the current directory.
Close
Close the current window.
Fig. 6.115 - Files - Recycle bin
6.14.1.10 Properties
Displays information relating to the current storage unit (UD:) (as shown in Fig. 6.116):
graphic illustration of free space and occupied space
unit name
available space
used space
unit sizes
TP4i - File Page
6-117
HS-0-C4E-USO_60.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.116 - Properties
6.14.2 Select (F2)
Allows to carry out the handling operations of the displayed files (see Fig. 6.117).
Fig. 6.117 - File selection functions
The available options are:
Undo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Select all
Deselect all
Invert sel
Sel prompt
A detailed description of each one of them is given below.
6.14.2.1 Undo
Cancels the latest operation done.
TP4i - File Page
6-118
HS-0-C4E-USO_60.fm
00/0708
6.14.2.2 Cut
Cuts the selected files.
6.14.2.3 Copy
Copies the selected files.
6.14.2.4 Paste
Copies the previously cut or copied files to the current folder
6.14.2.5 Select all
Selects all the files included in the current folder
6.14.2.6 Deselect all
Deselects any file which was previously selected
6.14.2.7 Invert sel
Inverts the current selection (the selected files are de-selected while the non-selected
ones are selected)
6.14.2.8 Sel prompt
Sets the criterion to be used to select the files. The user is asked to insert the required
selection criterion, an asterisk is allowed (with key 1 on the Alphanumeric keypad).
6.14.3 View (F3) (FV)
To manage the viewing of the files and how the related icons will be displayed (see
Fig. 6.118).
Fig. 6.118 - View Command
TP4i - File Page
6-119
HS-0-C4E-USO_60.fm
00/0708
The available options are:
Small icons
Big icons
Details
Refresh
Sort by
6.14.3.1 Small icons
Allows to display the information with small-sized icons.
6.14.3.2 Big icons
Allows to display the information with large-sized icon.
6.14.3.3 Details
To view the list of files adapting or not adapting the size of the columns to the length of
the information to be viewed. The choices available are:
Compress - adapts the column dimension to the actual space requirement
Expand - sets one fixed dimension for all columns
At times the difference between the two modes is scarcely noticeable.
6.14.3.4 Refresh
Updates the information included in the list of files.
6.14.3.5 Sort by
To view the list of files according to different criteria:
Name - list of files displayed in alphabetical order
Date - list of files displayed according to their date of modification (from top
downwards, first the oldest files are displayed, followed by the most recent ones)
Type - display according to type of extension.
6.14.4 Utility (F4)
Provides the user with some tools to carry out operations on the listed files.
The available options are:
Translate (FT)
NOTE: to be sure that the displayed information is always consistent, refresh; in
fact, refreshing is NOT carried out automatically since the displayed information
is inactive.
TP4i - File Page
6-120
HS-0-C4E-USO_60.fm
00/0708
Backup (FUB)
Restore (FUR)
Device Change
6.14.4.1 Translate (FT)
Converts:
a PDL2 program in ASCII sourcing code (.PDL), in a file with executable code
(.COD) and vice versa;
a file of variables in ASCII sourcing format (.LSV), in a file of variables with format
suitable for loading in the controller (.VAR) and vice versa.
If the destination file (e.g. .COD) is already existing, the copy is saved with a different
extension (as .BKC) before the new file is created.
If reports or errors are detected during the conversion, they are displayed in the scrolling
window and recorded in the file <file_name>.ERR.
This command can also be used to convert system binary files (.C4G), into the
corresponding ASCII format (.PDL).
6.14.4.2 Backup (FUB)
Copies a set of files towards the default backup device ($DFT_DV[3]).
A list of Saveset names is displayed, previously entered to the Setup page, Backup,
sub-page, which identify the set of files to be copied ($BACKUP_SET[8]).
In order to see the matching of the Saveset name to be selected with the relevant set of
files, it is recommended to open the Setup page in the Backup sub-page.
6.14.4.3 Restore (FUR)
Copies the files from the default ($DFT_DV[3]), backup device, to the restore device set
on Setup page, Restore sub-page.
A list is displayed, including the Saveset names previously entered to the Setup page,
Restore sub-page, which identify the set of files to be restored ($RESTORE_SET[8]).
In order to see the matching of the Saveset name to be selected with the relevant set of
files, it is recommended to open the Setup page, Restore sub-page. Note that Savesets
are stored in the preset variables.
6.14.4.4 Device Change
To change the device for the display of the files list. The devices allowed depend on the
hardware found by the system.
Access to another device may depend on whether or not the Login has been executed.
See NOTE regarding the entry number in the UD: root directory.
TP4i - Data Page
6-121
HS-0-C4E-USO_61.fm
00/0708
6.15 Data Page
The User Data page of the Teach Pendant allows to look at and modify all the data
tables stored in the Control Unit C4G.
The following tables can be managed in the Data Page:
System tables
Application tables
Tables created by the user.
6.15.1 General information
Fig. 6.119 - Data Page
When the Data Page is opened, the list is shown of all the existing tables on the Teach
Pendant display (the example in Fig. 6.119 shows only the System tables).
To open the required page, select with the arrow up and down keys and confirm with
'Ok' (F5).
It is now possible to move inside the table using the cursor keys and to modify the boxes
in the required fields with the editing mode (press the ENTER key).
During the navigation /editing within a table, the commands available in the Bottom
Menu are:
Table
Modify
Selection
AutoApply
6.15.1.1 Table
These commands are used to open and close a table, save the contents, reload the
previous contents, etc. (see Fig. 6.120).
The columns of the tables displayed in the Data Page, automatically dimension
according to the information they contain.
TP4i - Data Page
6-122
HS-0-C4E-USO_61.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.120 - Table Command
The following options are available:
Open
Close
Apply
Save
Reload
History
6.15.1.1.1 Open
Displays a list including all of the tables. When the ENTER key is pressed, the selected
table opens.
6.15.1.1.2 Close
Closes the current table. If changes have been made, the user is asked to confirm the
application and the saving of the changes in the .VAR file and in the execution memory.
'Ok' (F5) to confirm and save, Cancel (F6) to close without saving.
6.15.1.1.3 Apply
Saves the applied changes in the execution memory. The table keeps open, but the
changes are NOT stored in the file.
6.15.1.1.4 Save
Saves the changes in the execution memory and on file. The Table remains open.
For WiTP wireless, if the TP is unpaired from the Control Unit, any open tables in
Data Page will be closed by forcing.
TP4i - Data Page
6-123
HS-0-C4E-USO_61.fm
00/0708
6.15.1.1.5 Reload
Reloads the value of the variables from the file.
6.15.1.1.6 History
Lists the last 6 tables open.
6.15.1.2 Modify
Fig. 6.121 - Modify Command
Allows to modify the table contents. The following options are available:
Insert
Copy
CellCopy
Paste
Undo All
Set Active
6.15.1.2.1 Insert
Inserts a new line on the table bottom
The system displays a prompt window to ask the user to enter the name of the new item.
6.15.1.2.2 Copy
Copies the previous selection according to the selection mode currently set (Selection
command (F3).
See NOTE regarding the entry number in the UD: root directory.
TP4i - Data Page
6-124
HS-0-C4E-USO_61.fm
00/0708
6.15.1.2.3 CellCopy
Copies the currently selected cell.
6.15.1.2.4 Paste
Overwrites the selected line or cell, according to the last content copied (using the Copy
or the Copy cell command).
6.15.1.2.5 Undo All
Cancels the change in all the cells where the Apply command has not yet been applied.
6.15.1.2.6 Set Active
Sets active the line where the current cell is located. The line name is displayed bold
6.15.1.3 Selection
To set the selection mode. The following options are available:
Line
Invert
Select all
Deselect all
6.15.1.3.1 Line
Selects the current line without changing the position of the cursor.
6.15.1.3.2 Invert
Inverts the selection of the lines (the selected lines become de-selected and vice-versa).
6.15.1.3.3 Select all
Selects all of the lines
6.15.1.3.4 Deselect all
Deselects all of the lines
TP4i - Data Page
6-125
HS-0-C4E-USO_61.fm
00/0708
6.15.1.4 AutoApply
Fig. 6.122 - AutoApply mode
Edit in Auto Apply modes means to make the changes applied to the table cells (i.e.
copied in execution memory) get automatically operating.
This function corresponds to the softkey F4. If a table may be edited in Auto Apply mode,
the function AutoApply (AutoAppli..) is enabled when the table opens (blue background
on softkey F4).
This mode can be disabled by pressing the key F4; the background of the corresponding
softkey turn grey (see Fig. 6.123).
Fig. 6.123 - AutoApply Off
If the key F4 is pressed again, the above-mentioned mode is enabled again (blue
background).
6.15.2 System tables
'System Tables' are the tables created automatically by the C4G Control software (see
Fig. 6.124):
BASE
TOOL
FRAME
TP4i - Data Page
6-126
HS-0-C4E-USO_61.fm
00/0708
They can be accessed directly when entering the Data Page.
To select the required table, use the up and down arrow keys and press ENTER or Ok
(F5).
Fig. 6.124 - System tables
As already explained in the previous paragraphs, once the table is opened, it is possible
to move inside it using the cursor keys and to modify the cells entering in editing mode
(pressing the ENTER key),in the required fields.
The significance of the different system table columns is briefly described in the line with
a blue background above the Bottom Menu.
See Fig. 6.125, Fig. 6.126 and Fig. 6.127, which are given as examples.
Fig. 6.125 - Position column of the BASE table
TP4i - Data Page
6-127
HS-0-C4E-USO_61.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.126 - 'Arm number' column of the TOOL table
Fig. 6.127 - 'Main inertia moment of remote Frame' column
6.15.3 Application tables
Tables created by the Comau application supplier.
According to the application installed there may be different tables.
For example, see the following Fig. 6.128 in which the application tables are highlighted
in red.
TP4i - Data Page
6-128
HS-0-C4E-USO_61.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.128 - SmartArc application
To select the required table, use the up and down arrow keys and press ENTER or Ok
(F5).
As already explained in the previous paragraphs, after the table has been opened, it is
possible to move inside it using the cursor keys, and to modify the cells entering in
editing mode (pressing the ENTER key), in the required fields.
6.15.4 Tables created by the user
The user, by means of PDL2 language, can create customised tables to manage in
this User Page.
Once created and added to the Data Page, these tables are managed in exactly the
same way as the System tables and Application tables.
This means that, to select the required table, use the up and down arrow keys, then
press ENTER or Ok (F5).
Furthermore, as already explained in the previous paragraphs, once the table is opened,
it is possible to move inside with the cursor keys and modify the cells entering in editing
mode (pressing the ENTER key), in the required fields.
The procedure to create them and add them to the Data Page is described in the
PDL2 Programming Language Manual, Appendix B, par. User table creation from
DATA environment.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-129
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
6.16 Setup page
The Setup page is used to read and change the system settings
(see Fig. 6.129 - Setup Page).
Fig. 6.129 - Setup Page
The Bottom Menu contains the Config. Function (F1) to operate on the Configuration
files.
In the Pages Area, moving on the icons with the cursor keys, the user can select the
required sub-page. Eight sub-pages are available, each one corresponding to a definite
setup environment, namely:
Arm
AUX_AXES
ReloadSw
Backup
Controller (CCS)
FB_TOOL
Install (FUI)
IO_TOOL
Login
Network
ToolFrame
While operating in a sub-page, the name of that sub-page is always displayed at the top
right angle of the User Page window.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-130
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
6.16.1 Config. Function
Fig. 6.130 - Config. Command
By pressing the Config. key (F1), the user can activate certain functions related to the
configuration files (see Fig. 6.130):
Save the configuration file (CSA)
to save the changes made on the various sub-pages, regarding values of
predefined configuration variables; it creates a new configuration file
<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G.
Load the configuration file (CLA)
to load the configuration values contained in file
<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G in the corresponding predefined variables.
Save configuration of some categories (CSCx)
(where 'x' is the Category to be loaded) to save in a file the values, contained in the
memory, of predefined variables of certain categories and the related minor
categories.
When this function is selected, the system displays the screen page shown in
Fig. 6.131.
For further information about this function, see the System Commands chapter,
paragraph CONFIGURE SAVE ALL (CSA).
For further information about this function, see the System Commands chapter,
paragraph CONFIGURE LOAD ALL (CLA).
TP4i - Setup Page
6-131
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.131 - Configure Save Category
The user has to select the required category (Save or Load Category), opening the
pop-up menu (press ENTER key) for the Category field, selecting and confirming
the choice (see Fig. 6.132),
Fig. 6.132 - Category selection
and any sub-categories (Minor Category) for which the configuration is to be saved,
selecting or not selecting the relevant checkbox (see Fig. 6.131).
Option Rules specifies the rules that the save/load command has to use, to know
which objects to save/load. For further details, see PDL2 Programming
Language manual - chap.Predefined Variables List - par.$C4G_RULES: C4G
Save & Load rules.
The user can indicate whether it is wished to save the selected variables in the
default file (and in this case only the section relating to the specified categories and
minor categories will be updated), selecting item Update Configuration File action
button (as shown in Fig. 6.133, highlighted in red),
TP4i - Setup Page
6-132
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.133 - Default configuration file
or if it is wished to create a partial file, containing ONLY the values of the indicated
category and sub-category variables. This file will then be used for partial loading
of the values in memory or copied on several Controls to uniform certain
initialisations.
In this case the user has to select Create partial file field and specify the name of
the file, confirming with ENTER. There is also the Browse key (F1) to use
names of existing files and /or folders (see Fig. 6.134 - highlighted in red).
Fig. 6.134 - Partial File
Loads the configuration of some categories (CLCx)
(where 'x' is the Category to be loaded) to load the values stored in a file in the
predefined variables belonging to the indicated category and the related minor
categories.
When this function is selected, the system displays the screen page shown
Fig. 6.135.
For further information about this function, see the System Commands chapter,
paragraph CONFIGURE SAVE CATEGORY.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-133
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.135 - Configure Load Category
As for the Save configuration of some categories (CSCx), the user can specify the
required category and the minor categories of the configuration variables, as well
as the Rules and the file where the values related to these variables are to be
loaded (configuration file or partial file).
Therefore see the Save configuration of some categories (CSCx) for the detailed
description on how to proceed.
6.16.2 Arm
Setup commands are available for the following environments:
Calib
Ieak
Mounting
Presse
Sik
StrokeEnd
For further information about this function, see the System Commands chapter,
paragraph CONFIGURE LOAD CATEGORY.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-134
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
6.16.2.1 Calib
Involves the availability of a set of commands allowing configuring the current arm
according to the user's requirements.
The softkeys available in the Bottom Menu are:
Turn Set (CAT)
Calib (CAC)
Ret. Mem. (Mem.Ret.)
Change
6.16.2.1.1 Turn Set (CAT)
Sets the encoder revolutions counter at the motion software level. Before giving the
command, the arm has to be moved to the calibration position (within an encoder turn
quadrant). This command is useful in case the pre-setting has been lost, e.g. due to a
reading error of the engine revolutions
To activate the Turn Set procedure, press the key corresponding to the softkey Turn Set
(F1).
There is a 'User' option (CAT/U) to use the previously obtained User calibration position
(see Fig. 6.136).
After making the required changes, to save the configuration set, press Save (F5).
To optionally change the current arm, go to the Motion Page, Basic sub-page.
The system has to be in PROGR status (status selector switch on position T1) and
the drives must be on and kept so during the entire turn-set operation.
The data is saved automatically in NVRAM memory, in the configuration file
(<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G) and in the calibration ASCII file
(<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>_CAL<num_arm>.PDL).
TP4i - Setup Page
6-135
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.136 - Turn Set command
Through a prompt screen page, the system asks for confirmation from the user before
executing the Turn Set operation.
6.16.2.1.2 Calib (CAC)
Executes a calibration procedure on the current arm, either on the whole arm or on
specific axes.
Before the command is sent, the arm is to be placed in the calibration position. To define
the wanted axis, select it (with SHIFT/ENTER) before starting up the procedure. If all
axes are selected, the entire current arm is calibrated.
This command cannot be used if the selected user profile is not Service.
The available options, which may be actuated by holding down for long the key
corresponding to softkey 'Calib' (see Fig. 6.137), are the following:
Learn (CAC/L)
Learns the actual position as the user calibration position ($CAL_USER). The
learning procedure is executed on all the selected axes.
NoSave (CAC/N)
No automatic saving is performed of the file .C4G, ASCII calibration file
<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>_CAL<num_arm>.PDL and calibration data in the
NVRAM memory.
User (CAC/U)
For the calibration position it uses that of the user obtained or assigned beforehand
($CAL_USER).
Learn NoSave (CAC/LN)
This is a combination of the previous options Learn (CAC/L) and NoSave (CAC/N).
User NoSave (CAC/UN)
This is a combination of the previous options User (CAC/U) and NoSave (CAC/N).
The system has to be in PROGR status and the drives must be on and kept so for
the entire calibration operation.
The calibration data are automatically saved in the NVRAM memory; in the
configuration file (<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G) and in the ASCII calibration
file <$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>_CAL<num_arm>.PDL.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-136
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
After the wanted option has been selected, acknowledge with ENTER: a user's
acknowledgement prompt message is displayed. Answer 'OK' (F5) to start the
Calibration procedure; 'Cancel' (F6), to cancel.
Fig. 6.137 - Calibration commands
6.16.2.1.3 Ret. Mem. (Mem.Ret.)
Displays the commands required to load and save the arm data in the NVRAM memory.
This allows to read specific data concerning the axes directly from the Controller, and to
store the data peculiar to the Arm.
The available commands are:
Load (CARL)
Loads the arm data (calibrated axes mask) and that of the separate axes (axes
length, calibration values and calibration constants), from the Controller NVRAM
memory. Automatic updating of the configuration file
(<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G) and calibration file
(<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>_CAL<num_arm>.PDL).
After acknowledgement of the Load command, the system displays a prompt
screen, asking the user to select the wanted checkboxes.
can select the 'No file Checkbox (CARL/N) to disable the saving.
can select the 'Load File Checkbox (CARL/L) to enable the loading of the data
relating to the axes, reading it directly from the calibration file and saving the
configuration file <$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G in the NVRAM memory.
A .COD file is created automatically with the same name as the calibration file
(<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>_CAL<num_arm>.PDL) that is executed.
Save (CARS)
Saves axes data from the controller memory to the NVRAM memory and
automatically updates the configuration file (<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G)
and the calibration file (<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>_CAL<num_arm>.PDL).
The user can choose whether disabling this automatic updating or not, by means
of the No file (CARS/N) Checkbox.
6.16.2.1.4 Change
Allows to modify the $CAL_DATA value for the current arm. Proceed as follows:
a. Select the required line, using the up and down arrows
TP4i - Setup Page
6-137
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
b. press ENTER or Modify (F4) to enter editing mode
c. Make the changes needed
d. Confirm with ENTER or cancel by pressing ESC.
6.16.2.2 Ieak
By selecting the IEAK icon (Interlock External Axes Kit), the user can manage the I/O
configuration for the positioners.
Fig. 6.138 - Ieak sub-page
The commands available in the SETUP environment, to manage the IEAK devices, are:
Cnfg (F3)
View (F4)
Clr (F2)
Save (F5)
Close (F6)
For further information regarding the IEAK devices, see the Guide to integration,
Safeties, I/O, Communications manual.
Before configuring the related I/O signals the leak device has to be enabled on the
required Arm (see Fig. 6.138). To do so, move the focus on the corresponding
checkbox and press ENTER.
NOTE FOR THE USER
Before starting the Ieak configuration, it is advised to use the View (F4) command
to know the current configuration and to avoid an accidental loss of pre-existing
configurations or the execution of a configuration on an inconsistent system.
If the current configuration is not correct, the user is recommended to carry out a
clearing operation (with Clr (F2) command) before proceeding with the new
configuration.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-138
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
6.16.2.2.1 Cnfg (F3)
Fig. 6.139 - Interface selection
To configure the I/O of a Ieak device:
a. select the fieldbus concerned - move the focus on the Fieldbus menu and press
ENTER to open it. Choose the required Fieldbus and press ENTER (see
Fig. 6.139).
a.1 If the Fieldbus is not CANBus, it is also necessary to select the board relating to
the selected Fieldbus. To do so, place the focus on the second menu, press
ENTER to open it, choose the required board and press ENTER again.
b. Press Ok (F3) to start the configuration - the system will automatically configure the
I/Os related to the IEAK device, on CanBus module number 3, at physical
address 25; at the end of the configuration mapped ports $SDIN/$SDOUT and the
signals associated to them are displayed (see Fig. 6.140):
name and index of configured port $SDIN/$SDOUT
fieldbus name
For CAN the following are indicated:
module number (CAN module 3)
module physical address (@ 25)
For the other interfaces the number of the bit is indicated where the
corresponding $SDIN or $SDOUT is mapped (for example: Bit 17)
type of signal
MOTOR ON (input - request to power on the motors of positioner - 1 =
request, 0 =no request). It is a signal available on external device (for
example on PLC, Control Panel, etc.).
No MOTOR OFF (input - request to shut down table motors - 1 =no request,
0 =request). It is a signal available on external device (for example on PLC,
Control Panel, etc.).
No TIMER MOTOR OFF (input - signal referring to the status of the PILZ
safety relay - 1 =idle (no line emergency), 0 =line emergency ). It is an
internal signal, therefore it is to be configured on CANBus.
This signal goes to 0 when there is an emergency from the line. In this case
a timer starts (the time depends on the characteristic value of the arm)
expires when the sik associated to the arm is opened.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-139
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.140 - I/O configuration for IEAK
By pressing the Next (F6) softkey, the configuration viewing is completed with return to
the main screen page of the IEAK Sub-page (Fig. 6.138).
6.16.2.2.2 View (F4)
Pressing softkey View (F4), the user asks to view the current configuration; the system
displays, in sequence, the $SDIN and $SDOUT ports mapped for the Arms (and related
IEAK devices) in the system.
The information displayed is described in item b. of par. 6.16.2.2.1 Cnfg (F3) on
page 6-138.
An example for two Arms, is shown in Fig. 6.141.
SIK ON (input - status of SIK device associated to the axis of the arm
corresponding to positioner - 1 =SIK closed, 0 =SIK open). It is an internal
signal, therefore it is to be configured on CANBus.
MOTOR ON/OFF STS (output - status of positioner - 1 =motors on, 0 =
motors off). It is a signal available externally.
RESTORE (output - used by the system to reset the PILZ safety relay). It is
an internal signal, therefore it is to be configured on CAN.
positioner the port is assigned to (e.g.: T.R. 1). Note that it is not the number
of the arm, but the order number of the positioner (e.g. Rotating Table)
associated to a certain arm.
WARNING! To make the configuration permanent, the Save (F5) command has to
be executed (see Fig. 6.138).
TP4i - Setup Page
6-140
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.141 - View (IEAK configuration for two Arms)
6.16.2.2.3 Clr (F2)
To reset the pre-existing configuration of the positioners.
To carry out this reset, it is necessary that at least one IEAK device is enabled on one
of the Arms installed in the system.
6.16.2.2.4 Save (F5)
When this softkey is pressed, all the current settings are saved in a permanent manner.
When terminated, the system shows a message informing the user that the saving has
taken place.
6.16.2.2.5 Close (F6)
Press this softkey, to exit from the IEAK devices sub-page.
The system indicates the presence of any data that has not been saved (see Fig. 6.142),
but the closing operation continues. It is the responsibility of the user to save before
closing the configuration sub-page.
WARNING - pressing this softkey will reset ALL the configurations present,
related to IEAK devices.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-141
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.142 - Exit with unsaved modifications
6.16.2.3 Mounting
When the Mounting icon is selected, the screen page of Fig. 6.143 is displayed; here it
can be declared to the system how the robot is mounted:
on ceiling,
on floor,
on a sloped plane as to the floor,
on a sloped plane as to the ceiling.
Fig. 6.143 - Mounting sub-page
To declare the type of robot Mounting, proceed as follows (see reference to screen
page of Fig. 6.143):
a. select the required item in the checkgroup highlighted in red (see Fig. 6.143) -
move the focus on to the checkbox to be selected and press ENTER to confirm; if
the Mounting is SLOPED PLANE type, pass to step b.
The mounting on a sloped plane is only foreseen for type NS, NM and SIX robots.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-142
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
a.1 if the mounting is SLOPED PLANE TYPE, indicate the slope angle - move the
focus on the spindial highlighted in green (see Fig. 6.143), change the value and
confirm with ENTER; if the slope is in relation to the floor, pass to step b.;
a.2 if the slope is in relation to the ceiling, select the FROM CEILING checkbox
(highlighted in yellow in Fig. 6.143);
b. save the configuration with the Save (F5) softkey and exit from the Mounting
screen page (Close (F6) softkey).
6.16.2.4 Presse
With the selection of the PRESSES icon, the user can configure the parameters of the
robots for the automation of the presses (Interpress).
These parameters (see Fig. 6.144) are:
weight of part to be worked on (kg)
distance of part centre of gravity from the flange centre (mm).
Fig. 6.144 - Setup Interpress
6.16.2.5 Sik
Selecting the SIK icon, the user can manage the $SDIN/$SDOUT signals for these
devices.
The main screen page of this function is shown in Fig. 6.145.
If an Auxiliary Axis or an Arm is displayed with a green background, this means that a
Sik device associated to it can be configured.
For example, in Fig. 6.145, the Sik on Axis 8 of Arm 1 (highlighted in light blue) can be
configured. Conversely, for Arm 2 (highlighted in yellow), the only Sik that can be
configured is that of the Robot.
For further details regarding the Sik devices, see the Guide to integration Safeties,
I/O, Communications manual.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-143
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.145 - SIK devices setup
A Sik device can be activated on auxiliary axes or on robot axes: to each Arm or
Auxiliary Axis, 2 $SDIN and 2 $SDOUT are associated, reserved for the corresponding
Sik.
The $SDIN and $SDOUT signals for the ARMS (Robot), are included between 25 and
32, as indicated in Fig. 6.146.
Fig. 6.146 - $SDIN and $SDOUT for Robot Sik
The $SDIN and $SDOUT signals for AUXILIARY AXES, are included between 65 and
96, as indicated in Fig. 6.147.
Fig. 6.147 - $SDIN and $SDOUT for Auxiliary Axes Sik
NOTE FOR USER
Before starting to configure a Sik, it is recommended to use the View (F2)
command, to know the current configuration and to avoid an accidental loss of
pre-existing configurations or the execution of a configuration on an inconsistent
system.
The Cnfg (F1) command is to be used, not only to execute an Input/Output
configuration, but also to check the configuration at arm/axes level.
Only if it is all as it should be, the user can proceed to configure the
corresponding Inputs/Outputs, guided by the program.
Conversely, if the current configuration is not correct, the user is recommended
to execute a clearing operation (see par. 6.16.2.5.6 Reset of previous setup on
page 6-148) before starting a new configuration.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-144
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
The controls available to manage the Sik devices in the SETUP environment are:
Cnfg (F1)
View (F2)
Map (F3)
Save (F5)
Quit (F6)
In brief, the complete configuration procedure for the Sik is the following:
a. set the required command (see previous note WARNING),
b. press Cnfg (F1) to confirm the settings for the required command. If it is wished to
configure more than one Sik device, return to step a. and carry out the other
settings;
c. check that the situation is consistent (View (F2)) and if necessary execute a Reset
of previous setup,
d. define the I/O signals that pilot the selected Sik devices (Map (F3)),
e. save the new configuration (Save (F5)).
A detailed description follows of the functions available in this SETUP sub-page.
6.16.2.5.1 Cnfg (F1)
As already mentioned, pressing this softkey serves to confirm the settings of the
comboboxes highlighted in purple in Fig. 6.145.
For example, in this figure, pressing Cnfg (F1) confirms that it is wished to manage the
Sik associated to Auxiliary Axis 8 of Arm 1.
After confirming the settings with this softkey, the system is ready to execute the
required command.
6.16.2.5.2 View (F2)
By pressing this softkey the currently SAVED configuration for the selected Sik device
can be viewed (see Fig. 6.148). Press softkey Next (F6) to view the entire map.
WARNING
For any operation it is wished to carry out (mapping of I/O signals, current
configuration display or reset), FIRST OF ALL:
a. set the required command (combobox highlighted in purple in Fig. 6.145)
b. press Cnfg (F1) to confirm the setting.
The display of the new configuration (View (F2)) always refers to the LAST
SAVING.
To view the configuration that has just been executed, FIRST it has to be saved
(Save (F5)).
TP4i - Setup Page
6-145
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
The following information is displayed (see Fig. 6.148):
number of Arm
for each $SDIN / $SDOUT associated to a Sik
chosen interface device (in our example Can)
logic address of this device (in our example 3)
associated PIN (bit number)
For each $SDIN / $SDOUT not associated to any Sik, the text <-- Not Map --> is
displayed.
Fig. 6.148 - Viewing of current configuration
6.16.2.5.3 Map (F3)
Press this softkey to map two $SDIN and two $SDOUT for each selected Sik on the
required interface. The procedure is as follows:
a. press the softkey Map (F3),
b. choose the required interface board - the system gives the following information
(with reference to the example in Fig. 6.149):
number of Arm (A)
number of any Auxiliary Axis (B)
number of current operation (C) in relation to the total number of operations
required (D)
number of Sik (E).
To select the interface, use the menu highlighted in yellow in Fig. 6.149;
It is to be remembered that the display (View (F2)) is always referred to the LAST
CONFIGURATION SAVED (Save (F5)) !
TP4i - Setup Page
6-146
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.149 - Choice of interface
c. press softkey Next (F6) to access the next screen page (Fig. 6.150);
Fig. 6.150 - Choice of I/O ports for Sik
d. Choose the index of the first $SDIN and the first $SDOUT to be associated to the
selected Sik - to modify these indexes, move the focus on the spindial concerned,
press ENTER to pass to editing mode (as indicated in Fig. 6.150), change the
value and press ENTER again to confirm;
e. press softkey ok (F3) to make the choice of indexes final. If there are more than
one mapping operation, the system will show further screen page for choice (see
Fig. 6.151); the user has to execute step b. again; if the mapping that has just been
executed was the last (or only) request, go to step f.;
Always make sure that the same I/O indexes are not chosen for different Sik!
TP4i - Setup Page
6-147
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.151 - Another mapping operation
f. the system returns to the main screen page (Fig. 6.145).
g. If it is wished to view the configuration that has just been executed, read carefully
the description for the View (F2) command.
6.16.2.5.4 Save (F5)
Press this softkey to conclude the configuration operation, asking for it to be saved.
The system saves the new configuration, after which it informs the user with an
appropriate message (see Fig. 6.152).
Fig. 6.152 - Saving Sik configuration
Press OK (F5) to return to the main page for the Sik devices.
6.16.2.5.5 Quit (F6)
Press this softkey to exit from the Sik devices environment.
It is to be remembered that to make the configuration final (even if only to view it!)
it MUST be saved (Save (F5) command ).
TP4i - Setup Page
6-148
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
6.16.2.5.6 Reset of previous setup
To reset the current configuration, proceed as follows:
a. from the SIK Setup main screen page, select the Clear command. To do so, move
the focus on the central bottom softkey combobox (highlighted in yellow in
Fig. 6.153), press ENTER to open it, select the Clear function and press ENTER
again to confirm.
b. Press the Cnfg (F1) softkey to confirm the command.
Fig. 6.153 - Previous setup reset
Having reset the previous configuration the start is certainly from a consistent situation.
6.16.2.6 StrokeEnd
By selecting the StrokeEnd icon, the ends of strokes of all the current arm axes can be
changed (set on the Motion Page, Basic sub-page).
Fig. 6.154 - StrokeEnd sub-page
6.16.3 AUX_AXES
Selecting the AUX_AXES icon, the user can choose to configure a positioner, an
integrated slide or a gantry.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-149
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
According to the system configuration, the following environments may be present:
Positioners (for the configuration of the positioners)
SLIDE (for the configuration of the integrated slide)
iPortal (for gantries configuration)
Fig. 6.155 - Setup AUX_AXES
6.16.3.1 Positioners
When the Positioners environment is selected, the screen page of Fig. 6.156 is
displayed, where the following data has to be selected:
Positioner - the positioner index; the C4G system can manage up to 4 positioners
Type - the type of positioner to be configured. The choice is between:
rotary axes
perpendicular axes
non perpendicular axes
L axes
Arm - the arm associated to the positioner to be configured.
After making the required changes, to save the configuration set, press Save (F5).
TP4i - Setup Page
6-150
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.156 - Positioners configuration
Having made the choice, press ENTER. The system displays the screen page relating
to the type of positioner selected (see Fig. 6.157, Fig. 6.158, Fig. 6.159 and Fig. 6.160).
Fig. 6.157 - Rotary axis
On this screen page the user has to specify the maximum radius of the part overall
dimensions [mm].
Fig. 6.158 - Perpendicular axesi
The user has to enter the following data:
TP4i - Setup Page
6-151
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
radii R1 and R2 of the maximum overall dimensions of the part to be machined
[mm]
length of 1
st
axis (L1)
2
nd
axis offset (L2)
Fig. 6.159 - Non perpendicular axesi
The user has to enter the following data:
radii R1 and R2 of the maximum overall dimensions of the part to be machined
[mm]
length of 1
st
axis (L1) [mm]
length of 2
nd
axis (L2) [mm]
angle (alpha) between rotation axis of 1st axis and the vertical axis in relation to the
positioner base []
2
nd
axis offset [mm]
Fig. 6.160 - L axes
radii R1 and R2 of the maximum overall dimensions of the part to be machined
[mm]
length of 1
st
axis (L1) [mm]
2
nd
axis offset (L2) [mm]
After which, to save the configuration entered, press Save (F1). To exit from the Setup
TP4i - Setup Page
6-152
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
environment of the positioners, press Close (F6).
6.16.3.2 SLIDE
To configure the integrated slide, the following parameters have to be inserted (see
Fig. 6.160).
Height (mm) - the distance between the floor and the robot base (installed on the
slide)
Slide axis calibration position (mm)
Positive Stroke-end and negative stroke-end (mm)
Angle - the mounting angle of the robot on the slide, measured anticlockwise from
the slide axis to the robot axis X
base
.
Integrated - if selected, this checkbox indicates that the slide is managed by the
system in integrated mode
TX_RATE value - the baud rate value
TX_RATE sign - the baud rate sign (Plus / Minus)
Fig. 6.161 - Integrated slide Setup
The user has to enter the required values and confirm with OK (F5). To cancel the
changes made, press Close (F6) or ESC.
6.16.3.3 iPortal
In this environment the parameters can be set for the configuration of:
Gantry with 3 linear axes
Gantry with 2 linear axes
Trans-rotary column
6.16.3.3.1 Gantry with 3 linear axes
When the gantries environment (iPortal) is selected, the screen page of Fig. 6.162 is
displayed, relating to the type of Gantry installed.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-153
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.162 - iPortal - Gantry with 3 linear axes
6.16.3.3.2 Gantry with 2 linear axes
On this screen page the user has to specify the type of axis (X, Y and Z), the positive,
negative stroke-ends and calibration position for each axis. It is also necessary to
specify the mounting angle of the robot on the gantry, and the offset.
Fig. 6.163 - iPortal - Gantry with 2 linear axes
6.16.3.3.3 Trans-rotary column
On this screen page the user has to specify the type of axis (X, Y and Z), the positive,
negative stroke-ends and calibration position for each axis. It is also necessary to
specify the mounting angle of the robot on the gantry, and the offset.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-154
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.164 - iPortal - Trans-rotary column
On this screen page the user has to specify the positive, negative stroke-ends and the
calibration position.
Also the following parameters are to be specified:
robot mounting angle on column overhanging beam;
robot mounting position on column (low/high);
height of column [mm];
radius (from column centre to centre of robot base) [mm];
column mounting angle on slide [];
column mounting offset on slide [mm].
6.16.4 ReloadSw
To load the software related to:
Control Unit (C4G)
Teach Pendant (TP)
As shown in Fig. 6.165, the required icon has to be pressed to have access to the
related sub-page.
Fig. 6.165 - ReloadSw command
TP4i - Setup Page
6-155
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
6.16.4.1 C4G
On this sub-page it is possible to reload the system software and restart the system (see
Fig. 6.166). This operation is especially useful to update system software to a new
version.
Fig. 6.166 - C4G software loading
The user is allowed to load the system software from the following devices: either
From Disk-On-Key (XD:) or
From PC (COMP:).
6.16.4.1.1 From Disk-On-Key (XD:)
Procedure to load from Disk-On-Key:
a. login with Maintenance profile;
b. connect the Disk-On-Key in the USB port on the cabinet door or in port X3 of the
SMP board. On the TP the following message is displayed ---- 30888-02 device
XD: active;
c. select SETUP - ReloadSw - C4G sub-page;
d. select device XD: ;
e. select type of loading:
e.1 Full - which loads the system software and the mechanical Data File; copy the
appropriate files and run an automatic Restart to make the newly installed basic
software operational. Press OK (F5).
e.1.1 After the Restart, select: loading device, robot family, presence of any auxiliary
axes, type of robot to be installed and related serial number;
e.1.2 select the required language;
e.1.3 select the motion programming mode (modal, nodal) which should be modal
except for a particular user customization wich means, in this context, reserved
(the word nodal used here, is in no way related to mode WITH $PAR).
TP4i - Setup Page
6-156
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
e.1.4 Press the Save key. The system saves in the .C4G file.
e.1.5 Upon termination, press the End key to execute the automatic Restart.
e.2 Upgrade - which loads the new software without changing the system
configuration. Press OK (F5).
e.3 Data File - to change the system configuration without updating the operating
system. Press OK (F5).
f. Reset the Latched alarm if necessary (see par. 6.9.3 Latched on page 6-61).
6.16.4.1.2 From PC (COMP:)
In this modality, before choosing the SETUP - ReloadSw - C4G sub-page, the
described below operations are to be carried out, from step a. to step e. .
a. Run the WinC4G program on PC; WinC4G has to be connected and the transfer
folder has to be correctly set to search for the files to be updated. To do this,
proceed with the following steps:
b. on PC select the file transfer directory, (where the software to be loaded is
installed);
c. set the Control address (for example 172.22.178.41) in the TCP-IP box. This
address can be read from the Teach Pendant Home Page;
d. connect to the Controller with Maintenance Login profile, from the File Connect
menu (or icon);
e. to complete the procedure, use the Teach Pendant as described in the previous
par. 6.16.4.1.1 From Disk-On-Key (XD:) on page 6-155, selecting the loading
device COMP: instead of XD:.
6.16.4.2 TP
On this sub-page it is possible to reload the Teach Pendant software, basic software
(BSP) and/or User Interface software (see Fig. 6.167).
WARNING: selecting the 'FULL' and 'DATA FILE' items, the .C4G file is deleted,
and, after Restart, the system is put to minimum configuration.
If it is intended to recover some data in the .C4G file (for example I/O
configuration), before pressing OK (F5), execute a CONFIGURE SAVE
CATEGORY of the required category, specifying a file name as the destination for
the saving (for example IO_CONF.C4G).
After loading the new software version, execute a CONFIGURE LOAD CATEGORY
of the previously saved file (IO_CONF.C4G in the previous example).
For further information regarding these two functions, see chapter System
Commands, paragraphs CONFIGURE LOAD CATEGORY and CONFIGURE SAVE
CATEGORY.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-157
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.167 - TP software loading
6.16.4.2.1 Teach Pendant BSP loading
The procedure to load the Teach Pendant BSP is the following:
a. select this sub-page (SETUP - ReloadSw - TP);
b. select the loading device:
if the Teach Pendant is TP4i, select
XD: to load from disk-on-key,
COMP: to load from WinC4G;
if the Teach Pendant is WiTP (wired or wireless), select TX: ;
c. select the Reload button of the TP BSP, and press ENTER to confirm;
d. answer OK to the question asking if the user wishes to reload the BSP of the TP.
After loading, a message is displayed to inform the user that the BSP has been
successfully copied;
e. DO NOT RE-START FOR WiTP, regardless of whether with or without wire, to
avoid problems occurrence. If the Teach Pendant is a TP4i it has to be restarted;
the user must confirm the restart command as soon as the system asks for that;
f. load the TP software, as described in the following paragraph User Interface
software loading (SW TP).
A special case is the loading of versions prior to the TP4i software (see
par. 6.16.4.2.3 Loading of TP4i software versions prior to the currently installed
on page 6-158).
First of all, check the Teach Pendant BSP version on the Service Page - Sysinfo
(SCV), selecting the line BSP of TP Version. If the version is different from either
2.0/18 (for TP4i) or 1.5 (for WiTP), execute the following procedure for Teach
Pendant BSP loading; otherwise directly go to the User Interface software loading
(SW TP) procedure.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-158
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
6.16.4.2.2 User Interface software loading (SW TP)
The procedure to load the TP User Interface software is as follows:
a. select SETUP - ReloadSw - TP sub-page;
b. select the loading device:
XD: to load from disk-on-key,
COMP: to load from WinC4G;
c. select the Reload button of the TP software and press ENTER to confirm;
d. answer OK (F5) to the question asking if the user wishes to reload the TP software.
After loading, a message is displayed to inform the user that the TP software has
been successfully copied;
e. restart the Teach Pendant in the following ways:
e.1 if the Teach Pendant is a WiTP Wireless:
e.1.1 unpair the WiTP
e.1.2 restart the WiTP by means of the "Restart TP" button;
e.1.3 shut down the C4G by means of the Controller Main Switch (this is only needed
when BSP has been reloaded).
e.2 If the Teach Pendant is a wired WiTP:
e.2.1 if the BSP has been previously reloaded, shut down the C4G by means of the
Controller Main Switch, otherwise answer affirmatively to the question about
restarting the Teach Pendant.
e.3 If the Teach Pendant is a TP4i:
e.3.1 answer affirmatively to the question about restarting the Teach Pendant;
f. check, in the Service Page - Sysinfo (SCV), that the version of the TP SW, the TP
BSP and the C4G software have been properly updated.
6.16.4.2.3 Loading of TP4i software versions prior to the currently installed
This procedure, only necessary for TP4i, is used when a Teach Pendant has to be
replaced with another that has a more recent software version.
It is assumed that the BSP version is 2.0/18 or later (otherwise, use the standard
procedure).
Execute the following steps:
a. Make sure that in the LD:\TP4i folder there is the libtp4i.so file (otherwise copy it
from the Files Page or WinC4G, taking it from the delivered software version);
b. select C4G (LD:/TP4i) as the device from which the software is to be loaded (see
Fig. 6.168)
TP4i - Setup Page
6-159
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.168 - Previous version loading (sw TP4i)
c. select the Reload button of the Teach Pendant SW (see Fig. 6.167) and press
ENTER to confirm.
d. Confirm the operation with OK (F5).
e. After loading, a message informs the user that the procedure has been
successfully completed.
f. Restart the Teach Pendant (see par. 6.2.1.6 Keys to restart the Teach Pendant on
page 6-14).
6.16.5 Backup
The following setup commands are provided for these functions:
Backup
Restore
Device
6.16.5.1 Backup
Displays the Savesets actually defined in the system in order to carry out the backup
operation (see Fig. 6.169).
If the user wishes to change one or more fields of the sub-pages, the procedure is as
follows:
For the WiTP (both Wired or Wireless versions) use procedures Teach Pendant
BSP loading and User Interface software loading (SW TP) procedures.
This environment is used to set the SaveSet and the Device for the Backup /
Restore operations.
DO NOT EXECUTE THESE OPERATIONS: to do so it is necessary to access Files
Page, command Utility (F4), Backup (FUB).
TP4i - Setup Page
6-160
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
a. press the down arrow to move the focus on the first field
b. press ENTER to open the field in editing mode
c. insert the changes
d. confirm with ENTER or cancel by pressing ESC.
Fig. 6.169 - Backup command
Every Saveset holds information concerning device, files and sub-directories to be
copied towards the default backup device (which is displayed in the sub-page Device).
The user can define some new Savesets, up to 8 as a maximum.
The value displayed in the IDX column is the index of the predefined variable
$BACKUP_SET[ ].
The string displayed in the NAME column includes the name of the Saveset that is put
forward by the system during the backing-up operation carried out in the Files Page,
sub-page Utility (F4) - Backup (FUB).
Profile is the content of this Saveset.
6.16.5.2 Restore
Displays the Savesets actually defined in the system in order to carry out the restore
operations (see Fig. 6.170).
See NOTE regarding the entry number in the UD: root directory.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-161
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.170 - Restore command
Every Saveset holds information concerning device, files and sub-directories to be
restored. The device available for the file reading is displayed in the sub-page Device.
The user can define some new Savesets, up to 8 as a maximum.
The value displayed in the IDX column is the index of the predefined variable
$RESTORE_SET[ ].
The string displayed in the NAME column indicates the Saveset name that is presented
by the system during the restore operation performed on the Files Page, sub-page Utility
(F4) - Restore (FUR).
Profile indicates the content of this Saveset.
6.16.5.3 Device
Allows to set the default device required for the backup/restore operations.
6.16.6 Controller (CCS)
On this sub-page the following operations can be carried out:
Viewing/modification of the ID of the Control Unit associated to the Teach Pendant
(field C4G ID in Fig. 6.171) stored in the pre-defined variable
$CUSTOM_CNTRL_ID. The user can change it by moving the focus onto this field,
pressing ENTER, typing the required string and confirming with ENTER;
set the name of the startup program that is run every time there is a system restart
(STARTUP field in Fig. 6.171). This program may be holdable or not holdable; the
running of a holdable program only start when the START pushbutton is
pressed. The name of the startup program is stored in the pre-defined variable
$STARTUP To edit it, the user has to move the focus onto this field and press
ENTER; after typing in the required string it has to be confirmed with ENTER.
If no program name is sent with this command, the contents of variable
$STARTUP are reset, therefore, if the setting is saved, no startup program will be
run when the Controller is activated
TP4i - Setup Page
6-162
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.171 - Controller sub-page
In this sub-page it is also possible to change the date and time of the Control Unit
(Hour:, Min: and Sec: fields for TIME and Day:, Month: and Year: fields for DATE
in Fig. 6.171).
6.16.7 FB_TOOL
Open the configuration environment of the Fieldbuses, written in VP2 language. For
further information see Chap.12. - FB_TOOL program for configuration of Fieldbus.
6.16.8 Install (FUI)
Allows to install the specified application. The user has to select the device, where the
files of the software to be installed must be read (Combobox) as well as the name of the
wanted application. The path of the search directory is stored in the preset variable
$FUI_DIRS.
Fig. 6.172 - Install command
6.16.9 IO_TOOL
Open the configuration environment of the I/Os, written in VP2 language. For further
information see Chap.13.1 - IO_TOOL Program - I/O Configuration in VP2.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-163
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
6.16.10 Login
Displays the logins actually defined in the system.
Fig. 6.173 - Login sub-page
The following information is displayed:
Username
Startup - flag indicating whether this login is used or not upon the system restart.
Profile - user profile associated with this username
The following functions are available in the Bottom Menu:
User
Startup (CCLS)
6.16.10.1 User
Allows to add / cancel the configured users. To run these commands, the user must be
logged with Administrator profile.
The available commands are:
Add (CCLA)
Adds a User (Login). The operator is asked to specify Username, Password and
User Identifier (User ID). Besides, the user profile has to be defined. In case the
user does not give the requested information, the default privileges are used.
Delete (CCLD)
Cancels the selected user from the system database.
6.16.10.2 Startup (CCLS)
Enables/disables the selected login to be used upon the system restart.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-164
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.174 - Setup of start Login
To get this change active, the command Save the configuration file (CSA) must be
given. Only one startup Login at a time is possible.
6.16.11 Network
Relates to the network settings active on the Control Unit. The following data is
displayed:
network address (IP) for the SMP board
mask for local network (subnet mask), for the SMP board
gateway on SMP
MAC address of the Ethernet ports on the system
network address (IP) on SMP backplane
network address (IP) on MCP backplane
gateway inlet on MCP board
Fig. 6.175 - Network sub-page
The user is allows to modify only the two first fields. The other fields are read-only. To
make any changes effective, run the Save the configuration file (CSA) command.
Through the checkbox (highlighted in red in Fig. 6.176), the user can specify whether
the DHCP function is to be used to automatically receive the IP address, the subnet
TP4i - Setup Page
6-165
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
mask and the gateway address, from a DHCP server.
Fig. 6.176 - Use of the DHCP function - 1
To use this function, the user has to move the focus on the checkbox and confirm with
ENTER (see Fig. 6.177).
Fig. 6.177 - Use of the DHCP function - 2
In this case all the fields become read-only, therefore the network settings are managed
by the system only.
System with SMP+ board
If the system has an SMP+ board (and therefore there is NO MCP board), the data
shown in the Network sub-page is only that shown in Fig. 6.178.
Warning: changes made on the DHCP selection are only executed at the next
restart
The use of the DHCP function requires:
a DHCP server on the network
sufficient rights to authorise the change of the network addresses.
Further information is contained in the Guide to Integration, Safeties, I/O,
Communications manual, paragraph Configuration with dynamic address (DHCP).
TP4i - Setup Page
6-166
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.178 - Network sub-page for system with SMP+
The checkbox for the activation of the DHCP function is shown in Fig. 6.179 (highlighted
in red); the use is the same as described previously in Fig. 6.176 and Fig. 6.177.
Fig. 6.179 - System with SMP+ - use of DHCP function
6.16.12 ToolFrame
Activates the TO_SET program to manage the tools.
TO_SET is an environment to calculate the $TOOL, $UFRAME, $AUX_BASE values of
the positioners and to configure the Conveyor, in a guided and automatic mode. It also
offers the user the possibility to run the payload identification procedure (optional feature
- please refer to Motion Programming manual) for a correct definition of the load
parameters used.
Warning: changes made on the DHCP selection are only executed at the next
restart.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-167
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
Fig. 6.180 - TO_SET program
Not already installed, use the Install (FUI) sub-page, selecting the TO_SET application
and confirm with Install (F5).
After installation the system informs the user that the TO_SET program is correctly
installed and can be used.
For further details concerning the use of this program, please refer to Motion
Programming manual, Chapter TO-SET PROGRAM- TOOL MANAGEMENT.
TP4i - Setup Page
6-168
HS-0-C4E-USO_62.fm
00/0708
TP4i - Service Page
6-169
HS-0-C4E-USO_63.fm
00/0708
6.17 Service Page
This User Page is the starting point for the service operations.
It consists of 3 sub-pages, which may be selected through their corresponding labels:
Execute (E)
Sysinfo (SCV)
Arm
Multiarm
After positioning on the desired sub-page label, to enter the fields just press the arrow
down key. To change sub-page, press ESC to return to the labels and select the one
that is needed.
For the WiTP wireless there is a further sub-page that indicates the current state of the
battery:
Battery.
6.17.1 Execute (E)
Fig. 6.181 - Execute command
This sub-page is used to execute an instruction without the need to have it in the body
of the PDL2 program. The following fields can be edited:
Execute
is a Combobox to contain the instruction to be executed. Usually this instruction is
to have a brief duration, however it is possible to insert more than one instruction
in this field, separating them by ';' (semi colon).
To use the Execute command, proceed as follows:
a. first of all, move the focus onto this field and confirm with ENTER
b. press the down arrow key: a list of predefined choices is displayed, to facilitate the
insertion of the instructions
c. select and confirm with ENTER.
The instruction to be executed can also be keyed in directly
d. to activate the proper execution, press (briefly) the Exec softkey (F1) in the Bottom
Menu (see Fig. 6.181).
TP4i - Service Page
6-170
HS-0-C4E-USO_63.fm
00/0708
During execution the '^C' softkey (F2) is available in the Bottom Menu that
interrupts the execution if necessary.
Context Program
an option that can be activated by the Exec key (F1) (press for a long time).
If a Context Program is specified (name of a PDL2 program), the pre-defined
variable will belong to it. If this program is not active, an error will be generated.
If instead no Context Program is specified, the predefined variables of the program
stack type will be those of the virtual EXECUTE program, that are only valid for the
duration of the command.
6.17.2 Sysinfo (SCV)
Fig. 6.182 - Sysinfo sub-page
Displays the following information:
version of the system software
name of the configuration file
robot model associated to each arm and number of joints present
indicates whether the MCP board is the standard one or the one for Seam-Tracking
startup file ($STARTUP)
system identifier (SYS_ID)
TCP/IP address
software hour meter that indicates the number of operating hours in DRIVE ON
identification of the PC currently connected to the System via WinC4G
users performing the login from the Teach Pendant and from WINC4G
default arm
default communication gateway
system default devices for the backup and for the PDL2
It is only specified when the instruction to be executed contains references to
predefined variables (preceded by $, like $CYCLE) belonging to the Program
Stack category (see PDL2 Programming Language manual, chapter
PREDEFINED VARIABLES LIST).
TP4i - Service Page
6-171
HS-0-C4E-USO_63.fm
00/0708
DSA-MPC software version (for each of the Arms)
type of DSA-DSP (for each of the Arms)
DSA-DSP version (for each of the Arms)
C4G operating system version (BSP)
information regarding the latest system software compilation
CAN bus software version
SWIM software version (slot 1 and slot 2)
Fieldbus software version (slot 1 and slot 2)
TP hardware version
TP operating system version (BSP)
TP User Interface Software version
any options
list of foreseen optional services, with indication whether each of them is enabled
or not
motor data for each Axis of each Arm.
6.17.3 Arm
Fig. 6.183 - Arm sub-page
Includes some information much more specialized than those included in the Basic
sub-page of Motion Page, as far as the various axes are concerned (see Fig. 6.183).
The read-only data in question are:
Currents - indicates the current of the axis motor (expressed in ampere)
Follow - indicates the error between the current position of the axis and the wanted
one, expressed in motor revolutions
Revolution - indicates the current position of the axis, expressed in motor
revolutions
Temperat. - indicates the temperature of the motor relating to that axis, as a
percentage of the ratio between the mean value absorbed and the motor
characteristics. More precisely, the formula used to calculate this datum uses the
square of the motor mean current draw and the square of the characteristic of the
motor itself.
TP4i - Service Page
6-172
HS-0-C4E-USO_63.fm
00/0708
Joints Pos. - indicates the current joints position of each axis of the current arm
The Controller mean drawn power is also displayed in KVA.
6.17.4 Multiarm
Fig. 6.184 - Multiarm sub-page
Displays the current position (in joints and in Cartesian mode) of all the axes of all the
arms on the system.
The maximum number of axes that can be displayed is 40.
6.17.5 Battery
This sub-page is only present if the Teach Pendant is WiTP wireless type.
Fig. 6.185 - Battery sub-page
It contains the following information:
Charge status - the possible states are:
Critical
Critical - being charged
Low
Low - being charged
High
High - being charged.
TP4i - Service Page
6-173
HS-0-C4E-USO_63.fm
00/0708
Charge remaining - percentage compared to full charge.
Life - estimate of remaining duration of battery, in hours and minutes; when the
battery is being charged , the field will always show "Not available".
Voltage - battery voltage in Volts.
Current - instantaneous input current (battery being charged) or in output (battery
supplying TP) of the battery, in milliamperes (mA). It is always an absolute value.
Complete available charge/discharge cycles for which maximum battery efficiency
is guaranteed ; over this threshold performance could be less.
Complete performed charge cycles.
If there is a battery malfunction the text " Status not valid" may be displayed.
When the charge drops below 8%, the system asks the user to place the WiTP in
the docking station, otherwise it is no longer possible to use it.
TP4i - Service Page
6-174
HS-0-C4E-USO_63.fm
00/0708
TP4i - TP-INT Page
6-175
HS-0-C4E-USO_64.fm
00/0708
6.18 TP-INT Page
This page emulates the user interface of the WinC4G terminal on the Teach Pendant.
Access to the TP-INT page takes place pressing the key related to the corresponding
softkey in the Left Menu.
Fig. 6.186 - TP-INT Page
Exiting the TP-INT page is obtained by pressing the TP-INT softkey again.
This paragraph describes the following topics in details:
Navigation among commands
Virtual Keyboard
6.18.1 Navigation among commands
To navigate among commands, two methods may be followed:
a. by using the cursor keys to select the wanted command, then pressing ENTER to
confirm or ESC to return back (without execution of the selected command); or
b. by pressing the function key 'F1-F8' (displayed in the Bottom Menu) and then using
the cursor keys to select the wanted key Fx, and finally confirming with ENTER;
ESC closes the menu F1-F8.
The F1-F8 menu indispensable to navigate from the TP4i in the EDITOR
environments (Filer Edit, Program Edit and Memory Debug), however advised to
use only from WinC4G environment.
To navigate in the system menus, the use of the method described at item a. is
recommended.
For the meaning and use of commands, please refer to the Chap. System
Commands.
TP4i - TP-INT Page
6-176
HS-0-C4E-USO_64.fm
00/0708
6.18.2 Virtual Keyboard
The most frequently used keys are listed in the Bottom Menu (Run, ^C, SCRN, MOD).
In TP-INT environment there is a Virtual Keyboard (abbreviated in VK) that makes
available also the keys of the previous Programming Terminal Unit (PTU) that no longer
exist on the current Teach Pendant (TP4i / WiTP).
The VK-ON softkey, present in the Bottom Menu, enables the Virtual Keyboard.
Fig. 6.187 - Virtual Keyboard
The keys pertaining to the VK are vertically displayed on the right hand of the page, and
horizontally above the Bottom Menu
To navigate on the Virtual Keyboard, use the cursor keys and acknowledge with
ENTER.
As for any other sub-environment, when the Virtual Keyboard is active, the cursor
is placed over it. To act in other fields, not pertaining to the VK (as for selecting a
command, writing a text, etc.), has to be closed before pressing VK OFF.
Rec
in editing environment, it inserts a move instruction, the declaration of the corresponding
position variable that is assigned the current arm position.
Opt
to view and use the options of the selected command, where foreseen.
EZ
pressing this softkey activates/deactivates the EZ program.
Mode
switches over between CODE and DATE modes of the Edit Program.
Sel
the cursor is moved onto the window where a program is waiting for an input from the
keyboard (e.g. READ instruction).
Del
calls the Delete Line command of the program editor .
Cut
deletes the program lines that have been selected with the Mark key.
TP4i - TP-INT Page
6-177
HS-0-C4E-USO_64.fm
00/0708
Over the bottom Menu there are:
These keys provide for an additional visual information, indicating whether the
corresponding function is active or not: green light = function active,
grey light=function not active.
There are 8 keys, namely:
Fly - in the programs editing environment, enables and disables the association of
the FLY to MOVE clause picked up with the REC key
Xtnd, Jntp, Pos - allow to modify the input variable type by pressing the REC key
in program editing environments. According to the pressed key, variables of the
following types may be selected: XTNDPOS, J NTPOS or POSITION.
Circ, Lin, Jnt - allow to modify the path type in program editing and debugging
environments, for the setting of the REC key. On the following pressure on the REC
key, a CIRCULAR, LINEAR or J OINT clause is put in the MOVE instruction.
Sync - to enable or disable the use of the SYNCMOVE, in the REC key setup
(corresponds to the MemoryDebugSetupSyncEnable or
MemoryDebugSetupSyncDisable command).
Copy
in editor, the program lines previously selected with the Mark key are stored in a buffer.
Undel
calls the Undelete Line command of the program editor.
Mark
used in editor to select program lines.
Paste
in editing environment, inserts the program lines selected with Mark and Copy keys in the
current cursor position.
Srch
searches for the first insertion of a string in the program text.
S.Nxt
searches for the next insertion of the string searched for, previously set by the Srch software
key.
Scrl
interrupts/resumes the scrolling of information on the display.
Char
displays the characters menu. The characters menu has two levels: the first level is to select
a series of characters, whereas the second level is used to select a specific character. The
characters menu is active when data is being entered into the selected field.
A1 and A2
keys available for the applications.
Excl
only active in programming mode. If the axis is taken over the electric stroke-end, an error
message is displayed and the robot is set in DRIVE OFF. To exit from this situation, press
the Excl key, set the system in DRIVE ON and move the axis in the opposite direction to the
stroke-end.
TP4i - TP-INT Page
6-178
HS-0-C4E-USO_64.fm
00/0708
The pressure on any VK key causes the VK immediate closing. To use any VK key
again, first open the VK environment (VK-ON key).
Note that also pressing 'F1-F8' function key causes the immediate closing of the VK and
the cursor moving to the F1 key.
Any other operation regarding the REC key setup for the SYNCMOVE, is to be
executed by means of the MemoryDebugSetupSync command.
TP4i - Aggiunta di Pagine Utente
6-179
HS-0-C4E-USO_66.fm
00/0105
6.19 Additional User Pages
The TP4i Teach pendant software allows personalised User Pages to be added (that
use screen pages created with PDL2 programs) with the related softkey in the Left
Menu.
To use the personalised Page, the user has to produce an XML file to specify the Page
in question and to create the corresponding icon for its activation. The pre-defined name
and search path for this file are:
UD:\sys\pages.xml
The file contents are indicated in the example below.
The fixed parts that must be inserted by the user are highlighted in bold print.
Note that:
the <config>...</config> block (lines 2 to 11) may contain more than one
<page>...</page> identification block and corresponding icon definition of a new
User Page.
<name>...</name> (line 4) to indicate the name of the new User Page
<program-name>...</program-name> (line 6) to indicate the name of the PDL2
program within which the screens have been created.
<screen-id>...</screen-id> (line 7) to indicate the ID of the screen referred to:
scrn_user (default User Screen)
or other screen defined by the user; in this case it is necessary to insert the
name of a variable that contains the ID of the screen returned by the built-in
SCRN_CREATE. This variable is to be declared in the program specified as
<program-name>
<icon>...</icon> to specify the name of the file that contains the icon to be
associated to the new User Page. The default icon is userscreen.gif. If the user
wishes to have a personalised icon, the name and search path have to be
specified.
Line XML file Content
1 <?xml version="1.0"?>
2 <config>
3 <page>
4
<name>Gripsel</name>
<class>tpint.ScreenWindow</class>
5 <options>
6 <program-name>gripsel</program-name>
7 <screen-id>scrn_user</screen-id>
8 </options>
9
<icon>userscreen.gif</icon>
<preload>false</preload>
<discard>false</discard>
10 </page>
11 </config>
TP4i - Aggiunta di Pagine Utente
6-180
HS-0-C4E-USO_66.fm
00/0105
If PDL2 applications have to be used that were created for the previous C3G
Controller, also the Bottom Menu softkeys have to be reduced from 8 to 6. For
further information see the PDL2 Programming Language Manual, Chap.
TRANSITON FROM C3G TO C4G CONTROLLER.
Before using the icon of the personalised User Page, it is necessary that the
program referring to the Page is already active. It is a good practice to insert its
activation in the Startup.
System Commands
7-1
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7. SYSTEM COMMANDS
7.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the system commands available for the C4G Control Unit. The
commands described can be entered from the following interfaces:
PDL2 program - using the pre-defined SYS_CALL routine
From PC - WinC4G program, Terminal window menu
From TP - menu of commands from TPINT
The items of the commands are shown here in the most extended form, as they are seen
on the WinC4G screen page. On the other hand, on the TPINT page of the Teach
Pendant, they are shown in a short form: 4 characters for each command.
Fig. 7.1, shows the WinC4G Terminal windows and the TPINT page of the Teach
Pendant.
Fig. 7.1 - Commands window on PC (WinC4G) and on TP
(1) - TPINT page on TP4i Teach Pendanti
(2) - Terminal window on WinC4G
System Commands
7-2
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
In particular, the following are dealt with:
Commands sent from menu on TP (TPINT page) or from WinC4G (Terminal
window)
Program commands sent via SYS_CALL
Wildcard use
Command options
Viewing and NOPAGE option
Access to the control (login)
Directories
Description of commands
HELPIO program
Types of files available in the System.
7.2 Commands sent from menu on TP (TPINT
page) or from WinC4G (Terminal window)
The following subjects are dealt with in this paragraph:
Command selection
Typing-in the characters
Call-up of recently used parameters (History)
7.2.1 Command selection
The commands can be entered using one of these methods:
using the cursor keys. Enter it using the ENTER key.
After the selection, another menu of commands or a brief description of the
command is displayed over the selected item.
The selected command is only executed after the ENTER key has been pressed.
On the PC screen and on the teach pendant, disabled or protected menu
commands are shown with the first letter in low case, whereas all the commands
that are available have the first letter in high case.
Press the function keys (F1 - F8) on the PC keyboard or on the teach pendant to
execute the corresponding command. For example, if F2 is pressed, DISPLAY
from the main menu will be executed.
Press the key that corresponds to the first letter of the command, only for
WinC4G Terminal. For example, if D is pressed, DISPLAY from the main menu will
be executed.
In some cases, after a command has been sent, prompts, called parameters, are shown
that require additional information. For example, PROGRAM GO displays a prompt that
requires a program name. To enter the parameters in answer to a prompt, use the
alphanumeric keys of the PC keyboard or the characters menu of the teach pendant.
Furthermore, for many commands it is possible to select the parameter (file, program,
I/O point, etc.) from a list supplied by the system after the HELP key near the prompt is
System Commands
7-3
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
pressed; to scroll the list use the cursor keys and the ENTER key Besides which, for
some commands, if the HELP key is pressed following the introduction of one or more
characters after the prompt, only the parameters with the initials of the characters
introduced will be displayed.
To exit from the HELP window without selecting any parameters, press ESC.
To return to the command prompt, press SHIFT ESC to return to the main menu.
For files, there is also the possibility to select the name of the device to be specified
together with the file name by pressing ENTER at <device>that is displayed as the first
item on the list of the possible files.
The answer to a parameter prompt is to be typed before pressing ENTER. To move the
cursor on the answer line, the arrow keys can be used to the left or to the right. The
delete key removes the character situated immediately before the cursor, whereas the
arrow keys to the left and to the right if pressed together with SHIFT move the cursor to
the start and to the end of the answer.
7.2.2 Typing-in the characters
On PC use the keyboard.
On the TP4i Teach Pendant there is an alphanumeric keypad that functions in the same
way as one of the most common standard mobile telephone keypads. In detail:
The bottom right key (to the right of '0') serves to set the mode to use the keypad.
Each time this key is pressed, the mode is changed, in sequence, between
alphabetical, high case (ABC)
alphabetical, low case (abc)
numerical (123)
The current mode is shown on the status bar of the TP display (last field on the
right).
Special characters are activated by pressing '1'; the only special characters that
can be typed directly are the '-' symbol (bottom left key) and the '.' symbol (bottom
right key).
7.2.3 Call-up of recently used parameters (History)
The upward arrow key is used to call the last ten parameters entered for the command
category they belong to. This avoids rewriting the same parameter for several
commands.
7.3 Program commands sent via SYS_CALL
The predefined PDL2 SYS_CALL routine can be used to execute most of the commands
described in this chapter from the program, except those which require direct interaction
with the user (for example, Program Edit). For the same reason the requests for
confirmation are not displayed and the default answer for that command is assumed.
The codes that are shown in brackets, next to the title of each command, are those to
be specified as first parameter for the SYS_CALL.
The parameters required by each command have to be specified as STRINGS (for
example: SYS_CALL ('ML' , 'pippo') ).
System Commands
7-4
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.3.1 Option /4 to view in the 40 columns
The /4 option serves to format the displays so that the information shown does not
exceed a width of 40 columns. This option is only available from SYS_CALL and only
for those commands that, if not forwarded by teach pendant, display data that covers
over 40 columns.
This option can be very useful in SYS_CALL to the TP-INT Page.
7.4 Wildcard use
The wildcard (*) can be used in a parameter to substitute the beginning, the end of the
entire parameter. It permits one command to act on several items.
For example, MEMORY LOAD (ML) requires a program name parameter that can be
substituted with a wildcard as shown below:
ML * loads all the programs
ML arc* loads all the programs that start with arc
For each parameter only one wildcard can be used (*arc* generates error). This
character cannot be inserted inside the parameter (a*rc generates error).
7.5 Command options
For some commands there are options available. If a command has options, the code
'(OPT)' is shown after the prompt that requires the last parameter. The slash (/)
separates the option from the command. For example:
FC/C -- FILER COPY with option CONFIRM
On TP-INT, when the Virtual Keyboard is activated and the OPT key pressed, the
options are displayed that are associated to the command; on PC, this is obtained by
pressing the slash key (/).
To navigate among the various options, use the cursor keys, then select with the ENTER
key.
If an option that is already displayed is requested, the option is removed. For further
information about the options, see the descriptions of the individual commands.
7.6 Viewing and NOPAGE option
The commands to view information direct the output by default to the scrolling window
of the system screen on the device used; therefore:
for the TP-INT page, to the window identified by LUN_TP
for the WinC4G Terminal, to the window identified by LUN_CRT
For further details regarding the syntax of this instruction, see the PDL2
Programming Language manual.
System Commands
7-5
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
for SYS_CALL, to the window identified by LUN_TP (unless the predefined
$SYS_CALL_OUT variable is changed, a copy of which exists for every PDL2
program)
When the information called by a certain command occupies more than one page, the
display is held at the end of the page until the user presses a key (no matter which) to
show the next page of information. From WinC4G the lines can be scrolled one at a time
by pressing the space bar of the PC keyboard.
Commands that show more than one page of information have the /NOPAGE option
used to scroll all the information without pauses at the end of the pages.
7.7 Access to the control (login)
To obtain access to the C4G Control Unit from a certain device (Teach Pendant or
WinC4G program from PC), a Login is necessary, otherwise the only commands
available are those for displays.
A detailed description of the operations needed is contained in Chap. Access to the
Control (LOGIN/LOGOUT).
7.8 Directories
The directories (up to 8 depth levels) are managed on the C4G Controller. The
specification of the directory and the associated device follow the MS-DOS syntax:
<name of device>:\<directory>For example: UD:\directory\filename
The directory and the default device used by the commands are set in a field of the
$DFT_DV variable.
The default directory can be changed using the command Filer Utility Directory Change
that only has effect on the device that the command is sent from (teach pendant or
Personal Computer with WinC4G active).
Therefore it could happen that on the teach pendant a certain default directory is set,
and on the PC it is another, and so the Help shows two different directory contents (on
the two different devices).
7.9 Description of commands
The menus are collected in the following branches:
CONFIGURE branch
DISPLAY branch
EXECUTE command (E)
FILER branch
MEMORY branch
PROGRAM branch
SET branch
UTILITY branch
System Commands
7-6
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
The following table lists all the commands available, in alphabetical order. The string of
characters that, in most cases, is shown in brackets, is the code of the first parameter
to be used if the corresponding command is to be sent from SYS_CALL .
If the code is not displayed, the command cannot be called from SYS_CALL.
Command and code for the first SYS_CALL parameter
CONFIGURE ARM CALIBRATE (CAC)
CONFIGURE ARM RETENTIVE MEMORY LOAD (CARL)
CONFIGURE ARM RETENTIVE MEMORY SAVE (CARS)
CONFIGURE ARM TURN_SET (CAT)
CONFIGURE ARM VIEW_CAL (CAV)
CONFIGURE CONTROLLER LOGIN ADD (CCLA)
CONFIGURE CONTROLLER LOGIN DELETE (CCLD)
CONFIGURE CONTROLLER LOGIN STARTUP (CCLS)
CONFIGURE CONTROLLER LOGIN VIEW (CCLV)
CONFIGURE CONTROLLER RESTART COLD (CCRC)
CONFIGURE CONTROLLER RESTART RELOAD DATAFILE (CCRRD)
CONFIGURE CONTROLLER RESTART RELOAD FULL (CCRRF)
CONFIGURE CONTROLLER RESTART RELOAD UPGRADE (CCRRU)
CONFIGURE CONTROLLER RESTART SHUTDOWN (CCRS)
CONFIGURE CONTROLLER STARTUP (CCS)
CONFIGURE CONTROLLER TIME (CCT)
CONFIGURE CONTROLLER VIEW (CCV)
CONFIGURE LOAD ALL (CLA)
CONFIGURE LOAD CATEGORY
CONFIGURE LOAD CATEGORY ARM (CLCA)
CONFIGURE LOAD CATEGORY CONTROLLER (CLCC)
CONFIGURE LOAD CATEGORY DSA (CLCD)
CONFIGURE LOAD CATEGORY IO (CLCI)
CONFIGURE LOAD CATEGORY RETENTIVE (CLCR)
CONFIGURE SAVE ALL (CSA)
CONFIGURE SAVE CATEGORY
CONFIGURE SAVE CATEGORY ARM (CSCA)
CONFIGURE SAVE CATEGORY CONTROLLER (CSCC)
CONFIGURE SAVE CATEGORY DSA (CSCD)
CONFIGURE SAVE CATEGORY IO (CSCI)
CONFIGURE SAVE CATEGORY RETENTIVE (CSCR)
DISPLAY ARM CURRENTS (DAC)
DISPLAY ARM DATA (DAD)
System Commands
7-7
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
DISPLAY ARM FOLLOWING (DAF)
DISPLAY ARM J OINT (DAJ )
DISPLAY ARM POSITION (DAP)
DISPLAY ARM REVOLUTIONS (DAR)
DISPLAY ARM STATUS (DAS)
DISPLAY ARM TEMPERATURE (DAT)
DISPLAY CLOSE ARM (DCA)
DISPLAY CLOSE INPUT (DCI)
DISPLAY CLOSE OUTPUT (DCO)
DISPLAY CLOSE PROGRAM (DCP)
DISPLAY CLOSE RESPLC (DCR)
DISPLAY CLOSE SELECT (DCS)
DISPLAY CLOSE TOTAL (DCT)
DISPLAY CLOSE VARS (DCV)
DISPLAY FIELDBUS MASTER (DFM)
DISPLAY FIELDBUS SLAVE (DFS)
DISPLAY INPUT AIN (DIA)
DISPLAY INPUT DIN (DID)
DISPLAY INPUT FMI (DIF)
DISPLAY INPUT GIN (DIG)
DISPLAY INPUT IN (DII)
DISPLAY INPUT SYSTEM (DIS)
DISPLAY OUTPUT AOUT (DOA)
DISPLAY OUTPUT DOUT (DOD)
DISPLAY OUTPUT FMO (DOF)
DISPLAY OUTPUT GOUT (DOG)
DISPLAY OUTPUT OUT (DOO)
DISPLAY OUTPUT SYSTEM (DOS)
DISPLAY PROGRAM (DP)
DISPLAY RESPLC (DR)
DISPLAY VARS BIT (DVB)
DISPLAY VARS WORD (DVW)
EXECUTE command (E)
FILER COPY (FC)
FILER DELETE (FD)
Command and code for the first SYS_CALL parameter
System Commands
7-8
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
FILER EDIT
FILER PRINT (FP)
FILER RENAME (FR)
FILER TRANSLATE (FT)
FILER UTILITY ATTRIBUTE HIDDEN (FUAH)
FILER UTILITY ATTRIBUTE READONLY (FUAR)
FILER UTILITY ATTRIBUTE SYSTEM (FUAS)
FILER UTILITY BACKUP (FUB)
FILER UTILITY RESTORE (FUR)
FILER UTILITY COMPRESS DELETE (FUCD)
FILER UTILITY COMPRESS EXTRACT (FUCE)
FILER UTILITY COMPRESS MAKE (FUCM)
FILER UTILITY COMPRESS VIEW (FUCV)
FILER UTILITY DIRECTORY CHANGE (FUDC)
FILER UTILITY DIRECTORY DELETE (FUDD)
FILER UTILITY DIRECTORY MAKE (FUDM)
FILER UTILITY INSTALL (FUI)
FILER UTILITY SEARCH (FUS)
FILER VIEW (FV)
MEMORY DEBUG
MEMORY ERASE ALL (MEA)
MEMORY ERASE PROGRAM (MEP)
MEMORY ERASE VARIABLE(MEV)
MEMORY LOAD (ML)
MEMORY SAVE(MS)
MEMORY TEACH
MEMORY VIEW PROGRAM (MVP)
MEMORY VIEW TYPE (MVT)
MEMORY VIEW VARIABLE (MVV)
PROGRAM ACTIVATE (PA)
Command and code for the first SYS_CALL parameter
System Commands
7-9
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
PROGRAM DEACTIVATE (PD)
PROGRAM EDIT
PROGRAM GO (PG)
PROGRAM ResPLC ACTIVATE (PRA)
PROGRAM ResPLC DEACTIVATE (PRD)
PROGRAM ResPLC RESTORE (PRR)
PROGRAM ResPLC UTILITY PROJ DIR (PRUP)
PROGRAM ResPLC UTILITY SAVE (PRUS)
PROGRAM ResPLC UTILITY UNLOAD (PRUU)
PROGRAM ResPLC UTILITY VIEW (PRUV)
PROGRAM STATE BYPASS (PSB)
PROGRAM STATE PAUSE (PSP)
PROGRAM STATE UNPAUSE (PSU)
PROGRAM TEST BREAK INSERT (PTBI)
PROGRAM TEST BREAK PURGE (PTBP)
PROGRAM TEST BREAK VIEW (PTBV)
PROGRAM TEST PROFILE ENABLE (PTPE)
PROGRAM TEST PROFILE DISABLE (PTPD)
PROGRAM TEST PROFILE RESET (PTPR)
PROGRAM TEST PROFILE VIEW (PTPV)
PROGRAM TEST STEP CYCLE (PTSC)
PROGRAM TEST STEP DISABLE (PTSD)
PROGRAM TEST STEP FLY (PTSF)
PROGRAM TEST STEP MOVE (PTSM)
PROGRAM TEST STEP ROUTINE (PTSR)
PROGRAM TEST STEP STATEMENT (PTSS)
PROGRAM TEST STEP VIEW (PTSV)
PROGRAM VIEW (PV)
SET ARM DISABLE (SAD)
SET ARM ENABLE (SAE)
SET ARM GEN_OVR (SAG)
SET ARM NOSTROKE(SAN)
SET ARM SIMULATE (SAS)
SET ARM TP_MAIN (SAT)
SET ARM UNSIMULATE
Command and code for the first SYS_CALL parameter
System Commands
7-10
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
SET CNTRL KEY_LOCK (SCK)
SET CNTRL LANGUAGE ENGLISH (SCLE)
SET CNTRL LANGUAGE FRENCH (SCLF)
SET CNTRL LANGUAGE GERMAN (SCLG)
SET CNTRL LANGUAGE ITALIAN (SCLI)
SET CNTRL LANGUAGE PORTOG (SCLP)
SET CNTRL LANGUAGE SPANISH (SCLS)
SET CNTRL LANGUAGE TURKISH (SCLT)
SET CONTROLLER VIEW (SCV)
SET CONTROLLER WIN_CLEAR (SCW)
SET INPUT FORCE AIN (SIFA)
SET INPUT FORCE DIN (SIFD)
SET INPUT FORCE FMI (SIFF)
SET INPUT FORCE GIN (SIFG)
SET INPUT FORCE IN (SIFI)
SET INPUT FORCE TOTAL (SIFT)
SET INPUT NOTSIMULATE AIN (SINA)
SET INPUT NOTSIMULATE DIN (SIND)
SET INPUT NOTSIMULATE FMI (SINF)
SET INPUT NOTSIMULATE IN (SINI)
SET INPUT NOTSIMULATE TOTAL (SINT)
SET INPUT SIMULATE AIN (SISA)
SET INPUT SIMULATE DIN (SISD)
SET INPUT SIMULATE FMI (SISF)
SET INPUT SIMULATE IN (SISI)
SET INPUT SIMULATE TOTAL (SIST)
SET INPUT UNFORCE AIN (SIUA)
SET INPUT UNFORCE DIN (SIUD)
SET INPUT UNFORCE FMI (SIUF)
SET INPUT UNFORCE GIN (SIUG)
SET INPUT UNFORCE IN (SIUI)
SET INPUT UNFORCE TOTAL (SIUT)
SET INPUT VIEW AIN (SIVA)
SET INPUT VIEW DIN (SIVD)
Command and code for the first SYS_CALL parameter
System Commands
7-11
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
SET INPUT VIEW FMI (SIVF)
SET INPUT VIEW GIN (SIVG)
SET INPUT VIEW IN (SIVI)
SET INPUT VIEW SYSTEM (SIVS)
SET LOGIN (SL)
SET OUTPUT FORCE AOUT (SOFA)
SET OUTPUT FORCE DOUT (SOFD)
SET OUTPUT FORCE FMO (SOFF)
SET OUTPUT FORCE GOUT (SOFG)
SET OUTPUT FORCE OUT (SOFO)
SET OUTPUT NOTSIMULATE AOUT (SONA)
SET OUTPUT NOTSIMULATE DOUT (SOND)
SET OUTPUT NOTSIMULATE FMO (SONF)
SET OUTPUT NOTSIMULATE GOUT (SONG)
SET OUTPUT NOTSIMULATE OUT (SONO)
SET OUTPUT NOTSIMULATE TOTAL (SONT)
SET OUTPUT SIMULATE AOUT (SOSA)
SET OUTPUT SIMULATE DOUT (SOSD)
SET OUTPUT SIMULATE FMO (SOSF)
SET OUTPUT SIMULATE GOUT (SOSG)
SET OUTPUT SIMULATE OUT (SOSO)
SET OUTPUT SIMULATE TOTAL (SOST)
SET OUTPUT UNFORCE AOUT (SOUA)
SET OUTPUT UNFORCE DOUT (SOUD)
SET OUTPUT UNFORCE FMO (SOUF)
SET OUTPUT UNFORCE GOUT (SOUG)
SET OUTPUT UNFORCE OUT (SOUO)
SET OUTPUT UNFORCE TOTAL (SOUT)
SET OUTPUT VIEW AOUT (SOVA)
SET OUTPUT VIEW DOUT (SOVD)
SET OUTPUT VIEW FMO (SOVF)
SET OUTPUT VIEW GOUT (SOVG)
SET OUTPUT VIEW OUT (SOVO)
SET OUTPUT VIEW SYSTEM (SOVS)
UTILITY APPLICATION (UA)
Command and code for the first SYS_CALL parameter
System Commands
7-12
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
UTILITY COMMUNICN DISMOUNT (UCD)
UTILITY COMMUNICN MOUNT C4G_Int (UCMC)
UTILITY COMMUNICN MOUNT Modem (UCMM)
UTILITY COMMUNICN MOUNT 3964R (UCM3)
UTILITY COMMUNICN PORT_CHAR (UCP)
UTILITY COMMUNICATION REMOTE ACCEPT (UCRA)
UTILITY COMMUNICATION REMOTE CONNECT (UCRC)
UTILITY COMMUNICATION REMOTE DISCONNECT (UCRD)
UTILITY COMMUNICATION SET_DEF (UCS)
UTILITY COMMUNICATION VIEW (UCV)
UTILITY LOG ACTION (ULA)
UTILITY LOG ERROR (ULE)
UTILITY LOG LATCH ACKNOWLEDGE (ULLA)
UTILITY LOG LATCH VIEW (ULLV)
Command and code for the first SYS_CALL parameter
System Commands
7-13
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.1 CONFIGURE branch
A description of these subjects follows:
Arm menu
Cntrler Login menu
Cntrler Restart menu
Load menu
Save menu
7.9.1.1 Arm menu
The ARM menu displays a menu of commands to configure the arm.
7.9.1.1.1 CONFIGURE ARM CALIBRATE (CAC)
Runs a calibration procedure on the whole arm or on specific axes of the arm. Before
the command is sent, the arm must be placed in calibration position. If the arm number
is not specified, the default arm indicated on the prompt is used, whereas the number of
the axis must always be specified. To indicate a complete arm, use the wildcard (*).
This command is only allowed in PROGR state by Service user profile.
The system has to be in PROG status and the drives must be on. The calibration data
is automatically saved in NVRAM, in the configuration file
(<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G) and in the calibration file
<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>_CAL<arm_num>.PDL.
Options: /Learn stores the current robot position as the user calibration
position ($CAL_USER).
The axis number is asked for, so as to allow the learning of the
position ($CAL_USER) axis by axis.
/Nosave disables the automatic saving of the configuration file,
the calibration file and the calibration data in the NVRAM
memory;
/User for the user calibration position the system uses that learnt
or assigned previously ($CAL_USER).
Syntax: CAC <arm_num><axis_num>
CAC/L <arm_num><axis_num>
CAC/N <arm_num><axis_num>
CAC/U <arm_num><axis_num>
7.9.1.1.2 CONFIGURE ARM RETENTIVE MEMORY LOAD (CARL)
Loads the data into memory that relates to the arm (calibrated axes mask) and to the
separate axes (length of axes, calibration values and calibration constants) contained in
the NVRAM retentive memory of the controller and automatically updates the
configuration file (<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G) and the calibration file
(<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>_CAL<arm_num>.PDL).
This command is only allowed in PROGR or AUTO-T state by Maintenance or Service
user profile.
Options: /Loadfile loads the data relating to the axes from the calibration
System Commands
7-14
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
file and automatically saves it in the configuration file and in the
NVRAM memory. The command creates .COD file with the same
name as the calibration file (<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>
_CAL<arm_num>.PDL) and executes it.
/Nofile disables the automatic saving of the calibration and
configuration files.
Syntax: CARL <arm_num>
CARL/L <arm_num>
CARL/N <arm_num>
7.9.1.1.3 CONFIGURE ARM RETENTIVE MEMORY SAVE (CARS)
SAVE command stores the data regarding the axes from the Controller memory to the
NVRAM memory and automatically updates the configuration file
<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G and the ASCII calibration file
<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>_CAL<arm_num>.PDL.
This command is allowed by Maintenance or Service user profiles.
Options: /Nofile disables the automatic saving of the data in the calibration
and configuration files.
Syntax: CARS <arm_num>
CARS/N <arm_num>
7.9.1.1.4 CONFIGURE ARM TURN_SET (CAT)
Sets the counting of the encoder turns in the movement software. Before entering the
command, the arm must be placed in calibration position (within an encoder dial turn).
This command is useful if the pre-set is lost, for example following a motor revolutions
reading error.
If the arm number is not specified, the default arm is used, whereas the number of the
axis must always be specified. To indicate all the arm axes, use the wildcard (*).
To run this command the system must be in PROG status and power to the drives must
be on.
Options: /User uses the user calibration position previously learnt or
assigned.
Syntax: CAT <arm_num> <axis_num>
CAT/A <arm_num> <axis_num>
CAT/U <arm_num> <axis_num>
7.9.1.1.5 CONFIGURE ARM VIEW_CAL (CAV)
Displays the calibration constants.
Options: /4 Useful from SYS_CALL to TP-INT Page
(see Option /4 to view in the 40 columns)
Syntax: CAV <arm_num>
CAV/4 <arm_num>
System Commands
7-15
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.1.2 Cntrler Login menu
This menu allows operation on the controller database relating to the login profiles that
can be used on the system.
7.9.1.2.1 CONFIGURE CONTROLLER LOGIN ADD (CCLA)
Adds a Login to the system database. A user identification, the Username and Password
have to be specified. It is advised to always specify, using the options associated to the
command, the required user profile. Otherwise a default profile will be assigned with a
restricted number of operations enabled.
This command is only allowed to a user who has the Admin profile.
Options: /Administ assigns the Administrator level to the login definition
/Maintain assigns the Maintenance level to the login definition
/Programmr assigns the Programmer level to the login definition
/Service assigns the Service level to the login definition
/Technology allows access to some functions of the application
installed, as a function to the application itself. See the
application manual for further details.
Syntax: CCLA <UserID><Username><Password><PasswordAgain>
CCLA/Administ <UserID><Username><Password><PasswordAgain>
CCLA/Maintain <UserID><Username><Password><PasswordAgain>
CCLA/Programmr <UserID><Username><Password><PasswordAgain>
CCLA/Service <UserID><Username><Password><PasswordAgain>
7.9.1.2.2 CONFIGURE CONTROLLER LOGIN DELETE (CCLD)
Deletes the user specified as parameter from the Controller database.
This command is only allowed to a user who has the Admin profile.
Syntax: CCLD <Username>
7.9.1.2.3 CONFIGURE CONTROLLER LOGIN STARTUP (CCLS)
Is to be used to have access to the control after a restart (Restart).
This command is only allowed to Programmer, Maintenance and Service users.
Options: /Reset allows the deletion of the login to be used at the start of
the Control. To make this deletion effective, use ConfigureSave
(All or Category Controller)
Syntax: CCLS <UserID> <Password>
CCLS/R <UserID> <Password>
7.9.1.2.4 CONFIGURE CONTROLLER LOGIN VIEW (CCLV)
Displays the Logins that are currently defined in the system. The information given is:
Username, the number of active Logins with that Username, and the associated access
rights.
Syntax: CCLV
System Commands
7-16
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.1.3 Cntrler Restart menu
This menu allows the Controller to be restarted in different modes without cutting out the
power supply.
A program can be run before the Restart command is completed.
To do this, enter the name of the program to be run in the predefined $RESTART
variable. The $RESTART_MODE variable contains instead a number that indicates the
restart mode in which this program will be considered : 0 for Cold, 1 for shutdown, 2 for
reload; if the variable is equal to -1, the program will not be run.
The system waits until the program remains deactivated for a maximum time indicated
in the variable $TUNE[4].
7.9.1.3.1 CONFIGURE CONTROLLER RESTART COLD (CCRC)
Restarts the system software and clears the memory. It is very useful if the system has
been altered by the user. the activation of the command is preceded by the display of a
confirm prompt. After the command has been executed the system I/Os ($SDIN [n] /
$SDOUT [n]) are updated to the current situation. For the user I/Os ($DIN [n]/ $DOUT
[n]), the output status is reset and the inputs are updated to the current system situation.
The PDL2 holdable/non holdable programs are deactivated and deleted from the
execution memory.
Syntax: CCRC
7.9.1.3.2 CONFIGURE CONTROLLER RESTART RELOAD
Restarts and reloads the system software. The command is very useful to update the
system software to a new version. The activation of the command is preceded by the
display of a confirm prompt. It is necessary to have the software of the control, stored
on CD-ROM or on Disk-on-key, to download to the Controller. If it is on CD-ROM, it is
necessary to connect to the Controller with the WINC4G program. Access is for a
Service and Maintenance type user profile.
The individual commands to load the software are described below; to have further
details on the complete software loading procedure, see the chapter SYSTEM
SOFTWARE UPDATING in the C4G Control Unit Maintenance Manual.
7.9.1.3.3 CONFIGURE CONTROLLER RESTART RELOAD DATAFILE (CCRRD)
Assigns the values in the machine characterization file
(<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.PDL) to the system variable in the execution memory,
copying and running the SETUP1.PDL program. It also runs a saving of the
configuration file <$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G.
Syntax: CCRRD
7.9.1.3.4 CONFIGURE CONTROLLER RESTART RELOAD FULL (CCRRF)
Loads the system software and the machine characterization file
(<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.PDL), copying and running the INITIAL.PDL program.
Syntax: CCRRF
System Commands
7-17
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.1.3.5 CONFIGURE CONTROLLER RESTART RELOAD UPGRADE (CCRRU)
Updates the system software, copying and running the SETUP0.PDL program.
Syntax: CCRRU
7.9.1.3.6 CONFIGURE CONTROLLER RESTART SHUTDOWN (CCRS)
Before cutting out the main switch of the Controller this command can be entered for the
explicit saving of data that is otherwise automatically saved by the system if there is a
voltage drop. This avoids using the battery to power the system while saving the data,
thus lengthening the battery life. The command is useful for those who usually shut
down the control at set times (for example at the end of the day).
Syntax: CCRS
7.9.1.4 CONFIGURE CONTROLLER STARTUP (CCS)
Sets the name of the program that is run automatically at every controller restart. This
program, referred to as "startup", may be either holdable or non holdable type; the
execution of a holdable program only starts when the START button is pressed.
Startup program name is stored in the $STARTUP variable. If this command is sent
without specifying the name of the program, the $STARTUP variable is assigned a null
string.
Syntax: CCS <program_name>
7.9.1.5 CONFIGURE CONTROLLER TIME (CCT)
Sets the time (HH:MM:SS) and the date (DD-MM-YY) according to the specified
parameters. The month is indicated with a numeric value (1-12). This command can be
used by a user with maintenance and service profile.
Syntax: CCT <hour> <date>
Example: CCT 13:00:00 01-01-97 13hours (1 p.m.) of J anuary 1st
7.9.1.6 CONFIGURE CONTROLLER VIEW (CCV)
Displays:
the system software version
the arrangement of the hardware boards
the configuration of the CAN network (identification string, nodes present, software
version)
total number of arms
type of machine and number of joints for each arm
the flag indicating whether the arm is offset
information, such as software version and type of interfacing (Master, Slave)
regarding field networks (Profibus, DeviceNet and Interbus)
information regarding the SWIM board (number of boards, software version) only
if present in the Controller rack
System Commands
7-18
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
name of configuration file;
name of electric gripper, if present, and the arm/axis it is associated to;
state of the Controller local memory where the system file is installed (UD: and
relevant sub-directories)
date and time.
The screen page is the same that appears when the control is switched on.
Options: /4 Useful from SYS_CALL to TP-INT Page
(see Option /4 to view in the 40 columns)
Syntax: CCV
7.9.1.7 Load menu
7.9.1.7.1 CONFIGURE LOAD ALL (CLA)
Assigns to the predefined variables in memory the values stored in a configuration file
that may be the default file, <$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G, or another file specified
in the associated parameter.
If no parameter is specified, the values will be read from the
<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G file and assigned to the predefined variables in
memory.
The system is to be in PROGR state with the drives off. The user profile can only be
Maintenance and Service.
From SYS_CALL the parameter 'CL', that previously corresponded to ConfigureLoad, is
interpreted as 'CLA' (to maintain the compatibility with the old PDL2 programs written on
the C3G controller).
Options: /Rules - $C4G_RULES, manual PDL2 Programming
Language, chap. Predefined Variables List -
Syntax: CLA <file_name>
CLA/R <file_name> <rules>
7.9.1.7.2 CONFIGURE LOAD CATEGORY
Assigns the values stored in the configuration file (<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G)
or in the file specified as parameter to this command and previously created through a
CONFIGURE SAVE CATEGORY to the predefined variable belonging to the category
indicated. The file, if specified, is searched for in the currently selected directory.
Otherwise the search is made in the system directory (UD:\SYS). The variables that do
not belong to the indicated category are ignored.
Syntax: CLCx <filename> --where x is the Load Category ,
System Commands
7-19
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
,
CONFIGURE LOAD CATEGORY ARM (CLCA)
Load the variables that have Arm as Load Category. See previous note regarding
MINOR CATEGORY.
Options:
/Auxiliary
/Calibrate
/Collision
/Configure
/Conveyor
/Chain
/Rules - $C4G_RULES, manual PDL2 Programming
Language, chap. Predefined Variables List -
/Sensor
Syntax: CLCA <file_name>
CONFIGURE LOAD CATEGORY CONTROLLER (CLCC)
Loads the variables that have Cntrl as the Load Category. See previous note regarding
MINOR CATEGORY.
Options:
/Conveyor
/Environ
/Flow
/Parameter
/Rules - $C4G_RULES, manual PDL2 Programming
Language, chap. Predefined Variables List -
/Shared
/Unique
/Vars
Syntax: CLCC <file_name>
MINOR CATEGORY
Besides the Load Category, available as COMMAND, there is a Minor Category,
available as OPTION for each of the predefined variables.
In the paragraphs that follow, for each ConfigureLoadCategory and
ConfigureSaveCategory command, the Minor Categories provided are listed.
For further information, and above all, to know whether a certain variable will be
loaded or saved sending a ConfigureLoadCategory or ConfigureSaveCategory
command, see the PDL2 Programming Language manual, chapter Predefined
Variables List, item Minor Category (minor category of Load Category) in the table
regarding the variable involved.
For example:
$SENSOR_ENBL belongs to the Arm Load Category) and to the Sensor Minor
Category. Therefore reference will be made to the ConfigureSaveCategoryArm
and ConfigureSaveCategoryArm/Sensor commands (or
ConfigureLoadCategoryArm and ConfigureLoadCategoryArm/Sensor).
System Commands
7-20
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
CONFIGURE LOAD CATEGORY DSA (CLCD)
Loads the variables that have Dsa as the Load Category. See previous note regarding
MINOR CATEGORY.
Options:
/Rules - $C4G_RULES, manual PDL2 Programming
Language, chap. Predefined Variables List -
Syntax: CLCD <file_name>
CLCD/R <file_name> <rules>
CONFIGURE LOAD CATEGORY IO (CLCI)
Loads the variables that have Input/output as the Load Category. See previous note
regarding MINOR CATEGORY.
Options:
/Applicatn
/Configure
/Fieldbus
/Hand
/Rules - $C4G_RULES, manual PDL2 Programming
Language, chap. Predefined Variables List -
/Swim
Syntax: CLCI <file_name>
CONFIGURE LOAD CATEGORY RETENTIVE (CLCR)
Loads the variables that have Retentive as the Load Category. See previous note
regarding MINOR CATEGORY.
Options:
/Rules - $C4G_RULES, manual PDL2 Programming
Language, chap. Predefined Variables List -
Syntax: CLCR <file_name>
CLCR/R <file_name> <rules>
7.9.1.8 Save menu
7.9.1.8.1 CONFIGURE SAVE ALL (CSA)
Creates a new configuration file with the predefined variable values according to the
data currently in the system memory .
The file name and extension are, by default, <$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G and
the file is saved in the UD:\SYS system directory .If another file name is specified, this
is stored by default in the current directory.
From SYS_CALL the 'CS' parameter, that in the past corresponded to ConfigureSave,
is interpreted as 'CSA' (to maintain compatibility with old PDL2 programs written on
C3G).
Syntax: CSA <file_name>
System Commands
7-21
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.1.8.2 CONFIGURE SAVE CATEGORY
To save in a file the stored values of predefined variables belonging to the indicated
category.
The user may need to:
Create a file containing ONLY the values of variables of the indicated category.
This file will be used for partial loading of the values in the memory (CONFIGURE
LOAD CATEGORY) or it will be copied on several controls to unify certain
initialisations. The name of the file is to be specified in the command and it is to be
different to the name of the <$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G configuration file.
The directory, if not specified, will be the one currently selected on the device the
command is sent from and the file extension will be .C4G.
Save data of the category indicated in the global configuration file
(<$BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID>.C4G). In this case only the section containing the
variables of the pre-selected category will be updated; the values of the other
variables in the file will remain unaltered. To do this, the command must be sent
without specifying the name of the file.
Syntax: CSCx <filename> --where x is the Load Category
,
CONFIGURE SAVE CATEGORY ARM (CSCA)
Saves the values of the variables that have Arm as the Load Category. See previous
note regarding MINOR CATEGORY.
Options:
/Auxiliary
/Calibrate
/Collision
/Configure
/Conveyor
/Chain
/Rules - $C4G_RULES, manual PDL2 Programming
Language, chap. Predefined Variables List -
/Sensor
Syntax: CSCA <file_name>
CONFIGURE SAVE CATEGORY CONTROLLER (CSCC)
Saves the values of the variables that have Cntrl as the Load Category. See previous
note regarding MINOR CATEGORY.
Options:
See MINOR CATEGORY note.
The ConfigureSaveCategory command, if executed on a .C4G file created with a
software version prior to that loaded, is allowed, providing the variables of the
category involved have not changed in either number or size.
System Commands
7-22
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
/Conveyor
/Environ
/Flow
/Parameter
/Rules - $C4G_RULES, manual PDL2 Programming
Language, chap. Predefined Variables List -
/Shared
/Unique
/Vars
Syntax: CSCC <file_name>
CONFIGURE SAVE CATEGORY DSA (CSCD)
Saves the values of the variables that have Dsa as the Load Category. See previous
note regarding MINOR CATEGORY.
Options:
/Rules - $C4G_RULES, manual PDL2 Programming
Language, chap. Predefined Variables List -
Syntax: CSCD <file_name>
CSCD/R <file_name> <rules>
CONFIGURE SAVE CATEGORY IO (CSCI)
Saves the values of the variables that have Input/output as the Load Category. See
previous note regarding MINOR CATEGORY.
Options:
/Applicatn
/Configure
/Fieldbus
/Hand
/Rules - $C4G_RULES, manual PDL2 Programming
Language, chap. Predefined Variables List -
/Swim
Syntax: CSCI <file_name>
CONFIGURE SAVE CATEGORY RETENTIVE (CSCR)
Saves the values of the variables that have Retentive as the Load Category. See
previous note regarding MINOR CATEGORY.
Opzioni:
/Rules - $C4G_RULES, manual PDL2 Programming
Language, chap. Predefined Variables List -
Syntax: CSCR <file_name>
CSCR/R <file_name> <rules>
7.9.2 DISPLAY branch
The DISPLAY branch displays a menu of commands that open viewing windows with
System Commands
7-23
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
information that is continually updated until the DisplayClose command is sent.
Several windows can be opened at the same time.
In the case of SYS_CALL the DISPLAY commands direct the display by default to the
Terminal window shown by the WINC4G program (if connected). If instead it is desired
to direct the output to the TPINT, the /T option has to be specified, that is only available
from SYS_CALL and not from the commands menu.
A description of these subjects follows:
Arm menu
Close menu
Fieldbus menu
Input menu
Output menu
Vars menu
7.9.2.1 Arm menu
The ARM menu contains a menu of commands for the display of information regarding
the specified arm.
7.9.2.1.1 DISPLAY ARM CURRENTS (DAC)
Displays the currents of the axis motors in amperes.
Syntax: DAC <arm_num>
7.9.2.1.2 DISPLAY ARM DATA (DAD)
Displays the data regarding the arm interpolator.
Syntax: DAD <arm_num>
7.9.2.1.3 DISPLAY ARM FOLLOWING (DAF)
Displays the axis following errors in bit units.
Syntax: DAF <arm_num>
7.9.2.1.4 DISPLAY ARM JOINT (DAJ)
Displays the current position target of each axis, in degrees.
Syntax: DAJ <arm_num>
7.9.2.1.5 DISPLAY ARM POSITION (DAP)
Displays the current Cartesian position target, indicating the x,y,z location, the Eulero
angles and the configuration string; the values of the joints (in mm, for translating axes,
or in degrees for rotating axes) of the auxiliary component in a system with auxiliary
axes.
Syntax: DAP <arm_num>
System Commands
7-24
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.2.1.6 DISPLAY ARM REVOLUTIONS (DAR)
Displays the number of motor revolutions.
Syntax: DAR <arm_num>
7.9.2.1.7 DISPLAY ARM STATUS (DAS)
Displays the current status of the arm (calibrated, in lock, etc.), the number of joints that
form the arm, the co-operative movement and the state of the auxiliary axes (connected,
enabled, disabled). It is also indicated whether the robot is along the programmed path
(On Trajectory).
Syntax: DAS <arm_num>
7.9.2.1.8 DISPLAY ARM TEMPERATURE (DAT)
Displays the temperatures of the axis motors as percentage of the maximum
temperature allowed for the motor.
Syntax: DAT <arm_num>
7.9.2.2 Close menu
The CLOSE menu removes the DISPLAY windows from the screen.
7.9.2.2.1 DISPLAY CLOSE ARM (DCA)
Closes all the windows opened with the DISPLAY ARM command.
Syntax: DCA
7.9.2.2.2 DISPLAY CLOSE INPUT (DCI)
Closes all the windows relating to the inputs.
Syntax: DCI
7.9.2.2.3 DISPLAY CLOSE OUTPUT (DCO)
Closes all the windows relating to the outputs.
Syntax: DCO
7.9.2.2.4 DISPLAY CLOSE PROGRAM (DCP)
Closes the window related to the active PDL2 programs.
Syntax: DCP
7.9.2.2.5 DISPLAY CLOSE RESPLC (DCR)
Closes the DISPLAY window related to the PLC environment.
Syntax: DCR
System Commands
7-25
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.2.2.6 DISPLAY CLOSE SELECT (DCS)
Allows the operator to select the display window to be closed.
Syntax: DCS
7.9.2.2.7 DISPLAY CLOSE TOTAL (DCT)
Closes all the windows opened by DISPLAY commands.
Syntax: DCT
7.9.2.2.8 DISPLAY CLOSE VARS (DCV)
Closes all the windows opened with the DISPLAY VAR commands.
Syntax: DCV
7.9.2.3 Fieldbus menu
The FIELDBUS menu displays the state of the Fieldbus Master and Slave boards.
In detail, for each board:
NOCNFG: indicates that the board is not configured
RUNNING: indicates that the communication is active
STOPPED: indicates that the communication is not active
If there is no Fieldbus board, no Display is opened.
7.9.2.3.1 DISPLAY FIELDBUS MASTER (DFM)
Displays the information regarding the boards declared as MASTER regarding the field
buses supported (Interbus, Profibus and DeviceNet).
Syntax: DFM
7.9.2.3.2 DISPLAY FIELDBUS SLAVE (DFS)
Displays the information regarding the boards declared as SLAVE regarding the field
buses supported (Interbus, Profibus and DeviceNet).
Syntax: DFS
7.9.2.4 Input menu
With the INPUT menu the state of the inputs can be viewed, both those defined by the
user and those of the system .
A string set by the user can be associated to the displayed inputs, that is shown as HELP
information (from TPINT on TP4i or on PTU) pressing the SEL key and moving to the
right and to the left with the cursor along the variable values. To assign the descriptions
to the input points, use the HELPIO program contained in the Controller software
CD-ROM. The system input HELP strings are always present. The HELP program can
be seen in the last paragraph of this chapter.
System Commands
7-26
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.2.4.1 DISPLAY INPUT AIN (DIA)
Displays the values of the analog inputs defined by the user ($AIN), in decimal format.
If the value is forced, it is shown in red instead of blue on the WinC4G screen, whereas
on the TPINT page of the TP4i it is shown in negative.
Several indexes can be specified in the parameter for the command: to indicate different
indexes, use dashes (-) to separate them; to indicate an interval between indexes, use
two dots (..).
Syntax: DIA <string_of_numbers>
Example: DIA 1
DIA 1- 2 - 4..7
7.9.2.4.2 DISPLAY INPUT DIN (DID)
Displays the values of the digital inputs defined by the user ($DIN), where 1 =TRUE and
0 =FALSE. If one of these values is forced, an F (forced to false) or a T (forced to
true) is shown instead of 0 or 1.
If a number of input is typed, a series of digital inputs is displayed.
Syntax: DID
Example: DID 1
7.9.2.4.3 DISPLAY INPUT FMI (DIF)
Displays the values of flexible multiple inputs ($FMI) defined by the user, in hexadecimal
format.
Several indexes can be specified in the parameter for the command: to indicate different
indexes, use dashes (-) to separate them; to indicate an interval between indexes, use
two dots (..).
Syntax: DIF <indexes>
Example: DIF 1- 2 - 4..7
7.9.2.4.4 DISPLAY INPUT GIN (DIG)
Displays the values of groups of inputs defined by the user ($GIN) as decimal values. If
the value is forced, it is displayed in red on the WinC4G screen, instead of in blue,
whereas on the TPINT page of TP4i it is shown in negative.
Syntax: DIG
7.9.2.4.5 DISPLAY INPUT IN (DII)
Displays the values of the privileged digital inputs defined by the user ($IN), where 1 =
TRUE and 0 =FALSE.If one of these values is forced, an F (forced to false) or a T
(forced to true) is shown instead of 0 or 1.
If a number of input is typed, a series of digital inputs is displayed.
Syntax: DII
Example: DII 1
System Commands
7-27
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.2.4.6 DISPLAY INPUT SYSTEM (DIS)
Displays the digital inputs defined in the system ($SDIN). By pressing the SEL key direct
access is obtained to the display window, with a help associated to each separate bit.
To move with the cursor along the bits use the LH and RH arrow keys, to change module
use the UP and DOWN arrow keys. By pressing the SEL key on the selected input a
help can be obtained that describes the significance of the bit.
Syntax: DIS
7.9.2.5 Output menu
The OUTPUT menu displays the state of the outputs defined by the user and of the
system.
A string set by the user can be associated to the displayed outputs, that is shown as
HELP information (from TPINT on TP4i or on PTU) pressing the SEL key and moving to
the right and to the left with the cursor along the variable values. To assign the
descriptions to the output points, use the HELPIO program contained in the Controller
software CD-ROM. The system output HELP strings are always present. The HELPIO
program program can be seen in the last paragraph of this chapter.
7.9.2.5.1 DISPLAY OUTPUT AOUT (DOA)
Displays the values of the analog outputs ($AOUT), in decimal format. Forced values,
are shown in red on the WinC4G screen, and in negative on the TPINT page of the TP4i.
Several indexes can be specified in the parameter for the command: to indicate different
indexes, use dashes (-) to separate them; to indicate an interval between indexes, use
two dots (..).
Syntax: DOA <string_of_numbers>
Example: DOA 17
DOA 17-18-25..27
7.9.2.5.2 DISPLAY OUTPUT DOUT (DOD)
Displays the values of the digital outputs defined by the user ($DOUT), where 1 =TRUE
and 0 =FALSE. If one of these values is forced, an F (forced to false) or a T (forced
to true) is displayed instead of 0 or 1.
When a number of output is typed, a set of digital outputs is displayed.
Syntax: DOD
Example: DOD 17
7.9.2.5.3 DISPLAY OUTPUT FMO (DOF)
Displays the values of flexible multiple outputs ($FMO) defined by the user, in
hexadecimal format.
Several indexes can be specified in the parameter for the command: to indicate different
indexes, use dashes (-) to separate them; to indicate an interval between indexes, use
two dots (..).
Syntax: DOF <indexes>
System Commands
7-28
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
Example: DOF 17-18-25..27
7.9.2.5.4 DISPLAY OUTPUT GOUT (DOG)
Displays the values of the output groups ($GOUT) defined by the user, in decimal
format. Forced values are shown in red on the WinC4G screen, and in negative on the
TPINT page of theTP4i.
Syntax: DOG
7.9.2.5.5 DISPLAY OUTPUT OUT (DOO)
Displays the values of the privileged digital outputs defined by the user ($OUT), where
1 =TRUE and 0 =FALSE. If one of these values is forced, an F (forced to false) or a
T (forced to true) is shown, instead of 0 or 1. If a number of output is typed a series of
digital outputs is displayed.
Syntax: DOO
Example: DOO 17
7.9.2.5.6 DISPLAY OUTPUT SYSTEM (DOS)
Displays the digital outputs defined by the system ($SDOUT). By pressing the SEL key,
direct access is obtained to the display window, with a help associated to each separate bit.
To move with the cursor along the bits, use the LH and RH arrow keys, to change the
module use the UP and DOWN arrow keys. By pressing the SEL key on a selected output
a help is obtained that describes the significance of the bit.
Syntax: DOS
7.9.2.6 DISPLAY PROGRAM (DP)
PROGRAM displays information about the active PDL2 programs.
A particular program name can be specified. It is also possible to insert a wildcard in the
program name. If no parameter is given, the information is displayed regarding all the
activated programs.
The information shown is the same as for the PROGRAM VIEW (PV) command.
Options: /Full will display also all the programs with protected code, that
are not usually displayed.
Syntax: DP <program_name>
7.9.2.7 DISPLAY RESPLC (DR)
The information related to PLC resource are shown:
Resource name
Resource identifier
Cycle time (ms)
Number of performed cycles
Time for executing the latest cycle
System Commands
7-29
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
Maximum time for executing a scanning
State of the resource (Running, Stop, etc.)
Syntax: DR
7.9.2.8 Vars menu
The VARS menu contains the commands to display current values of the memory arrays
commonly used by programs that use the $BIT and $WORD variables.
A string set by the user can be associated to the displayed variables, that is shown as
HELP information (from TPINT on TP4i or on PTU) pressing the SEL key and moving to
the right and to the left with the cursor along the variable values. To assign the
descriptions to the output points, use the HELPIO program contained in the Controller
software CD-ROM. The HELP strings are always active on the TP4i, in the 'Description'
column.
7.9.2.8.1 DISPLAY VARS BIT (DVB)
Displays $BIT, where 1 =TRUE and 0 =FALSE, according to 2 different displays:
Several indexes can be specified in the parameter for the command:
To indicate different indexes, separate them with dashes (-);
The maximum number of $BIT that can be displayed at the same time is 4 (for the
Teach Pendant) and 11 (for WINC4G).
For example: "DISPLAY VAR BIT" "1-35-100" displays the value of $BIT[1],
$BIT[35] and $BIT[100].
To indicate an interval between indexes, use two dots (..).A maximum of 16 bits (on
Teach Pendant) and 32 bits (for WINC4G) can be displayed at the same time.
"DISPLAY VAR BIT" "1..15" displays all the $BIT having an index from 1 to 15.
Syntax: DVB
7.9.2.8.2 DISPLAY VARS WORD (DVW)
Displays the value of a $WORD in decimal format.
Several indexes can be specified in the parameter for the command: to indicate different
indexes, use dashes (-) to separate them; to indicate an interval between indexes, use
two dots (..).
Options: /Hex displays the data in hexadecimal format
/Binary displays the data in binary format
Syntax: DVW <string_of_numbers>
7.9.3 EXECUTE command (E)
With the EXECUTE command a PDL2 instruction can be executed from commands
level. This type of execution is also called immediate execution, because the
instructions have to be short and not locking (for example to assign a value to a
predefined variable).
The first parameter is the instruction to be executed. If the instruction refers to program
variables, the name of the program they belong to has to be specified in the second
parameter.
System Commands
7-30
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
Options: /Context is available in the prompt of the second parameter. It is
specified ONLY when the instruction contains references to
predefined variables (preceded by $, such as $CYCLE) that
belong to the "Program Stack" category (see PDL2
Programming Language Manual, chapter PREDEFINED
VARIABLES LIST); the /Context option indicates that the
predefined variable will be that of the program indicated as
second parameter.
If this option is not used, the program stack type predefined
variables will be those of the virtual EXECUTE program, that only
have life for the duration of the command. When this option is
used the program specified as parameter must be active,
otherwise an error will be generated.
Syntax: E instruction <program_name>
Example: E 'I:=10' 'pippo' - Assigns the value 10 to variable i of program
pippo. The program pippo must be loaded in memory.
E WRITE($ERROR,NL) pippo Value 0 will be shown
E/C WRITE($ERROR, NL) pippo The value of pippo
$ERROR will be shown
The following instructions cannot be used with the EXECUTE command:
WAIT
CONDITION
ENABLE CONDITION
DISABLE CONDITION
PURGE CONDITION
The program variables cannot be declared and created with this command.
The execution can be deactivated by pressing ^C.
To execute instructions that require movements, the following rules are valid:
the Robot Controller Cabinet status selector switch is to be set for programming
all movements are executed at safe reduced speed
the enabling device is to be kept pressed during the movement execution
START is to be kept pressed to maintain the movement
press HOLD to interrupt the movement (this movement can be resumed by
pressing START)
7.9.4 FILER branch
The FILER branch displays a menu of file management commands.
For most FILER commands it is necessary to indicate as parameters the file names,
devices, name and extension:
dv:file_name.ext
The name of the device can be formed by one to four characters followed by the colon
(:) symbol. Some commands are only operative with certain devices. For further details,
see the individual commands.
The filename can be from 1 to 256 characters, that may be letters, digits and subscripts
System Commands
7-31
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
(_). However, if the file is to contain a program name, the maximum size for the name is
32 characters.
The extension starts with a dot (.) and consists of three characters that can be letters,
digits and subscripts (_).
Some commands are only operative on certain devices. For details, see the individual
commands.
Besides the individual commands, the following are also described:
UTILITY ATTRIBUTE menu
Backup and Restore commands
Compressed files management commands
Directory management commands
7.9.4.1 FILER COPY (FC)
COPY command creates copies of files. No change is made to the original file.
Specify the source file and the destination file. For the extensions and the file names a
wildcard can be used.
It is advised to use FILER UTILITY BACKUP and FILER UTILITY RESTORE (instead
of FILER COPY) if all the files from the default backup device ($DFT_DV[3], usually XD:
or COMP:) are to be copied to the commands default device ($DFT_DV[2], usually UD:)
and vice-versa.
Options: /Confirm requires confirmation before the copying of each file.
/Overwrite rewrites the existing files without displaying the
confirm prompt.
Syntax: FC <source_file> <dest_file>
For a complete list of foreseen system software extensions, see par. 7.11 Types
of files available in the System on page 7-74.
NOTE
In the UD root directory : there is a limitation to the maximum number of entries
(512). This is due to the FAT-16 formatting of the compact flash.
A file name longer than 8 characters occupies more than one entry in the FAT (File
Allocation Table).
The problem does NOT exist in subdirectories, where the maximum entry limit is
higher (more than 65000).
If there is an excessive occupation of the root directory, it is advised to use file
names with a maximum of 8 characters, or to work in subdirectory.
Furthermore, it is advised to periodically delete the .BK* files in a permanent
manner.
See NOTE regarding the entry number in the UD: root directory.
System Commands
7-32
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.4.2 FILER DELETE (FD)
Removes the files from the user device.
It is asked to specify the files. For the extensions and the filenames the wildcard can be
used. If no device is specified, the default device is used.
The user is asked for confirmation before each file is deleted.
If the command is sent without the /Permanent or /Cleanup option, the files are not
permanently deleted and can therefore be recovered with the /Undelete option.
Options: /Cleanup empties the bin containing the previously deleted files
/Noconfirm does not ask the user for confirmation before
deletion.
/Permanent deletes the files permanently.
/Undelete allows the recovery of a file that has been deleted
(providing the /Permanent option has not been used when
deleting the file).
Syntax: FD <file_name>
7.9.4.3 FILER EDIT
The EDIT command calls the ASCII editor of the files. This can be used to create or to
edit ASCII files on the user disk (UD:).
A parameter is required for the filename. The wildcard cannot be used. Only the user
disk UD: can be used as device. If no extension is specified, the extension .PDL is used.
The command cannot be used if the IDE page on TP4i, the MEMORY DEBUG and
PROGRAM EDIT functions or the EZ environment are active.
This command is not allowed from SYS_CALL.
Syntax: FE <file_name>
7.9.4.4 FILER PRINT (FP)
To display the contents of a file on the screen (WInc4g Terminal or TP-INT screen page)
or on another file.
The destination device may consist of the Teach Pendant monitor or the PC, a file,
communication port or a window defined by the user. If no destination device is
specified, the device from which the command has been sent will be used.
The name of the start file is required as parameter. For the extension and file name the
asterisk can be used. If no device is specified, the default device is used ($DFT_DV[2]).
The Filer Print command is used to view the contents of binary files: .COD or .BCK
program files; .VAR or .BKV variable files; files in the system directories (.C4G
configuration files, .LBE error log files, .LBA action log files). It is assumed that all the
other files are in ASCII format.
The command is also a means to convert binary files to the corresponding ASCII format.
In the case of a Filer Print command for a .VAR file to an .LSV file or for a .COD to a
See NOTE regarding the entry number in the UD: root directory.
System Commands
7-33
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
.PDL, a back-up file is created with extension .BKL and .BKP respectively for that .LSV
file. If no destination device is specified, the file is printed on the video.
If a .COD file contains checksum errors or other damaged data and it is not possible to
recover a backup copy of the same file, with FILER PRINT the program can be
converted to an ASCII file to save in the user disk (UD:).
The ASCII file can then be edited to correct the instructions and corrupted identifiers that
are distinguished by three question-marks (???). At the end, use FILER TRANSLATE
to convert the file again to a file with .COD extension.
As from system software version 3.20, further information can be printed, using the
option /Property. Standard attributes (Property) associated to the files are the following:
drawn up by
file creation date
version
host where file was created.
Options: /Full prints a variables file without shortening the names of the
identifiers contained (variables, programs, routines and data
classes).
/List generates a listing file (.LIS) from a .COD or .BKC file. The
listing file gives the name of the program and the line number at
the side of each PDL2 instruction.
/Overwrite Overwrite rewrites the old copy of the corresponding
file without asking for confirmation of the user.
/Nopage
/Range to print the lines of a file between the serial and final line
specified as additional parameters.
/Property to print the file properties (drawn up by, date of
creation, version, device where it was created).
Syntax: FP <file_name> <dest_device>
FP/L <file_name> <dest_device>
FP/N <file_name> <dest_device>
FP/R <file_name> <dest_device> <start_line><end_line>
FP/P <file_name> <dest_device>
7.9.4.5 FILER RENAME (FR)
RENAME changes the name and/or extension of an existing file.
It is necessary to specify as parameters the original file (source) and the new file
(destination). A wildcard can be used for the extension. If no device is specified for the
source file, the default device is used. It is not possible to specify different devices for
the source file and the destination file.
If a new file already exists, before the original file is renamed, a prompt is displayed
asking for confirmation.
Renaming of a program file (.COD or .BKC) is not allowed if the new name is present as
See NOTE regarding the entry number in the UD: root directory.
System Commands
7-34
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
identifier inside the file. This type of error is only detected when the program is loaded.
Options: /Confirm displays a confirm prompt before each file is renamed.
/Overwrite rewrites the existing files without displaying any
confirm prompt.
Syntax: FR <source_file> <dest_file>
7.9.4.6 FILER TRANSLATE (FT)
TRANSLATE command converts:
a PDL2 program, from ASCII source code (.PDL) to an executable code (.COD)
and vice versa
a variables file in source ASCII format (.LSV), to a variables file in format to be
loaded on the Controller (.VAR) and vice versa.
system binary files (.C4G, .LBE, .LBA) in the corresponding ASCII format (.PDL,
.LOG, .ACT).
The name of the source code file is required. In the name of the start file the asterisk can
be used. As device it is possible to specify only the user disk UD:.
If the extension is not given, the .PDL extension is used.
If the destination file (for example .COD) already exists, the back-up copy is saved
changing the extension (for example .BKC) before the creation of the new file.
If indications or errors are found during the conversion, these are displayed in the
scrolling window and recorded in the <file_name>.ERR file.
Options: /Back converts a .COD file to a .PDL file.It is the same as the
Filer Print command of a .COD file to a .PDL.
/Confirm asks the user for confirmation before the conversion of
each file.
/List generates a listing file (.LIS) and can only be used with the
/BACK option.
/Variables converts a variables .LSV ASCII file in a .VAR file.
When used with the /BACK option, it converts a .VAR variables
file to the corresponding .LSV with ASCII format.
/Output redirects the file on another directory.
Syntax: FT <file_name>
7.9.4.7 UTILITY ATTRIBUTE menu
Contains the commands to change the file attributes. Access is allowed to
"Maintenance" or "Service" user profile.
7.9.4.7.1 FILER UTILITY ATTRIBUTE ARCHIVE (FUAA)
To set/remove the attribute archived ('a') to a file.
See NOTE regarding the entry number in the UD: root directory.
System Commands
7-35
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
Options: /Reset deletes attribute archived ('a') to the specific file.
Syntax: FUAA <file_name>
FUAA/R <file_name>
7.9.4.7.2 FILER UTILITY ATTRIBUTE HIDDEN (FUAH)
Sets the hidden attribute to a file that therefore will not be displayed on the user disk
UD:. With this attribute set, the file, if a .COD, can however be loaded in the execution
memory (Memory Load).
Options: /Reset deletes the hidden attribute.
Syntax: FUAH <file_name>
FUAH/R <file_name>
7.9.4.7.3 FILER UTILITY ATTRIBUTE READONLY (FUAR)
Sets the read only attribute to a file. When this attribute is set, the file cannot be edited
or deleted.
Options: /Reset deletes the read only attribute.
Syntax: FUAR <file_name>
FUAR/R <file_name>
7.9.4.7.4 FILER UTILITY ATTRIBUTE SYSTEM (FUAS)
Sets the system attribute for a file. When set, this attribute prevents file deletion.
Options: /Reset deletes the system attribute.
Syntax: FUAS <file_name>
FUAS/R <file_name>
7.9.4.8 Backup and Restore commands
For better understanding of the difference between a simple file copy (FilerCopy) and a
backup or restore operation appropriately organised, follow the recommendations listed
below:
always make sure that the execution memory and the UD: device are aligned
(presence or not of saved programs or data), before starting any type of backup or
restore operation; always execute a ConfigureSaveAll (before a backup) and a
ConfigureLoadAll (after a restore) to restore the same work conditions, based
on.C4G file, after a Restart;
plan periodic backups, possibly at night;
possibly use the.LST files created during the backups, when it is useful to compare
several backups with each other to see possible differences;
compress the backup in a.ZIP file. Execute the restore decompressing the.ZIP file.
If WinC4G acts as server for the Controller, the configuration of the backup and restore
operations requires that the NETx: devices are set correctly. This can be done by
entering sub-page FTP Users Configuration. The system allows definition of a
Username and a Password for the user requesting the operation, for each NETx: device,
and the base Directory for backup and restore operations. When these operations are
System Commands
7-36
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
required, the specified user has to be already defined and logged on the Controller.
The NET_C checkbox indicates that the parameters associated to it will be used to
automatically configure the different $NET_C system variables (see PDL2
Programming Language manual - chap.Predefined Variables List). Therefore it is
not necessary that the user sets them.
Fig. 7.2 - FTP Users Configuration
7.9.4.8.1 FILER UTILITY BACKUP (FUB)
Copies the files from the directory selected when executing the command to the default
backup device ($DFT_DV[3]). If no file is specified, all the files of the current directory
are copied.
System Commands
7-37
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
Options: /Saveset is used to specify a predefined saveset that indicates
where the files are to be copied from.The saveset is to be set
beforehand in an element of the predefined variable
$BACKUP_SET[1]. If, for example, $BACKUP_SET[1] is set as
set1| UD:\dir1\*.*/s, by sending the command with the /Saveset
option and parameter set1, all the files will be copied that are
contained in UD:\dir1 and the relative sub-directories.
/After copies from Controller files that are more recent than a
certain date. To specify date or count of days a sign can be
NOTES FOR BACKUP / RESTORE
As from system software version 3.20, it is possible to obtain the backup and
restore of files contained in a certain device (UD:, LD:, VD:, TD:), keeping the
original structure of the directories and selecting them according to:
a date,
whether they have already been saved in a backup or not,
whether they are newer,
whether they belong to a certain directory or saveset.
The backup can be sent to a USB key (XD: or TX:), including subdirectory, COMP:
(device WinC4G), NETx: (device client FTP), TD: .
At each backup (for example. FUB/T * NET8), a <$SYS_ID>.LST file is created on
the specified device, in the specified base directory, containing the information
related to the backup operation.
Information regarding several backups is inserted at the bottom of the file. At
each backup operation, these files are updated.
Example:
##################################################
# Backup created 05-MAY-08 16:17:00
# Backup appended 05-MAY-08 16:44:40
# Backup appended 05-MAY-08 16:48:57
# Backup appended 05-MAY-08 16:49:55
UD:\box.pdl@02-04-07 11:24:08
UD:\brac_7ax1.cod@14-03-07 14:32:48
UD:\brac_7ax1.pdl@14-03-07 14:32:44
UD:\brev_002_r2.cod@13-11-07 10:18:16
UD:\brev_002_r2.lsv@19-11-07 13:34:44
UD:\brev_002_r2.pdl@12-11-07 18:54:44
UD:\brev_002_r2.var@16-11-07 11:30:20
When a file is copied in a backup, it is " marked" by attribute a.
To be able to use these functions, there are the following options:
For Backup
/After
/Increment
/To
For Restore
/After
/From
/Newer
described further on.
System Commands
7-38
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
indicated that has the meaning of "before" or "after" the date or
count of days indicated below.
Examples:
-1 means all files before 00 of today;
-18/06/08 means files before 18/06/08;
18/06/08 means files EQUAL and AFTER that date.
/Increment copies all files that have NOT been saved in previous
backups (the system uses the 'a' attribute that indicates "file
already archived").
/To copies on a device that is not the default ($DFT_DV[3]). The
required directory can be specified on this device.
Example: FUB/T * TX:\MyBackupFolder
In this way, using a single command it is possible to execute the backup of files from
different devices or directories, files with a certain name, include the subdirectories,
exclude some files.
The following switches are also provided to set the value of $BACKUP_SET:
/A (=After) to execute the backup of created/modified files
AFTER a certain date
/U (=Unset) not to set attribute 'a' for a certain file
/I (=Incremental) to execute the backup of files that have not been
previously saved only (without 'a' attribute)
/S (=Subdirectories) to include subdirectories
/X (=eXclude) to exclude files from the backup
At present the following predefined Savesets are available:
$BACKUP_SET[ 1] : " Al l | " TTS_USER_DEV" \ \ *. */ s"
$BACKUP_SET[ 7] : " Today| " TTS_USER_DEV" *. */ s/ a0"
$BACKUP_SET[ 8] : " I nc| " TTS_USER_DEV" *. */ s/ i "
Syntax: FUB <file_name>
FUB/S <saveset_name>
Examples: FUB * XD:r026 copies in subdirectory r026 of device XD:
FUB/A0 executes backup of today's files
FUB/A-1 executes backup of files from yesterday
FUB/I * executes backup of files not yet saved in a previous
backup
FUB/T * NET8: executes backup on another device
7.9.4.8.2 FILER UTILITY RESTORE (FUR)
The RESTORE command allows to copy files from default backup device to the default
device. Both devices are part of the predefined variable $DFT_DV and can be set via
PDL2 assignment statement.
A saveset name can be indicated instead of a file name.
The saveset has to be previously specified in the corresponding sub-page
Backup of Setup page or in an element of array $BACKUP_SET (see PDL2
Programming Language manual - Chap.Predefined Variables).
System Commands
7-39
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
Options: /Configure allows the recovery of the old configuration file that,
after being copied with the extension .C4O, is loaded on the
control. This is followed by Configure Save All.
/Saveset to specify a predefined saveset that indicates where the
files are to be taken from to be copied. The saveset is to be set
beforehand in an element of the predefined $RESTORE_SET.
For example, if it is required to refer to the contents of the
$RESTORE_SET[2]variable, set to value set1|UD:\dir1\*.*, the
command is to be sent specifying the parameter as set1.
/After copies files that are more recent than a certain date. It is
useful for the restore of files from a certain date, for example,
today.
To specify date or count of days a sign can be indicated that has
the meaning of "before" or "after" the date or count of days
indicated below.
Examples:
0 signifies files as from today
-1 means all files before 00 of today;
-18/06/08 means files before 18/06/08;
18/06/08 signifies files OF THAT DATE and AFTER IT.
/From copies files that are on a device different to the default
($DFT_DV[3]). The source directory can be specified on this
device.
/Newer executes the restore of the files that are more recent than
the previous backup.
A saveset name can be indicated instead of a file name.
The following switches are also provided to set the value of $RESTORE_SET:
/A (=After) to execute restore of files that are more recent than
the date stored in LST file
/N (=Newer) to execute restore of files that are more recent than
those of.LST file
/S (=Subdirectories) to include subdirectories
/X (=eXclude) to exclude files from restore
Syntax: FUR <file_name>
FUR/S <saveset_name>
Examples: FUR executes restore of all files, from backup, and leaves the
See NOTE regarding the entry number in the UD: root directory.
See NOTES FOR BACKUP / RESTORE.
The saveset has to be previously specified in the corresponding sub-page
Restore of Setup page or in an element of array $RESTORE_SET (see PDL2
Programming Language manual - Chap.Predefined Variables).
System Commands
7-40
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
archive bit not set
FUR/A-1 executes restore of new files, up to yesterday
FUR/F executes restore from a device different to previous
backup
FUR/N executes restore of new files
FUR *.cod executes restore of all files with extension .cod
FUR/S executes restore, including subdirectories
FUR/S all executes restore of ALL savesets
7.9.4.9 Compressed files management commands
7.9.4.9.1 FILER UTILITY COMPRESS DELETE (FUCD)
Deletes a file from a compressed archive (.ZIP)
Syntax: FUCD <archive_name> <file_name>
7.9.4.9.2 FILER UTILITY COMPRESS EXTRACT (FUCE)
Extracts the files contained in a compressed archive (.ZIP). The files extracted from the
archive will have the same attributes as the source file used to create the archive.
Syntax: FUCE <archive_name> <file_name>
7.9.4.9.3 FILER UTILITY COMPRESS MAKE (FUCM)
Creates a compressed file archive (.ZIP).
Options: /after only files with a date later than that specified are included
in the archive
/before only files with a date prior to that specified are included
in the archive.
/nodirpath The specification of the directories folder is not
included in the archive.
/refresh The archive is updated with the files that have been
changed after the creation of the said archive .
/subdir Files contained in subdirectories are also included.
Syntax: FUCM <archive_name> <file_name>
7.9.4.9.4 FILER UTILITY COMPRESS VIEW (FUCV)
Lists the files contained in a compressed archive (.ZIP).
As from system software version 3.20, further information can be viewed, using
/Property option. Standard attributes (Property) associated to compressed files are the
following:
drawn up by
file creation date
version
host where file was created.
Options: /bare displays only the file name and not the other detailed
System Commands
7-41
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
information.
/Property displays file properties (drawn up by, date of creation,
version, device where it was created)
Syntax: FUCV <archive_name> <file_name>
FUCV/B <archive_name> <file_name>
FUCV/P <archive_name> <file_name>
7.9.4.10 Directory management commands
The DIRECTORY branch displays a menu of commands to operate on the structure of
the directories on the user disk UD:.
7.9.4.10.1 FILER UTILITY DIRECTORY CHANGE (FUDC)
To position on the desired directory specifying the name. For example, to have access
to the directory UD:\pippo, the following command has to be sent
FUDC pippo
starting from the root of the user disk UD:.
To return to the upper directory level, the parameter has to be specified as .. . To return
to the root the parameter has to be specified as \.
This command is not allowed from SYS_CALL. To change the directory from PDL2
program, use the predefined routine DIR_SET.
Syntax: FUDC <directory_name>
7.9.4.10.2 FILER UTILITY DIRECTORY DELETE (FUDD)
To delete the specified directory.
Options: /Noconfirm eliminates the confirm prompt
Syntax: FUDD <directory_name>
FUDD/N <directory_name>
7.9.4.10.3 FILER UTILITY DIRECTORY MAKE (FUDM)
To create a new directory starting from the current position in the directories structure.
Syntax: FUDM <directory_name>
7.9.4.11 FILER UTILITY INSTALL (FUI)
To install a certain application program executing all the necessary operations in
automatic mode: identification of the backup device to copy the files from ($DFT_DV[6]
equivalent to a default COMP:), copy of the application installation file on the user disk
UD: and its activation.
The parameter requested is the name of the application installation file (for example
IO_INST.COD for the IO Configuration application) that can also be selected by
pressing the HELP key of the prompt that requests the installation file name.
The predefined variable $FUI_DIRS contains the path of the directories where the
search is made for the application to be installed.
Syntax: FUI <installation_file>
System Commands
7-42
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
If the application is to be installed using Ethernet, first of it is necessary configure
correctly all the predefined variables with $NET_ prefix that contain the references of the
HOST where the desired application files are installed.
For further details regarding the Ethernet network configuration, see the PDL2
Programming Language Manual for the description of the predefined $NET_xx.
variables.
7.9.4.12 FILER UTILITY SEARCH (FUS)
Can be used to find a string inside a file on the user disk UD:.
To run this operation the file has to be specified and the string to be searched for. For
the file a wildcard can be used.
Syntax: FUS <file_name string_searched_for>
Example: FUS '*.COD' '$DOUT'
7.9.4.13 FILER VIEW (FV)
The VIEW command displays the contents of the disk specified (UD: by default) in the
directory currently selected on the device from which the command is sent. For each file
the date of creation, the size in bytes, the attributes, the name and the extension are
displayed.
If the file has a Readonly or System attribute this is indicated by the letter r or s
accordingly.
To know the attributes of a file from the PDL2 program, use the predefined FL_STATE
routine.
One or more files can be specified as parameter. If no parameter is specified, all the files
are listed.
At the bottom of the list of files the total number of files contained in the selected
directory is indicated, with the number of bytes occupied. Also the size, in bytes, of the
disk UD: is indicated, with the number of bytes occupied and the number that are free.
Options: /After - after a date: 1=yesterday; 0=today
/Bare shows the list of the file names, hiding the information
regarding the date and the occupation
/Deleted Displays only the deleted files (in a non-permanent
mode)
/Length displays the required list of files starting from the
smallest to the largest
/Modified shows the list of the required files starting from that
with the oldest changes to the most recent/Nopage
/Subdir displays also the list of the files in the sub-directories
/Unsort Does not set in order
Syntax: FV <file_name>
FV/D <file_name>
FV/L <file_name>
FV/M <file_name>
FV/N <file_name>
FV/S <file_name>
FV/U <file_name>
System Commands
7-43
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.5 MEMORY branch
The MEMORY branch displays the commands to manage the programs and variables
in the execution memory of the programs.
Besides the individual commands, also the following are described:
ERASE menu
VIEW menu
7.9.5.1 MEMORY DEBUG
The DEBUG command calls the editor in view mode and debugs the program, that has
to be already loaded in the execution memory.
This function allows the programmer to carry out these operations:
change the current instruction being run
change the position variables
display the program running
display interaction between programs
change parameters that control the execution, such as break-point step, insertion
of points
change a program text (only if loaded with /FULL option).
The command requires the parameter with the name of the program.
To use this command the control must not be in FATAL state.DEBUG cannot be used if
the commands FILER EDIT, PROGRAM EDIT or MEMORY TEACH are active, or if the
IDE environment is active.
This command is not allowed from SYS_CALL.
Syntax: MD <program_name>
7.9.5.2 ERASE menu
A menu of commands to delete data and programs from the memory. A wildcard can be
used for the names of the programs and the variables. Before starting to delete, all the
programs display a confirm prompt.
7.9.5.2.1 MEMORY ERASE ALL (MEA)
Deletes the code and the variable of the program specified.
Options: /Noconfirm eliminates the confirm prompt.
Syntax: MEA <program_name>
If the program has been loaded with the /FULL option, the text can also be
changed.
Programs loaded with the /PERMANENT option, only available from SYS_CALL,
cannot be used in MEMORY DEBUG.
System Commands
7-44
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.5.2.2 MEMORY ERASE PROGRAM (MEP)
Deletes the part of the code referring to the specified program. If PROGRAM VIEW is
already active, MEP cannot be used.
Options: /Noconfirm eliminates the confirm prompt.
Syntax: MEP <program_name>
7.9.5.2.3 MEMORY ERASE VARIABLE(MEV)
Deletes one or more variables of the specified program and not referred by a loaded
program. The name of the variable has to be specified as a parameter.
Options: /Noconfirm eliminates the confirm prompt.
Syntax: MEV <program_name> <variable_name>
7.9.5.3 MEMORY LOAD (ML)
The LOAD command is used to load the program codes (.COD) and the variable files
(.VAR) in the execution memory from the default storage device (UD),
It is asked to specify as parameter the name of the program to be loaded; the asterisk
can be used. If a program does not have a data file (.VAR), the variables are created in
memory during the loading.
A program cannot be loaded when it is in program ready, paused or running condition.
Options: /As, to load programs with a different data file (.VAR), specified
as a parameter. Asterisks cannot be used with this option.
/Convert converts, where possible, conflicts between data file
and the program
/Depend automatically loads the code and the variables of the
programs referred in the program code specified as parameter to
MEMORY LOAD. If the referred files are in different directories
the predefined variable $DEPEND_DIRS has to be set, that
contains the path that the Load command will use in the search.
/Full loads the entire program with the related comments and
empty lines. If a program has been loaded with the /FULL, option
it can be edited in the MEMORY DEBUG environment and
saved. The programs that have the EZ attribute in the heading
are automatically loaded with the /FULL option.
/Nosavevars disables the saving of the variables (or VAR)
when MEMORY SAVE is executed on this program. This
option is only available if used together with the internal
SYS_CALL routine.
/Variables loads only the data file of the specified program.
/Permanent loads the program code in the memory in permanent
If it is not possible to load the program due to damage to the data contained in the
.COD file, recover a backup copy of the same file (.BKC) or translate the program
into ASCII format using the FILER TRANSLATE command. Next, edit the ASCII file
obtained and correct the damaged instructions and identifiers, that are
distinguished by three question marks (" ???" ). Once the corrections have been
made, reconvert the file to a .COD file using the FILER TRANSLATE command.
System Commands
7-45
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
mode, not permitting deletion. The code uses less memory
because of the optimizing of the loading process. To recover the
memory, the control has to be restarted. This option is only
available if used together with the internal SYS_CALL routine.
Syntax: ML <program_name>
ML/A <data-file program_name>
ML/F <program_name>
7.9.5.4 MEMORY SAVE(MS)
The SAVE command saves the file containing the code or the variables of a program
that is loaded in memory.
If no option is specified, the command saves by default only the program variables,
creating a new .VAR file with the name of the program.
The directory where the file of variables is saved is (in the order indicated here below):
the one from where the .VAR was originally loaded;
if no .VAR file was loaded, the directory from where the .COD file was loaded;
if no .COD was loaded, the directory which is currently selected on the device from
where the save command is issued (programming unit, Terminal of WinC4G,
currently selected directory in case of SYS_CALL).
Issue the /Code option to save the code.
If there is already another data or program file with the same name, this will be renamed
and it will be assigned a .BKV or .BKC extension .
If data have not been loaded with /Nosavevar option, variables of this program will not
be saved.
Options: /As allows the saving of the program code or data in a file with
the name indicated in the second parameter. The asterisk cannot
be used with this option.
/Code saves the code of a program (instead of the variables),
loaded with the /FULL option and if it has been modified since
when it was loaded.
/Dirorig saves the file of variables with the same name and
directory used while loading.
/Overwrite if the file already exists in the user disk, it is replaced
without the display of the confirm prompt.
/Total (only from SYS_CALL).
Syntax: MS <program_name>
MS/A <program_name> <file_for_saving>
MS/C <program_name>
MS/D <program_name>
MS/O <program_name>
MS/T <program_name>
The MemoryViewProgram command is useful to check which file and directory
have been used to load the code and the variables of a program.
System Commands
7-46
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.5.5 MEMORY TEACH
The TEACH command is used to change the position variable values in the execution
memory and to act on the nodes of a PATH. It is only allowed from Teach Pendant.
This environment allows the operator to carry out these operations:
assign a physical position of the robot to a position variable
change position variable values
create, delete and change the data of a PATH.
It is necessary to specify as a parameter the name of the program where the variables
are to be learnt. The program must be loaded in the memory, but not active.
TEACH cannot be used at the same time as the commands PROGRAM EDIT (DATA
mode), MEMORY DEBUG or IDE environment, or if the system is in FATAL state. It is
not allowed from SYS_CALL.
Syntax: MT <program_name>
7.9.5.6 VIEW menu
VIEW menu is used to have access to a commands menu to display the contents of the
memory.
All MEMORY VIEW commands support the /NOPAGE option.
7.9.5.6.1 MEMORY VIEW PROGRAM (MVP)
Displays the information regarding the programs loaded and the data regarding the
occupation of the memory as described here below:
program name
program attributes (H=hold, N=nohold, A=attach, D=detach)
name of data file (.VAR) used for loading (- indicates not loaded from a file)
occupation of the program code (.COD) (0 indicates not loaded) and number of
lines
size of data (0 indicates not loaded) and number of variables
date and time of creation of the .COD file and the .VAR file loaded in memory for
this program. To obtain this information the /Full option is needed.
a symbol indicating whether the instructions or the variable loaded have been
changed in the memory, but not saved on the user disk. Entering this command by
WINC4G or by SYS_CALL, the symbol is displayed next to the size of the code and
the size of the variables. If instead the command is sent from the teach pendant,
also the /Full option has to be entered. The following symbols are used:
S indicates that the program code or variables have been saved
* indicates that the program code or the variables have been changed, but
not saved
- indicates that the program code or the variables have not been loaded into
the memory
P indicates that the program code has been loaded by SYS_CALL with the
/Nosavevars option.
As from system software version 3.20, further information can be viewed, using
/Property option. Standard attributes (Property) associated to the files are the following:
System Commands
7-47
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
drawn up by
file creation date
version
host where file was created.
Options: /Full displays all the information referring to the program.
/Nopage
/4 Useful from SYS_CALL to TP-INT Page (see Option /4 to view
in the 40 columns)
/Property displays program properties (drawn up by, date of
creation, version, host where it was created).
Syntax: MVP <program_name>
MVP/F <program_name>
MVP/N <program_name>
MVP/4 <program_name>
MVP/P <program_name>
7.9.5.6.2 MEMORY VIEW TYPE (MVT)
Displays the type of data (TYPE declarations in the programs loaded in memory) defined
by the user, as follows:
name of type of data (TYPE)
size in bytes
counter of references from part of programs or variables to this type of data
number of fields
type of structure (record or node)
description of the fields (information on the name and type of data of each field).
The type of data defined by the user are global in the system. However they remain in
the memory as long as there is a program loaded or referring variables of a program.
If no type of parameter is specified, the information is displayed regarding all the types
loaded. The asterisk can be used.
Options: /Nopage
Syntax: MVT <type_name>
7.9.5.6.3 MEMORY VIEW VARIABLE (MVV)
Displays the information regarding the variables loaded, as follows:
name of variable
type of variable
references counter (number of programs loaded that refer to that variable)
status (private, exported, local routine)
value.
If the name of the program or of the variable are not specified as parameters, the
information is displayed regarding all the loaded variables. A wildcard can be used
instead of the name of the variable or the program.
System Commands
7-48
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
The data class variables type STRING or ARRAY, where an asterisk was used in the
declaration and for which the real size has not been declared, are displayed with size 0.
Options: /Nopage
/Full displays the complete names of the variables, without
shortening because of their length.
Syntax: MVV <program_name> <variable>
7.9.6 PROGRAM branch
PROGRAM branch displays a menu of commands used to develop and run the
programs.
Besides the individual commands, the following are also described:
ResPLC menu
UTILITY menu
STATE menu
TEST branch
7.9.6.1 PROGRAM ACTIVATE (PA)
The effect of the ACTIVATE command depends on the holdable/non-holdable attribute
of the program specified as parameter:
Activating a holdable program, it is put in ready state. To run it, press the START button.
Activation of a non-holdable program sets it directly in running state.
If a holdable program is already active on an arm and one of the programs has the
DETACH attribute specified, a prompt will be displayed to confirm whether two or more
programs are to remain active on the same arm. If a holdable program is still active and
the DETACH attribute is specified, a message will be displayed indicating that the arm
is already DETACHED.
Before it can be activated, the program has to be loaded into the memory. The asterisk
cannot be used. The control must not be in FATAL state.
The following options, except the ARGUMENT option, can be used to activate the
program with a step other than the default step. See the indications regarding
PROGRAM TEST STEP to have the exact significance of each step.
The ARGUMENT option is used to specify a parameter to pass to the program, when it
is activated. This parameter is automatically saved in the predefined variable
$PROG_ARG, and can be used at will within the program.
Options: /Argument - to pass a parameter to a program when it is
activated
/Cycle
/Disable
/Fly
/Move
/Routine
/Statement
Syntax: PA <program_name>
System Commands
7-49
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.6.2 PROGRAM DEACTIVATE (PD)
DEACTIV command deactivates the programs that are in running, ready, paused or
unpaused status. After they have been deactivated the programs remain in the memory,
but the execution cannot continue. To do so, PROGRAM ACTIVATE has to be used.
The program to be deactivated is specified as a parameter. The asterisk can be used
inside the parameter to deactivate more than one program. The control must not be in
FATAL state.
Options: /Confirm displays the confirm prompt before the program
deactivation.
Syntax: PD <program_name>
All active programs can be deactivated by PD * or CTRL Y (^Y). CTRL Y can be emitted
regardless of the level of menu that is active and is only valid if the mode that is active
is PROG and there is no protection active.
Protected programs cannot be deactivated by this command, to deactivate them it is
necessary to use the instruction or the action of PDL2 DEACTIVATE.
7.9.6.3 PROGRAM EDIT
The EDIT command is an integrated programming environment that allows the
programmer to edit, learn points and check PDL2 programs by executing them.
The program editor uses the files containing the codes of the PDL2 programs (.COD)
stored in the user disk (UD:). The name of the program is used as parameter and it is
not possible to use a wildcard.
When it is called, the editor tries to enter by default in DATA mode. The programs can
be edited in DATA mode only when the status selector switch is set to T1 and the
program is not active.
If it is not possible to enter in DATA mode, the program is opened in CODE mode, that
allows the programmer to change the program instructions, but not to execute the
verification or the learning of variables. The CODE mode has to be used to make
changes in the declarations section of a program. In CODE mode any program can be
edited, whether activated or loaded.
This command is not allowed from SYS_CALL.
For further information see Chap. Basic procedures for Program development.
If it is not possible to load the program due to damage to the data contained in the
file, recover a backup copy of the same file or convert it to an ASCII file using the
FILER PRINT command.
The EDIT command cannot be used when the control is in FATAL state; the same
applies in cases where the FILER EDIT, MEMORY DEBUG or PROGRAM EDIT
(DATA or CODE mode) commands are active or when the IDE environment is
enabled. The use of the PROGRAM EDIT command with the MEMORY TEACH
command active is possible in CODE mode, but not in DATA mode.
System Commands
7-50
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
Options: /Code calls up the editing in CODE mode, allowing the
programmer to edit the program instructions, but it is not possible
to execute learning or program verification. CODE is to be used
to make changes in the declaration section of a program. While
in CODE mode, it is possible to edit any program, even if it is
activated or loaded.
Syntax: PE <program_name>
7.9.6.4 PROGRAM GO (PG)
GO command loads and activates the specified program. It is a combination of the
MEMORY LOAD and PROGRAM ACTIVATE commands.
If a holdable program is already active on an arm and one of the programs has the
DETACH attribute, a prompt will be displayed to confirm whether two or more programs
are to remain active on the same arm. If a holdable program is still active and the
DETACH attribute is not specified, a message will be displayed indicating that the arm
is already ATTACHED.
If the program is already active the programmer is asked if it is to be deactivated.
If the program is already loaded and the .COD file belongs to a more recent version than
that which is loaded, the operator will be asked whether the new version is to be loaded.
The asterisk cannot be used.
The command cannot be used when the control is in FATAL state.
For a holdable program, the first program move is executed at reduced speed; this also
happens for the first move after the CTRL C (^C) key has been pressed or if the
MEMORY DEBUG cursor has been moved.
This safety function that reduces the speed can be disabled by setting the opportune bits
in the predefined variable $PROG_CNFG. To establish whether a move is executed at
reduced speed, see the predefined variable $SAFE_ENBL.
The following options, except for the Update and Argument, can be used to activate the
program with a step that is not the default step. See the description of the PROGRAM
TEST STEP command.
UPDATE option disables the question to the user, if the program to be activated is
already loaded and/or active in memory and in the user disk there is a more recent
version.
The ARGUMENT option is used to specify a parameter to pass to the program, when it
is activated. This parameter is automatically saved in the predefined variable
$PROG_ARG, and can be used at will within the program.
Options: /Argument - to pass a parameter to a program when it is
activated
/Cycle
/Disable
/Fly
/Move
If it is not possible to load the program due to damage to the data contained in the
file, recover a backup copy of the same file or convert it to an ASCII file using the
FILER PRINT command. For further information regarding this procedure see the
section relating to the FILER PRINT command.
System Commands
7-51
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
/Routine
/Statement
/Update: replaces the program in the memory, even if active,
loading the new copy from the user disk and activating it.
Syntax: PG <program_name>
7.9.6.5 ResPLC menu
The ResPLC branch contains the PLC interfacing commands.
7.9.6.5.1 PROGRAM ResPLC ACTIVATE (PRA)
Starts the PLC resource execution.
Options: /Restart restarts the execution of the resource
/Single_scan executes a single resource scan
Syntax: PRA <resource_name>
7.9.6.5.2 PROGRAM ResPLC DEACTIVATE (PRD)
Disables the execution of the PLC resource.
Syntax: PRD <resource_name>
7.9.6.5.3 PROGRAM ResPLC RESTORE (PRR)
Restores the PLC resource.
Syntax: PRR <resource_name>
7.9.6.6 UTILITY menu
7.9.6.6.1 PROGRAM ResPLC UTILITY PROJDIR (PRUP)
Selects the default directory for the PLC resource.
Syntax: PRUP <directory_name>
7.9.6.6.2 PROGRAM ResPLC UTILITY SAVE (PRUS)
Saves the PLC resource.
Syntax: PRUS <resource_name>
7.9.6.6.3 PROGRAM ResPLC UTILITY UNLOAD (PRUU)
Deletes the resource of memory.
Syntax: PRUU <resource_name>
System Commands
7-52
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.6.6.4 PROGRAM ResPLC UTILITY VIEW (PRUV)
Views information about the PLC environment:
resource name
name of the project present on the controller (for example UD:\RESPLC)
project directory
resource number
dimension in bytes of the resource file
resource execution modality
cycle time.
Syntax: PRUV <resource_name>
7.9.6.7 STATE menu
The STATE menu displays the commands to change the execution state of an active
program.
7.9.6.7.1 PROGRAM STATE BYPASS (PSB)
Allows the programmer to skip the current instruction when checking the program. This
is useful if the program is suspended, for example waiting for a certain condition to be
verified. BYPASS cannot be used when the control is in FATAL state.
Syntax: PSB <program_name>
7.9.6.7.2 PROGRAM STATE PAUSE (PSP)
Changes the program state from running to paused. Both holdable and non holdable
programs are set in paused state.
The asterisk can be used in the program name. The command cannot be used when the
control is in FATAL state.
Options: /Confirm displays the confirm prompt before setting the
programs in paused state.
Syntax: PSP <program_name>
7.9.6.7.3 PROGRAM STATE UNPAUSE (PSU)
Continues the execution of the paused program. Holdable programs are set in ready
state and resume execution when START is pressed. Non holdable programs are set to
running state.
The asterisk can be used for the program name. The command cannot be used when
the control is in FATAL state.
Syntax: PSU <program_name>
7.9.6.8 TEST branch
The TEST branch displays the menu with the commands to Debug a program without
System Commands
7-53
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
being inside an editor environment. TEST cannot be used when the control is in FATAL
state.
A description of these subjects follows:
Break menu
PROFILE menu
STEP menu
7.9.6.8.1 Break menu
BREAK menu displays a commands used to set and use the break points in a program.
A break point is a point inside the program where the execution stops, setting the
program in ready. To resume the program, press RUN. For holdable programs a START
is also necessary.
The BREAK commands can be used for any loaded program, including programs
currently active. The break points are numbered automatically by the system.
PROGRAM TEST BREAK INSERT (PTBI)
Inserts a break point. The break points inserted have immediate effect.
The required parameters are the name of a program and the line number; that must
correspond to an executable code. The break takes place on the specified line number,
before the instruction is executed. If no line number is specified, an error message is
displayed.
Options: /Label to specify a label instead of the line number.
/Routine to specify a routine name instead of the line number.
Syntax: PTBI <program_name> <line_number>
PTBI/L <program_name> <label>
PTBI/R <program_name> <routine_name>
PTBI/LR <program_name> <routine_name> <label>
PTBI/RL <program_name> <routine_name> <label>
PROGRAM TEST BREAK PURGE (PTBP)
Removes the break points from inside a program. The break point has to be specified,
or a wildcard can be used to remove all the break points.
Syntax: PTBP <brk_pt_num> <program_name>
PROGRAM TEST BREAK VIEW (PTBV)
Displays a list of break points. A wildcard can be used to specify the name of a program.
Options: /Nopage
Syntax: /PTBV <program_name>
Both the /LABEL and /ROUTINE options are to be used to specify a label inside a
routine.
System Commands
7-54
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.6.8.2 PROFILE menu
PROFILE menu displays a menu of commands to control the performance regarding the
time the CPU is occupied by active programs. This information is useful when several
programs are executed simultaneously.
PROGRAM TEST PROFILE DISABLE (PTPD)
Disables the performance calculation. If PROFILE is already disabled, a warning is
displayed.
Syntax: PTPD
PROGRAM TEST PROFILE ENABLE (PTPE)
Enables the performance calculation. The CPU time calculation starts as soon as
PROFILE is enabled.
Syntax: PTPE
PROGRAM TEST PROFILE RESET (PTPR)
Resets the information related to the service calculations.
Syntax: PTPR
PROGRAM TEST PROFILE VIEW (PTPV)
Displays the information on the performance:
PROFILE starting time
PROFILE duration (time lapsed since its enabling)
PROFILE state (enabled or disabled)
following information for each active program: program name, CPU time used,
percentage of CPU time used.
If during the PROFILE enabling an EXECUTE command has been sent, also the
calculations on the service related to its execution will be displayed, identified by the
program name "E".
The performance calculations listed near the program named Free indicate the CPU
time not used by the programs or by EXECUTE.
Options: /4 Useful from SYS_CALL to TP-INT Page
(see Option /4 to view in the 40 columns)
Syntax: PTPV
7.9.6.8.3 STEP menu
The STEP menu displays the commands that allow the execution step of a certain
program to be changed. A step defines how many instructions are to be executed at a
time. As each step is completed, the program is set in READY state. To resume
execution a START is needed for holdable programs, or RUN for the non holdables.
To set the execution step, the program name has to be specified (asterisk is allowed)
System Commands
7-55
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
and it must be already loaded in memory.
When a program step is changed while running, the new step will come into effect
immediately after the execution of the current instruction.
PROGRAM TEST STEP CYCLE (PTSC)
Defines the step as a single cycle inside the program. The program must contain the
CYCLE or BEGIN CYCLE instruction.
Syntax: PTSC <program_name>
PROGRAM TEST STEP DISABLE (PTSD)
Restores the program continuous execution mode and disables the previously set
execution step. The asterisk can be used to specify a program.
Syntax: PTSD <program_name>
PROGRAM TEST STEP FLY (PTSF)
Executes two movements in fly before suspending the running of the program. Defines
the step as a single movement: it is similar to PTSM, but the execution does not stop
after MOVEFLY. It cannot be used on non-holdable programs.
Syntax: PTSF <program_name>
PROGRAM TEST STEP MOVE (PTSM)
Defines a step as a single movement. It cannot be used on non-holdable programs.
Syntax: PTSM <program_name>
PROGRAM TEST STEP ROUTINE (PTSR)
Defines the step as one instruction at a time, except that the routines are executed as if
they were a single instruction.
Syntax: PTSR <program_name>
PROGRAM TEST STEP STATEMENT (PTSS)
Defines the step as a single instruction.
Syntax: PTSS <program_name>
PROGRAM TEST STEP VIEW (PTSV)
Displays the step associated to a program. The program name can be specified with a
wildcard, otherwise all the steps regarding all the programs will be displayed.
Options: /Nopage
Syntax: PTSV <program_name>
System Commands
7-56
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.6.9 PROGRAM VIEW (PV)
VIEW command is used to displays the following information regarding active programs
together with these values:
program name;
program attributes;
arm number;
priority;
primary state (running, in hold, suspended);
number of the line that is executed and program the line belongs to;
error number;
CPU time - is the time, in seconds, during which the program has been actually
interpreted by the PDL2 programs interpreter.
number of cycles.
A wildcard can be used for the program name. The command cannot be used when the
control is in FATAL state or when MEMORY ERASE PROGRAM is active.
Options: /Chain displays the nesting of the calls to routines
routine name
program the routine belongs to
line number
execution context (main program, program routine, routine
exported by another program, call to routine from
CONDITION, private)
state
/Full displays further information, such as:
program attribute
arm number
priority
stack dimension (StSz)
stack currently used (StUd);
maximum percentage of stacks used so far by the program
(StMax)
program current state (running, held, suspended)
reason why the execution has been suspended
number of line being executed and program it belongs to
date and time when the program was activated
breakpoints in the program code
step execution mode
number of condition managers (CONDITION) defined and list
of them (those enabled, locally or globally, are marked with a
wildcard)
number of errors on which the predefined ERR_TRAP_ON
routine is active
predefined variable values in the Program Stack category and
for which a copy exists for each program
nesting of the routine calls
CPU time, in seconds, actually occupied by the PDL2
programs interpreter to interpret the current program.
/Nopage
System Commands
7-57
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
/4 Useful from SYS_CALL to TP-INT Page (see Option /4 to view
in the 40 columns)
/Wide (only from SYS_CALL) Displays some information in full
length (for example owner program name of the line), in relation
to the default mode.
Syntax: PV <program_name>
7.9.7 SET branch
A description of these subjects follows:
SET ARM menu
SET CNTRLR menu
SET INPUT menu
SET OUTPUT menu
7.9.7.1 SET ARM menu
ARM menu displays a menu of commands used to set a certain state of the arm.
7.9.7.1.1 SET ARM DISABLE (SAD)
Disables the DRIVE ON function for an arm, the errors generated when the encoder
cables are not connected to the robot, the indications of the drive failure; it is only
allowed when the system is in PROGR or ALARM state and when the power supply to
the drives is off.
The arm remains disabled until it receives a SetArmEnable command, regardless of any
repowering that may be executed.
The SetArmDisable command is usually used when it is necessary to perform repair
operations on a certain arm. After the operations have been carried out, the system may
still report the presence of some errors because a hardware component has remained
blocked. To remove these alarms it is necessary to restart the Controller.
For systems that have more than one arm, it is necessary to specify the arm number as
a parameter. To indicate all the arms an asterisk can be used.
Syntax: SAD <arm_num>
7.9.7.1.2 SET ARM ENABLE (SAE)
Enables the DRIVE ON function for an arm. This command can only be used when the
system is in PROGR state, with the drives power supply disabled.
For systems with several arms, the number of the arm is to be specified as a parameter.
To indicate all the arms a wildcard can be used.
Syntax: SAE <arm_num>
7.9.7.1.3 SET ARM GEN_OVR (SAG)
Assigns the value specified in the parameter to the $GEN_OVR variable. This command
can be used to increase or decrease the value of $GEN_OVR. If the command is
entered from WINC4G or from SYS_CALL, and the system is in PROGR mode, the
value can only be decreased.
System Commands
7-58
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
Options: /Increment sets the increase/decrease default unit used to
update the current value of $GEN_OVR when the %+and %-
keys of the teach pendant are used to change the value. The
default value is 5.
Syntax: SAG <value>
SAG/I <value> <unit_incr/decr>
7.9.7.1.4 SET ARM NOSTROKE(SAN)
For the temporary disabling of the limit switches set for a certain arm. With the limit
switches disabled the robot can only be moved manually and therefore the system has
to be in PROGR state. The limit switches are automatically reset when the system is in
AUTO or HOLD, when the drives power supply is disabled or when the arm referred by
the Teach Pendant is changed.
For systems with several arms the number of the arm must be indicated as a parameter.
The asterisk can be used to indicate all the arms.
Syntax: SAN <arm_num>
7.9.7.1.5 SET ARM SIMULATE (SAS)
To run programs simulating the movements without actually moving the arm. All the
movement calculations are executed just the same. This command can only be sent with
the power to the drives off (DRIVE OFF).
After the arm has been set in the simulated state, the drives can be powered, after
setting the status selector switch on PROGRAMMING and moving the robot manually.
The command requires an arm as a parameter and can be used to:
test programs without moving the arm;
establish approximate cycle times;
check the program logic.
Syntax: SAS <arm_num>
7.9.7.1.6 SET ARM TP_MAIN (SAT)
Sets the default arm (usually set at 1) for movement by teach pendant. It requires the
arm as a parameter. Requires the arm as a parameter. To use this command, in PROG,
the power supply to the drives must be off. This command is not possible if it is
introduced by WINC4G or by SYS_CALL. The command is only enabled in LOCAL and
REMOTE states, even with DRIVE ON.
The command is not allowed if it is inserted from WINC4G or SYS_CALL with the Teach
Pendant connected (or disconnected while the system is in PROGR state).
It is also disabled when EZ is active.
Syntax: SAT <arm_num>
7.9.7.1.7 SET ARM UNSIMULATE
Deactivates simulation on the arm. This command requires the arm as a parameter and
it is to be sent with the drives power supply disabled (DRIVE OFF).
Syntax: SAU <arm_num>
System Commands
7-59
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.7.2 SET CNTRLR menu
7.9.7.2.1 SET CNTRL KEY_LOCK (SCK)
Prevents unauthorised use of the menu in the Terminal window on WinC4G or the
TP-INT page on TP4i. To use this command a password is necessary. The screen
remains locked and asks for the password to remove this condition and resume access
to the commands menu.
Syntax: SCK password
7.9.7.2.2 SET CNTRL LANGUAGE ENGLISH (SCLE)
To set English language on the Controller. The command has immediate effect as soon
as it is sent.
Syntax: SCLE to select English
7.9.7.2.3 SET CNTRL LANGUAGE ITALIAN (SCLI)
To set Italian language on the Controller. The command has immediate effect as soon
as it is sent.
Syntax: SCLI
7.9.7.2.4 SET CNTRL LANGUAGE FRENCH (SCLF)
To set French language on the Controller. The command has immediate effect as soon
as it is sent.
Syntax: SCLF
7.9.7.2.5 SET CNTRL LANGUAGE GERMAN (SCLG)
To set German language on the Controller. The command has immediate effect as soon
as it is sent.
Syntax: SCLG
7.9.7.2.6 SET CNTRL LANGUAGE SPANISH (SCLS)
To set Spanish language on the Controller. The command has immediate effect as soon
as it is sent.
Syntax: SCLS
7.9.7.2.7 SET CNTRL LANGUAGE PORTOG (SCLP)
To set Portuguese language on the Controller. The command has immediate effect as
soon as it is sent.
Syntax: SCLP
System Commands
7-60
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.7.2.8 SET CNTRL LANGUAGE TURKISH (SCLT)
To set Turkish language on the Controller. The command has immediate effect as soon
as it is sent.
Syntax: SCLT
7.9.7.2.9 SET CONTROLLER VIEW (SCV)
Displays the current default values for the following:
default arm
default port for communications
default system device
current time and date
default backup device
default PDL2 device
$GEN_OVR current increment
startup file
system identifier ($BOARD_DATA[1].SYS_ID)
users who have logged in from Teach Pendant and possibly from WINC4G
software hour meter: number of operating hours in DRIVE ON
DSA-DSP, DSA-MPC, BSP versions
TCP/IP address
version number of the TP4i
version number of the system software and date of compilation
optional system software functions enabled for this Control (predefined variable
$CNTRL_OPTIONS[1])
Options: /4 Useful from SYS_CALL to TP-INT Page
(see Option /4 to view in the 40 columns)
Syntax: SCV
7.9.7.2.10 SET CONTROLLER WIN_CLEAR (SCW)
Deletes the information shown in a window.
Syntax: SCW <window_name>
7.9.7.3 SET INPUT menu
SET INPUT menu contains commands for handling the inputs.
The FORCE, SIMULATE and UNFORCE commands are not allowed if they are not
issued from the teach pendant and the state is T1 or T2.
A description of these subjects follows:
SET INPUT FORCE branch
SET INPUT NOTSIMULATE branch
System Commands
7-61
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
SET INPUT SIMULATE branch
SET INPUT UNFORCE branch
SET INPUT VIEW branch
7.9.7.3.1 SET INPUT FORCE branch
FORCE command forces the value of a certain input. The physical input is no longer
considered and the forced value is used. The operator can choose through a sub-menu
whether to force analog (AIN), digital (DIN), privileged digital (IN), flexible multiples (FMI)
or group (GIN) inputs.
To indicate the input to be forced it is necessary to specify the index.
The asterisk cannot be used. As value to be forced it is possible to indicate:
T: TRUE (ON)
F: FALSE (OFF)
C: the input will be forced to its current physical state.
After selecting the appropriate value, press ENTER.
A digital input that is part of a group of inputs has to be forced as a group and not as a
separate digital input.
This command is not allowed if sent by WINC4G or by SYS_CALL with the teach
pendant not on the RCC (Robot Controller Cabinet).
SET INPUT FORCE AIN (SIFA)
Syntax: SIFA <index_num> <forced_value>
SET INPUT FORCE DIN (SIFD)
Syntax: SIFD <index_num> <forced_value>
SET INPUT FORCE FMI (SIFF)
Syntax: SIFF <index_num> <forced_value>
SET INPUT FORCE GIN (SIFG)
Syntax: SIFG <index_num> <forced_value>
SET INPUT FORCE IN (SIFI)
Syntax: SIFI <index_num> <forced_value>
SET INPUT FORCE TOTAL (SIFT)
Syntax: SIFT
System Commands
7-62
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.7.3.2 SET INPUT NOTSIMULATE branch
Removes a logic input from the simulated condition.
To indicate the input, the index has to be specified. The asterisk cannot be used.
SET INPUT NOTSIMULATE AIN (SINA)
Syntax: SINA <index_num>
SET INPUT NOTSIMULATE DIN (SIND)
Syntax: SIND <index_num>
SET INPUT NOTSIMULATE FMI (SINF)
Syntax: SINF <index_num>
SET INPUT NOTSIMULATE IN (SINI)
Syntax: SINI <index_num>
SET INPUT NOTSIMULATE TOTAL (SINT)
Syntax: SINT
7.9.7.3.3 SET INPUT SIMULATE branch
Sets a logic input in the simulated condition. The physical input is no longer considered
and the value assigned to the port through this command or a PDL2 instruction is used.
A simulated input can also be forced (SetInputForce command). The operator can
choose through the sub-menu, whether to simulate analog (AIN), digital (DIN),
privileged digital (IN) inputs or flexible multiples (FMI).
To indicate the input, the index has to be specified.
The asterisk cannot be used.
SET INPUT SIMULATE AIN (SISA)
Syntax: SISA <index_num> <simulated value>
SET INPUT SIMULATE DIN (SISD)
Syntax: SISD <index_num> <simulated value>
SET INPUT SIMULATE FMI (SISF)
Syntax: SISF <index_num> <simulated value>
System Commands
7-63
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
SET INPUT SIMULATE IN (SISI)
Syntax: SISI <index_num> <simulated value>
SET INPUT SIMULATE TOTAL (SIST)
Syntax: SIST
7.9.7.3.4 SET INPUT UNFORCE branch
Returns a forced logic input to the original physical configuration. The command acts on
analog inputs (AIN), digital inputs (DIN), privileged digital inputs (IN), flexible multiple
inputs (FMI) or group inputs (GIN).
The asterisk cannot be used.
SET INPUT UNFORCE AIN (SIUA)
Syntax: SIUA <index_num>
SET INPUT UNFORCE DIN (SIUD)
Syntax: SIUD <index_num>
SET INPUT UNFORCE FMI (SIUF)
Syntax: SIUF <index_num>
SET INPUT UNFORCE GIN (SIUG)
Syntax: SIUG <index_num>
SET INPUT UNFORCE IN (SIUI)
Syntax: SIUI <index_num>
SET INPUT UNFORCE TOTAL (SIUT)
Syntax: SIUT
7.9.7.3.5 SET INPUT VIEW branch
Displays the forced inputs. The operator can choose through the sub-menu, whether to
display the forced analog (AIN), digital (DIN), privileged digital (IN), flexible multiples
(FMI) or group (GIN) inputs.
If a group of inputs is forced, all the corresponding digital inputs will be displayed as
forced from the moment the SIVD command is used.
System Commands
7-64
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
SET INPUT VIEW AIN (SIVA)
Syntax: SIVA
SET INPUT VIEW DIN (SIVD)
Syntax: SIVD
SET INPUT VIEW FMI (SIVF)
Syntax: SIVUF
SET INPUT VIEW GIN (SIVG)
Syntax: SIVG
SET INPUT VIEW IN (SIVI)
Syntax: SIVI
SET INPUT VIEW SYSTEM (SIVS)
Syntax: SIVS
7.9.7.4 SET LOGIN (SL)
To login on the Controller. The user identification (Userid) and the Password have to be
entered. The user has to declare beforehand the user profile to be used to access the
Controller, through the ConfigureControllerLoginAdd command sent by a user with
Administrator profile.
This command is not allowed from SYS_CALL.
Options: /Logout allows the user currently using the Controller to logout
from the device where the command is entered.
Syntax: SL <username><password>
7.9.7.5 SET OUTPUT menu
OUTPUT menu contains commands for handling the outputs.
The FORCE, SIMULATE and UNFORCE commands are not allowed if they are not
issued from the teach pendant and the state is T1 or T2.
7.9.7.5.1 SET OUTPUT FORCE branch
FORCE command simulates the outputs. The forced value is used by the program and
With regard to Logout, as from System Software version 3.20, there is also a
function available called " Automatic Logout" . For further details see par. 5.3.1
Automatic Timed Logout on page 5-5.
System Commands
7-65
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
assigned to the physical output. Any assignment to the forced outputs will not change
the physical outputs or the program execution. It is not possible to change the value of
the forced outputs until the forced state is removed by UNFORCE. The operator can
choose whether to force the analog (AOUT), digital (DOUT), privileged digital (OUT),
flexible multiples (FMO) or group (GOUT) outputs.
To indicate the output to be forced, the index has to be specified.
The asterisk cannot be used.
As value to be forced it is possible to indicate:
T: TRUE (ON)
F: FALSE (OFF)
C: the output will be forced to its current physical state.
Select the appropriate value and press ENTER.
A digital output that is part of a group has to be forced as group and not as a single digital
output.
SET OUTPUT FORCE AOUT (SOFA)
Syntax: SOFA <index_num> <forced_value>
SET OUTPUT FORCE DOUT (SOFD)
Syntax: SOFD <index_num> <forced_value>
SET OUTPUT FORCE FMO (SOFF)
Syntax: SOFF <index_num> <forced_value>
SET OUTPUT FORCE GOUT (SOFG)
Syntax: SOFG <index_num> <forced_value>
SET OUTPUT FORCE OUT (SOFO)
Syntax: SOFO <index_num> <forced_value>
7.9.7.5.2 SET OUTPUT NOTSIMULATE branch
Removes the logic output from simulated condition. The physical output state is not
interfered with. To indicate the output to be forced, the index has to be specified. The
asterisk cannot be used.
SET OUTPUT NOTSIMULATE AOUT (SONA)
Syntax: SONA <index_num>
SET OUTPUT NOTSIMULATE DOUT (SOND)
Syntax: SOND <index_num>
System Commands
7-66
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
SET OUTPUT NOTSIMULATE FMO (SONF)
Syntax: SONF <index_num>
SET OUTPUT NOTSIMULATE GOUT (SONG)
Syntax: SOSG <index_num> <simulated value>
SET OUTPUT NOTSIMULATE OUT (SONO)
Syntax: SONO <index_num>
SET OUTPUT NOTSIMULATE TOTAL (SONT)
Syntax: SONT
7.9.7.5.3 SET OUTPUT SIMULATE branch
Sets the logic output in simulated condition. The physical output is no longer updated
and the value assigned to the port through this command or by a PDL2 instruction is
used. A simulated output can also be forced by SetOutputForce.
The operator can choose through the sub-menu, whether to simulate analog (AOUT),
digital (DOUT), privileged digital (OUT), flexible multiples (FMO) or group (GOUT)
outputs.
To indicate the output to be forced, the index has to be specified. The asterisk cannot
be used.
To see whether an output is simulated, enter SetOutputView.
SET OUTPUT SIMULATE AOUT (SOSA)
Syntax: SOSA <index_num> <simulated value>
SET OUTPUT SIMULATE DOUT (SOSD)
Syntax: SOSD <index_num> <simulated value>
SET OUTPUT SIMULATE FMO (SOSF)
Syntax: SOSF <index_num> <simulated value>
SET OUTPUT SIMULATE GOUT (SOSG)
Syntax: SOSG <index_num> <simulated value>
SET OUTPUT SIMULATE OUT (SOSO)
Syntax: SOSO <index_num> <simulated value>
System Commands
7-67
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
SET OUTPUT SIMULATE TOTAL (SOST)
Syntax: SOST
7.9.7.5.4 SET OUTPUT UNFORCE branch
Removes the forced value from an output. The physical state of the output is not
changed.
The operator can choose whether to reconfigure the analog (AOUT), digital (DOUT),
privileged digital (OUT), flexible multiples (FMO) or group (GOUT) outputs.
To indicate the output to be forced, the index has to be specified. The asterisk cannot
be used.
SET OUTPUT UNFORCE AOUT (SOUA)
Syntax: SOUA <index_num>
SET OUTPUT UNFORCE DOUT (SOUD)
Syntax: SOUD <index_num>
SET OUTPUT UNFORCE FMO (SOUF)
Syntax: SOUF <index_num>
SET OUTPUT UNFORCE GOUT (SOUG)
Syntax: SOUG <index_num>
SET OUTPUT UNFORCE OUT (SOUO)
Syntax: SOUO <index_num>
SET OUTPUT UNFORCE TOTAL (SOUT)
Syntax: SOUT
7.9.7.5.5 SET OUTPUT VIEW branch
Displays the forced outputs. The operator can choose whether to display analog
(AOUT), digital (DOUT), privileged digital (OUT), flexible multiples (FMO) or group
(GOUT) outputs.
If a group of outputs is forced, all the corresponding digital outputs are displayed as
forced from the moment the SOVD command is used.
SET OUTPUT VIEW AOUT (SOVA)
Syntax: SOVA
System Commands
7-68
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
SET OUTPUT VIEW DOUT (SOVD)
Syntax: SOVD
SET OUTPUT VIEW FMO (SOVF)
Syntax: SOVUF
SET OUTPUT VIEW GOUT (SOVG)
Syntax: SOVG
SET OUTPUT VIEW OUT (SOVO)
Syntax: SOVO
SET OUTPUT VIEW SYSTEM (SOVS)
Syntax: SOVS
7.9.8 UTILITY branch
A description of these subjects follows:
UTILITY COMMUNICN MOUNT menu
UTILITY COMMUNICN REMOTE menu
7.9.8.1 UTILITY APPLICATION (UA)
This command activates the EZ application if this is already installed. This command is
not available from SYS_CALL.
Syntax: UA
7.9.8.2 UTILITY COMMUNICN menu
Includes the commands to manage the communication devices (serial ports and
network devices) to the Controller.
The description of these commands/menus follows:
UTILITY COMMUNICN DISMOUNT (UCD)
UTILITY COMMUNICN MOUNT menu
UTILITY COMMUNICN PORT_CHAR (UCP)
UTILITY COMMUNICN REMOTE menu
UTILITY COMMUNICATION SET_DEF (UCS)
UTILITY COMMUNICATION VIEW (UCV)
System Commands
7-69
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.8.2.1 UTILITY COMMUNICN DISMOUNT (UCD)
Disconnects the currently activated protocol on a communication device.
Syntax: UCD <comm_port>
7.9.8.2.2 UTILITY COMMUNICN MOUNT menu
Contains commands for the installation of different communication protocols to be
activated on a certain communication device. If this is not specified, the default
command ($DFT_DV[8]) will be used.
UTILITY COMMUNICN MOUNT C4G_Int (UCMC)
Activates the communication protocol to the WINC4G program that can be activated on
PC. Before typing this command on the control, make sure that the program has been
started on the PC and that the connection with the C4G Controller is set correctly. To
terminate this type of communication with the PC send the UTILITY COMMUNICN
DISMOUNT (UCD) command.
Syntax: UCMC <port_name>
UTILITY COMMUNICN MOUNT Modem (UCMM)
This "mount" command reserves the use of the specified serial communication port for
the modem.
For the modem configuration, the predefined variables $MDM_INT and $MDM_STR are
available.
To release the port use the UTILITY COMMUNICN DISMOUNT (UCD) command.
Syntax: UCMM <port_name>
UTILITY COMMUNICN MOUNT 3964R (UCM3)
Installs the 3964 R protocol on the port specified as parameter.
Options: /APPL reserved to start the protocol for a specific application.
/lowpri lowers the priority of the server that manages the
communication on the C4G side
Syntax: UCM3 <port_name>
7.9.8.2.3 UTILITY COMMUNICN PORT_CHAR (UCP)
Used to set the characteristics of a communication device. For example for the serial
port the following characteristics can be set:
Baud rate: 110, 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 baud
Bit/characters: 7, 8 bit
Stop bit: 1, 1.5 or 2 bit
Parity: none, odd, even
Readahead buffer presence
System Commands
7-70
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
Ahd Size: size of readahead buffer) 0 4096 with steps of 128 (e.g: 0-128-256-...).
Only present when the buffer is present.
Protocol: none, XON/XOFF
Character management: none, ASCII, passall, ASCII +passall
The command displays a window containing the current settings. The right-hand and
left-hand arrow keys can be used to select the different characteristics. To pass to the
next characteristic, press the ENTER key, or the right, left arrow keys. With the upward
and downward arrow keys values can be selected for the selected characteristic. After
setting the required values for the characteristics, press PREV/TOP.
The CTRL C (^C) key interrupts the UtilityCommunicnPort_char command. If changes
have been made, the user is asked if the parameters are to be saved.
This command is not allowed from SYS_CALL.
Syntax: UCP <port_name>
7.9.8.2.4 UTILITY COMMUNICN REMOTE menu
This menu enables the remote connection via PPP protocol to a modem.
UTILITY COMMUNICATION REMOTE ACCEPT (UCRA)
Accepts a remote connection (passive connection). It requires the name of the device
to which it is to be connected as a parameter.
Syntax: UCRA <remote_device>
UTILITY COMMUNICATION REMOTE CONNECT (UCRC)
Makes the connection to a remote device (active connection). As a parameter it requires
the name of the remote device to which it is to be connected. A Username and a
Password must also be specified.
Options: /DIAL to specify a telephone number. A Username and a
Password must also be specified.
Syntax: UCRC <remote_device>
UTILITY COMMUNICATION REMOTE DISCONNECT (UCRD)
Closes the Controller connection to a remote device. It requires the name of the remote
device as parameter.
Syntax: UCRD <remote_device>
7.9.8.2.5 UTILITY COMMUNICATION SET_DEF (UCS)
Assigns the port specified as parameter to the predefined variable $DFT_DV [5]. It will
be used as default communication port .
To use this command, neither memory nor system protections are to be active.
Syntax: UCS <port_name>
System Commands
7-71
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.9.8.2.6 UTILITY COMMUNICATION VIEW (UCV)
Displays the characteristics of a communication device.
Options: /Nopage
/4 Useful from SYS_CALL to TP-INT Page
(see Option /4 to view in the 40 columns)
Syntax: UCV <port_name>
7.9.8.3 UTILITY LOG branch
LOG command is used to have access to a commands menu that displays the
significant events recorded by the system (errors and actions taken by the user).
7.9.8.3.1 UTILITY LOG ACTION (ULA)
Shows the last actions carried out on the Controller. The requested parameter indicates
the number of actions to show. If not specified, 20 actions will be shown.
Options: /Nopage
Syntax: ULA <num_actions>
7.9.8.3.2 UTILITY LOG ERROR (ULE)
Shows the last errors that have occurred on the Controller. The required parameter
indicates the number of errors to be shown. If not specified, 20 errors will be shown.
Options: /Nopage
Syntax: ULE <num_err>
7.9.8.3.3 UTILITY LOG LATCH ACKNOWLEDGE (ULLA)
Acknowledges the latched alarms.
This command has to be used to confirm an alarm that is defined as "latched" (that
requires confirmation from the user before it can move the robot). The alarms of this
category are described in the PDL2 Programming Language Manual under the
predefined variable $LATCH_CNFG.
Syntax: ULLA <alarm>
7.9.8.3.4 UTILITY LOG LATCH VIEW (ULLV)
Displays the "latched" alarms, i.e. those which have not yet received confirmation from
the user before the robot can be moved.
Syntax: ULLV <alarm>
7.10 HELPIO program
This paragraph illustrates the HELPIO program for the assignment of the Help strings to
the Inputs and Outputs configured in the system. These strings are then displayed by
the TP4I interface (Input /Output page ) and by the DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT/VARS
System Commands
7-72
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
commands of the TP-INT page and the WinC4G Terminal.
This program is contained in the Controller software CD-ROM and can be used as a
suggestion for the compilation of the help strings.
To assign the Help strings the user has to:
Use the HELPIO.PDL program, inserting the calls to the help and helpbw routines
with the opportune strings. The HELPIO.PDL program can be edited on either the
PC or on the control.
To proceed with the creation of the HELPIO.COD file and copy it on the control.
To copy the HELPIO2.COD file, that is protected and cannot be read or changed.
Runs the HELPIO program.
To make the strings effective after each start of the Controller, the activation has to be
inserted in the STARTUP program, bearing in mind that also the HELPIO2 have to be
present in the UD: user disk.
- - Thi s exampl e pr ogr ami l l ust r at es how t he HELP st r i ngs have t o
- - be compi l ed t o di spl ay i n t he DI SPLAY I NPUT / OUTPUT commands.
PROGRAM hel pi o NOHOLD
- - DOES NOT change t he val ue of t hese const ant s
CONST
bi t = 1
di n = 2
dout = 3
gi n = 4
gout = 5
wor d = 6
wor d_bi t = 7
ai n = 8
aout = 9
app_i n = 10 - - $I N
app_out = 11 - - $OUT
- - Rout i ne t o l oad t he dat a needed f or t he f unct i oni ng
- - of t he ser vi ce
ROUTI NE r u_i ni t
BEGI N
ERR_TRAP_ON( 39960)
SYS_CALL( ' mea' , ' hel pi o2' )
SYS_CALL( ' ml ' , ' hel pi o2' )
ERR_TRAP_OFF( 39960)
END r u_i ni t
- - To cal l t hi s HELP r out i ne t o assi gn a st r i ng t o
- - di spl ay i n cor r espondence t o one of t hese por t s:
- - $BI T, $DI N, $DOUT, $GI N, $GOUT, $WORD, $AI N, $AOUT, $I N, $OUT
- - The f i r st par amet er i s an I NTEGER t hat i ndi cat es t he t ype
- - of i nput / out put r equi r ed: use t he const ant s i ndi cat ed
- - i n t he headi ng of t hi s pr ogr am:
- - BI T, DI N, DOUT, GI N, GOUT, WORD, AI N, AOUT, APP_I N and APP_OUT.
- - The second par amet er i s an I NTEGER and i ndi cat es
System Commands
7-73
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
- - t he I nput Out put i ndex. The t hi r d par amet er i ndi cat es t he
- - Hel p st r i ng t o assi gn t o each el ement .
ROUTI NE hel p( ai _i o, ai _nd_name: I NTEGER; as_hel p: STRI NG) EXPORTED
FROM hel pi o2
- - To cal l t hi s r out i ne t o assi gn a Hel p st r i ng t o
- - a bi t of a $WORD.
- - The f i r st par amet er i s t he pr edef i ned const ant WORD_BI T t hat
- - i ndi cat es t he bi t of a $WORD" .
- - The second par amet er i s t he i ndex of t he $WORD ( f or exampl e,
- - 6 f or $WORD[ 6] )
- - The t hi r d par amet er i s t he number of t he bi t i n t he $WORD
- - ( f or exampl e 4 f or bi t 4 of $WORD[ 6] )
- - The f our t h par amet er i s t he Hel p st r i ng f or t he bi t of $WORD
- - ( f or exampl e, t he f our t h bi t of $WORD[ 6] ' )
ROUTI NE hel p_bw( ai _i o, ai _nd_name, ai _wbi t : I NTEGER; as_hel p :
STRI NG) EXPORTED FROM hel pi o2
BEGI N - - mai n pr ogr am
- - Removes t he comment f r omt hi s i nst r uct i on i f i t i s wi shed t o
- - l oad t he Hel pi o2 pr ogr ami n memor y f r omt hi s pr ogr am
- - r u_i ni t
- - The f ol l owi ng i nst r uct i ons ar e onl y exampl es of how t o assi gn
- - a Hel p st r i ng t o a por t .
- - Can be used as a suggest i on t o compl et e t he r equi r ed st r i ngs
- - by t he per son who devel ops t he user i nt er f ace
hel p( bi t , 10, ' bi t 10 gr i pper open' )
hel p( bi t , 11, ' bi t 11 gr i pper cl osed' )
hel p( di n, 4, ' body ar r i ved' )
hel p( dout , 10, ' cur r ent r equi r ed' )
hel p_bw( wor d_bi t , 5, 3, ' bi t 3 of wor d 5' )
hel p( gi n, 1, ' i nput gr oup 1' )
hel p( ai n, 4, ' ar e ai n 4' )
hel p( aout , 7, ' ar e aout 7' )
hel p( app_i n, 2, ' f i r st $i n t est ed' )
hel p( app_out , 6, ' f i r st $out t est ed' )
END hel pi o
System Commands
7-74
HS-0-C4E-USO_38.fm
00/0708
7.11 Types of files available in the System
Extension Description
Backup
extension
(where
applicable)
.ACT
Single file containing list of actions executed on Controller (ASCII format of
.LBA files)
.BKA
.LBA Binary file containing list of actions executed on Controller .BKB
.COD
PDL2 program code, in binary format. It can be edited in IDE environments,
Program Edit, Memory Debug
.BKC
.LBE Binary file containing list of errors detected on Controller .BKE
.LOG FileLOG file, for example ACTION.LOG and ERROR.LOG .BKG
.LSV ASCII version of .VAR file .BKL
.XML
eXtensible Markup Language type file, used to define additional syntaxes on
Controller
.BKM
.PDL ASCII version of a PDL2 program .BKP
.UDB User Data Base type file that contains all permitted User Profiles .BKU
.VAR Binary file containing variables of a program .BKV
.VPS Source file for VP2.Builder .BKW
.LVP ASCII version of VP2 file .BKX
.ZIP Compressed file not foreseen
.C4G
Binary file containing system configuration. It can be loaded or saved in the
system memory using Config. Function, from Setup page (and the
corresponding ConfigureLoad and ConfigureSave commands from WinC4G
and TP-INT; for further information, see CONFIGURE branch, Load menu and
Save menu).
.BK4
WinC4G Program - interface to C4G on Personal Computer
8-1
HS-0-C4E-USO_37.fm
00/0708
8. WINC4G PROGRAM - INTERFACE
TO C4G ON PERSONAL
COMPUTER
8.1 Foreword
This chapter contains the information concerning the WinC4G program that represents
the interface on Personal Computer, to Robot Control Unit C4G.
In detail, it describes:
WinC4G Activation
Connection to the Robot Control Unit
User interface
WinC4G operating parameters set-up
Commands Menu
Most common problems
8.2 Overview
The Winc4g program is a Windows style interface on PC to C4G Control Unit. It contains
several functions:
display of files installed on the robot;
possibility to translate in executable form (.COD) and edit them;
errors search and display;
possibility to open a Terminal window to directly forward commands onto the
Control Unit;
conversion of already existing programs as a function to new reference points.
WinC4G is contained in the system software CD-ROM. It can run on Microsoft
Windows
If the binary file with this extension is not in the related folder of the project
involved, this means that this is the first Export command for the resource (s)
of that project that has been executed.
In this condition it is necessary to:
close the current project (A)
open the project from which the resource (B) is to be uploaded
select the resource involved and execute the Export command
close project B
reopen project A where the Import is to be made
PLC software configuration and use (optional feature)
15-24
HS-0-C4E-USO_48.fm
00/0705
After the file has been chosen, when the upload key is pressed, the resource will
be automatically imported in the current project.
15.6.2.2 Utility
This functionality is one of the most powerful of Workbench, since it allows the recovery
of the PLC resource code, so that it can be shared by several users and different
projects in different PCs.
This implies that a resource takes with it also a configuration that represents the specific
context in which it could be executed. In practice, it is recommended to always import
and export resources from and to projects of the same type, i.e. having a configuration
that unites them.
If a resource is imported from a particular target with a particular configuration, in a
project on a PC with a different configuration, the user will have to make changes to
allow the management of this resource in a different context.
For example, a resource that runs on a controller configured to use system 100 $DOUT
cannot be compiled and thus managed in a project on a PC that does not provide at least
all those I/O points.
In conclusion, this method to copy resources and the possibility of their duplication on
robot controllers is an alternative to that which is described in the par. 15.7.1.3 ISaGRAF
binary files export on page 15-25, but is certainly more dynamic and flexible than the
latter.
15.7 Management of PLC software on the C4G
Control Unit
This section describes how the user can interact directly with the PLC resources, using
a classical commands menu interface, currently available in WinC4G (on Personal
Computer) and in TP-INT Page (on TP4i teach pendant).
Management of binary ISaGRAF files in the C4G Control Unit
System shutdown and restart with PLC program
Resplc program menu commands
Display Resplc command
15.7.1 Management of binary ISaGRAF files in the C4G Control
Unit
The entire ISaGRAF environment created and configured off-line through the
Workbench, consists of a variable number of binary files, that contain all the information
related to the PLC program or programs.
These files are of different types and sizes and do not have extensions.
It is important to underline that with this tool, it is not possible to import a
complete project, but only the resource item
PLC software configuration and use (optional feature)
15-25
HS-0-C4E-USO_48.fm
00/0705
The significance is as follows:
ISPffe0d: hardware and ISaGRAF project configuration file.
ISPxxx03: resources configuration file.
IDSxxx01: resource symbols file.
ISPxxx01: resource POUs file.
The xxx field identifies the resource by the number.
For further information on the ISaGRAF binary files, see the documentation contained
in the ISaGRAF Workbench manual.
The Resplc folder
Binary files management
ISaGRAF binary files export
15.7.1.1 The Resplc folder
All the ISaGRAF binary files are saved (on C4G) in the Resplc system folder in UD:.
This folder is created by default by the system, and any workbench that connects to the
C4G Control Unit will always send the files to this memory location.
From these files the system extracts all the information regarding the PLC programs,
searching for them in this folder. This means that a different arrangement of these files
on the C4G Control Unit, will have no effect on the PLC environment: this will be have
in exactly the same way as if no resource were loaded.
15.7.1.2 Binary files management
These files are not to be edited and then modified in environments other than
Workbench; therefore in the C4G Control Unit they must always be visible, and the user
shall not change the name, the extension or the contents.
Any action of this kind will jeopardise the correct PLC software management and
therefore of the PLC program or programs, generating unexpected results caused by
error conditions that, according to the damage caused, will not be recoverable except
by the reloading of the entire PLC environment (binary files) and restarting the system.
15.7.1.3 ISaGRAF binary files export
The descriptions given in the previous section do not mean that the user cannot manage
these files directly. As for any file, these files can be copied.
Using the system commands for file management, i.e., FilerCopy, ISaGRAF binary files
can be copied/moved from one Control Unit to another, also restoring the Resplc folder
in the Control Unit that does not have it.
This operation is very simple, but it must be remembered that each ISaGRAF project
contains its own definition of the target on which it is to be loaded. This means that each
PLC resource contained in the resource will refer to precise physical points of the C4G
Control Unit, as described in par. 15.3.3 I/O Wiring with C4G Control Unit I/O points on
page 15-7 of this chapter.
It is therefore most important that the user is very careful when exporting ISaGRAF files
from one C4G Control Unit to another, making sure that the I/O configuration is identical.
PLC software configuration and use (optional feature)
15-26
HS-0-C4E-USO_48.fm
00/0705
A transfer to a C4G Control Unit that does not have the same configuration could cause
errors regarding the mapping of the inputs/outputs and it would not be possible to
manage the PLC programs without first updating the configuration involved.
Every export of ISaGRAF files from one Control Unit to another, in any case always
requires a machine restart after the transfer has taken place, using the RestartCold
command.
15.7.2 System shutdown and restart with PLC program
To restart the system after a shutdown, the PLC program is NOT automatically restored.
This means that the user has to manage the restart acting at start-up level
(see par. 6.16.6 Controller (CCS) on page 6-161 or par. 7.9.1.4 CONFIGURE
CONTROLLER STARTUP (CCS) on page 7-17); in this way it is ensured that the PLC
program will always be restarted automatically, both for restart cold and after a
shutdown.
If the start-up program does not exist (no program name in $STARTUP variable),
proceed as follows:
a. create a PDL2 program like the one indicated here
PROGRAM st ar t _mypl c NOHOLD
VAR power _up : BOOLEAN
ROUTI NE cal l _mypl c
BEGI N
SYS_CALL( ' PRA' , ' MYPLC' )
END cal l _mypl c
BEGI N
cal l _mypl c
CONDI TI ON[ 1] :
WHEN POWERUP DO
cal l _mypl c
ENDCONDI TI ON
ENABLE CONDI TI ON[ 1]
END st ar t _mypl c
b. enter the name of this program (start_myplc in the previous example) in the
$STARTUP variable (see par. 6.16.6 Controller (CCS) on page 6-161 or
par. 7.9.1.4 CONFIGURE CONTROLLER STARTUP (CCS) on page 7-17)
c. save the new set-up.
Otherwise, if a Startup program already exists, add the condition and its routine
instructions to this program.
15.7.3 Resplc program menu commands
The C4G user can interact directly with the PLC program or programs loaded in the
Control Unit, using the commands of the Resplc menu. (sent by Teach Pendant through
This program is only an example: if it is wished to customise it for different
management of the POWERUP event, see Chapter 8 - CONDITION HANDLERS -
par.8.3.5 System Events, in PDL2 Programming Language manual
PLC software configuration and use (optional feature)
15-27
HS-0-C4E-USO_48.fm
00/0705
the TP-INT Page).
This is a system sub-menu of the Program command. Fig. 15.22 contains the diagram
relating to it:
Fig. 15.22 - Resplc sub-menu
A list follows of the commands belonging to this menu. For each of these, except for the
Projdir, command, the user has to indicate as parameter the name of the resource to
command.
The current resource name is displayed by the help, which is always active.
A detailed description is now given of all the Resplc menu commands:
Activate
Deactivate
Restore
Utility
15.7.3.0.1 Activate
With this command a PLC resource can be activated and run. The selected resource is
not loaded in memory, the program is just started and the instructions are performed.
There are two options available:
Restart - re-starts the execution of a resource, regardless of its current mode. This
option also acts on the memory, deleting and loading the image of the selected
resource.
Singlcan - sets the Cycle to Cycle mode to the selected resource.
Forces the execution of one cycle only, for that resource.
When the command containing this option is sent, the resource will be run and
automatically stopped at the end of the cycle.
Every subsequent Activate command without this option will start the resource in
run-time mode, which is the default for this command.
PLC software configuration and use (optional feature)
15-28
HS-0-C4E-USO_48.fm
00/0705
15.7.3.0.2 Deactivate
This command is used to deactivate a PLC resource, stopping the execution.
Furthermore, after stopping the instruction, it deletes the selected resource from the
memory.
15.7.3.0.3 Restore
With this command the PLC resource can be loaded into memory. It is a fundamental
action since it precludes the correct management of the resource.
15.7.3.0.4 Utility
With this command access is obtained to the Resplc menu sub-menu, that contains
other commands dedicated to the PLC environment, on the C4G Control Unit.
These are:
Projdir
Save
Unload
View
Projdir
This command is used to enter the PLC project folder that is to be managed by the C4G
Control Unit.
With Projdir it is possible to select a folder that is not UD:\Resplc, which is the default
folder. This command has been implemented to permit multi-project management.
Save
This file saves the code and configuration of the selected resource in the relevant
ISaGRAF binary files
It serves to make the changes made to a resource permanent, both regarding the code
and the configuration (e.g.: cycle time) of the said resource.
Unload
This command is used to delete the image of the resource previously loaded in memory.
After a deactivation or before an activation, the Restore command must always be
sent.
Since this first PLC software version is single-project, and above all, to avoid
wrong and useless settings, its use will not at the moment have any effect and the
PLC environment will always search for the ISaGRAF project files in the default
folder.
PLC software configuration and use (optional feature)
15-29
HS-0-C4E-USO_48.fm
00/0705
It is useful to delete resource information that has been stored previously, and then
update the relevant image in the memory.
View
This command is used to view the information regarding the selected resource that is
present in the C4G Control Unit.
The information is displayed on the WINC4G system windows and on the TP-INT.
Tab. 15.2 - Information displayed by View contains a detailed description of each one.
15.7.4 Display Resplc command
Besides the commands it is also possible to view, on the system display, the activated
PLC resource, exactly like a common PDL2 program.
The command to be used is DisplayResplc (blocks with yellow background):
Tab. 15.2 - Information displayed by View
Information Description
Resource name displays the name of the resource
Project name displays the name of the project belonging to the resource
Configuration name displays the name of the configuration belonging to the resource
Project directory
displays the name of the C4G folder that contains the ISaGRAF binary files (for this
first version it has to be UD:\Resplc\)
Resource number displays the number of the selected resource
POUs number
displays the number of POUs in the project
(programs+functions+function blocks)
Resource file size displays the dimension of the selected resource configuration binary file
Resource code type type of code of the selected resource
Resource mode mode of the selected resource. It may be one of the following:
Mode Description Numeric value
No stored No resource available 0
Stored Resource loaded 1
Ready to Run Resource ready to be started 2
Run in real time
Resource started in continuous
cycle real-time mode
3
Run in cycle to cycle
Resource activated in cycle to
cycle mode: one cycle execution
4
Run with breakpoint
encountered
Resource activated with at least
one breakpoint
5
Fatal error Resource in fatal state -1
Cycle time Cycle time of the selected resource, in milliseconds
PLC software configuration and use (optional feature)
15-30
HS-0-C4E-USO_48.fm
00/0705
This command gives the following information:
Tab. 15.3 - Displayed information
Information Description
Resource name active resource name
Number active resource number
Cycle time resource cycle time, in milliseconds
Cycles number of cycles executed by the resources
Curr. Time resource current execution time
Max. Time resource execution maximum time measured
State resource execution mode. This may be one of the following:
1. RUNNING RT resource in Run in real-time mode
2. RUNNING CC resource in Run in cycle-to-cycle mode
3. STOPPED RT resource in Stop in real-time mode
4. STOPPED CC resource in Stop in cycle-to-cycle mode
COMAU Robotics services
Repair: [email protected]
Training: [email protected]
Spare parts: [email protected]
Technical service: [email protected]
comau.com/robotics